OpenScape Business V3

OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8

Installation Guide

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631
Provide feedback to further optimize this document to [email protected]
As reseller please address further presales related questions to the responsible presales organization at Unify or
at your distributor. For specific technical inquiries you may use the support knowledgebase, raise - if a software
support contract is in place - a ticket via our partner portal or contact your distributor.

Our Quality and Environmental Management Systems

are implemented according to the requirements of the
ISO9001 and ISO14001 standards and are certified by
an external certification company.

Copyright © Unify Software and Solutions GmbH & Co. KG 09/07/2021

All rights reserved.
Reference No.: A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631
The information provided in this document contains merely general descriptions or
characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always apply as described
or which may change as a result of further development of the products. An obligation to
provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of
contract.
Availability and technical specifications are subject to change without notice.
Unify, OpenScape, OpenStage and HiPath are registered trademarks of Unify Software
and Solutions GmbH & Co. KG. All other company, brand, product and service names are
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.

unify.com
 Contents

Contents
1 History of improvements/fixes.........................................................................................................................9

2 Introduction and Important Notes................................................................................................................. 10

2.1 About this Documentation.............................................................................................................................. 10
2.1.1 Documentation and Target Groups.........................................................................................................10
2.1.2 Types of Topics....................................................................................................................................... 12
2.1.3 Display Conventions................................................................................................................................12
2.2 Safety Information and Warnings...................................................................................................................13
2.2.1 Warnings: Danger....................................................................................................................................14
2.2.2 Warnings: Warning.................................................................................................................................. 14
2.2.3 Warnings: Caution................................................................................................................................... 15
2.2.4 Warnings: Note........................................................................................................................................16
2.2.5 Country-specific Safety Information........................................................................................................ 16
2.2.5.1 Safety Information for Australia....................................................................................................... 16
2.2.5.2 Safety Information for Brazil............................................................................................................ 17
2.2.5.3 Safety Information for the U.S.........................................................................................................17
2.2.5.4 Safety Information for Canada........................................................................................................ 19
2.3 Important Notes.............................................................................................................................................. 20
2.3.1 Emergencies............................................................................................................................................21
2.3.2 Proper Use.............................................................................................................................................. 21
2.3.3 Correct Disposal and Recycling..............................................................................................................22
2.3.4 Installation Standards and Guidelines.................................................................................................... 22
2.3.4.1 Connecting OpenScape Office X to the Power Supply Circuit........................................................ 22
2.3.4.2 Connecting OpenScape Business S and OpenScape Business UC Booster Server to the Power
Supply Circuit.......................................................................................................................................... 23
2.3.4.3 Shielded Cabling for LAN and WAN Connections of OpenScape Business X................................ 23
2.3.4.4 Fire Safety Requirements................................................................................................................ 24
2.3.4.5 Lightning Protection Requirements..................................................................................................24
2.3.4.6 Markings for OpenScape Business X..............................................................................................25
2.3.5 Notes on Electromagnetic and Radio Frequency Interference of OpenScape Business X.................... 25
2.3.6 Data Protection and Data Security......................................................................................................... 25
2.3.7 Technical Regulations and Conformity of OpenScape Business X........................................................ 26
2.3.7.1 CE Conformity..................................................................................................................................26
2.3.7.2 Conformity with US and Canadian Standards.................................................................................26
2.3.7.3 Conformity with International Standards..........................................................................................27
2.3.8 Operating Conditions...............................................................................................................................27
2.3.8.1 Operating Conditions for OpenScape Business X.......................................................................... 27
2.3.8.2 Operating Conditions for OpenScape Business S and OpenScape Business UC Booster
Server...................................................................................................................................................... 28

3 Preparing for the Installation of OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8...............................................................29

3.1 Prerequisites for the Installation.....................................................................................................................29
3.2 Preparatory Steps...........................................................................................................................................34
3.2.1 How to Unpack the Components............................................................................................................34
3.2.2 How to Remove the X3W/X5W Housing Cover..................................................................................... 35

4 Preparing for the Installation of the OpenScape Business UC Booster Server........................................37

5 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W..................................................................... 38

5.1 Type of Installation......................................................................................................................................... 38
5.1.1 How to Mount the Communication System to a Wall............................................................................. 38
5.2 Protective Grounding...................................................................................................................................... 39

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide iii
Contents

5.2.1 How to Provide Protective Grounding for the Main Distribution Frame MDFU.......................................40
5.2.2 How to Check the Grounding................................................................................................................. 46
5.3 Cable for direct connection of telephones, trunks, etc...................................................................................46
5.4 Configuration Notes........................................................................................................................................ 47
5.4.1 Board Slots in OpenScape Business X3W............................................................................................. 47
5.4.2 Board Slots in OpenScape Business X5W............................................................................................. 48
5.4.3 Board Installation.....................................................................................................................................49
5.4.3.1 How to Insert a Board..................................................................................................................... 49
5.4.3.2 How to Remove a Board................................................................................................................. 49
5.5 LAN and WAN Port........................................................................................................................................ 50
5.5.1 How to Connect to a LAN or WAN.........................................................................................................50
5.6 Trunk Connection........................................................................................................................................... 51
5.6.1 How to Set up an ISDN Point-to-Point or ISDN Point-to-Multipoint Connection via an S0 Port (Not for
U.S. and Canada)........................................................................................................................................51
5.6.2 How to Set up an ISDN Primary Rate Interface via an S2M Port (Not for U.S. and Canada)..................52
5.6.3 How to Set up the ISDN Primary Rate Interface via a T1 Interface (For U.S. and Canada Only)...........53
5.6.4 How to Set up a Trunk Connection via an E1-CAS Interface (For Selected Countries Only)................. 54
5.6.5 How to Set up an Analog Trunk Connection.......................................................................................... 55
5.7 Connection of phones and devices................................................................................................................56
5.7.1 How to Connect ISDN Phones Directly (Not for U.S. and Canada)....................................................... 56
5.7.2 How to Connect ISDN Phones via the S0 Bus (Not for U.S. and Canada)............................................ 57
5.7.3 How to Connect UP0/E Phones............................................................................................................... 60
5.7.4 How to Connect Analog Telephones and Devices................................................................................. 61
5.8 Interference Emissions................................................................................................................................... 62
5.8.1 How to Attach a Ferrite Sleeve to the Power Cable.............................................................................. 63
5.8.2 How to Attach Ferrite Sleeves to Peripheral Connection Cables........................................................... 64
5.9 Closing Activities............................................................................................................................................ 66
5.9.1 How to Insert the M.2 SSD or the SDHC Card (system with OCCM).................................................... 66
5.9.2 How to Perform a Visual Inspection....................................................................................................... 67
5.9.3 How to Put the Housing Cover in Place.................................................................................................68
5.9.4 How to Connect the System to the Mains..............................................................................................69

6 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R.......................................................................71

6.1 Installation Methods........................................................................................................................................71
6.1.1 How to Mount OpenScape Business X3R in a 19-inch Rack.................................................................71
6.1.2 How to Mount OpenScape Business X5R in a 19-inch Rack.................................................................73
6.1.3 How to Mount the Communication System to a Wall............................................................................. 74
6.2 Protective Grounding...................................................................................................................................... 75
6.2.1 Protective Grounding for 19’’ Rack-mount Installations..........................................................................76
6.2.1.1 How to Provide Protective Grounding for the Communication System........................................... 76
6.2.1.2 How to Check the Grounding.......................................................................................................... 78
6.2.2 Protective Grounding for Wall-Mount and Standalone Installations........................................................79
6.2.2.1 How to Provide Protective Grounding for the Communication System........................................... 79
6.2.2.2 How to Check the Grounding.......................................................................................................... 85
6.3 Configuration Notes........................................................................................................................................ 85
6.3.1 Board Slots in OpenScape Business X3R..............................................................................................85
6.3.2 Board Slots in OpenScape Business X5R..............................................................................................86
6.3.3 Board Installation.....................................................................................................................................86
6.3.3.1 How to Insert a Board..................................................................................................................... 86
6.3.3.2 How to Remove a Board................................................................................................................. 87
6.3.3.3 How to Install a Shielding Cover..................................................................................................... 87
6.4 Trunk Connection........................................................................................................................................... 87
6.4.1 Not for U.S. and Canada: How to Set up an ISDN Point-to-Point or ISDN Point-to-Multipoint Connection
via the S0 Port.............................................................................................................................................88
6.4.2 Not for U.S. and Canada: How to Set up an ISDN Primary Rate Interface via the S2M Port.................. 88

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
iv OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Contents

6.4.3 For U.S. and Canada Only: How to Set up the ISDN Primary Rate Interface via the T1 Interface......... 89
6.4.4 For Selected Countries Only: How to Set up a Trunk Connection via the E1-CAS Interface..................90
6.4.5 How to Set up an Analog Trunk Connection.......................................................................................... 90
6.5 Connection of phones and devices................................................................................................................91
6.5.1 Not for U.S. and Canada: How to Connect ISDN Phones Directly........................................................ 91
6.5.2 Not for U.S. and Canada: How to Connect ISDN Phones via the S0 Bus..............................................92
6.5.3 How to Connect UP0/E Phones............................................................................................................... 95
6.5.4 How to Connect Analog Telephones and Devices................................................................................. 96
6.6 Closing Activities............................................................................................................................................ 97
6.6.1 How to Insert the M.2 SSD or the SDHC Card (system with OCCM).................................................... 97
6.6.2 How to Perform a Visual Inspection....................................................................................................... 97
6.6.3 How to Connect the System to the Mains..............................................................................................98
7 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8................................................................................. 99
7.1 Installation Methods........................................................................................................................................99
7.1.1 Standalone Installation............................................................................................................................ 99
7.1.1.1 How to Set Up a One-Box System................................................................................................. 99
7.1.1.2 Two-box System: How to Stack System Boxes............................................................................ 100
7.1.1.3 Two-box System: How to Set Up the System Boxes Side by Side............................................... 103
7.1.2 19’’ Rack-mount Installation.................................................................................................................. 104
7.1.2.1 How to Mount a System Box in a 19-inch Rack........................................................................... 105
7.2 Patch Panels (Optional)............................................................................................................................... 107
7.2.1 How to Mount a Patch Panel in a 19-inch Rack.................................................................................. 109
7.3 Protective Grounding.................................................................................................................................... 110
7.3.1 Protective Grounding for Standalone Installations................................................................................111
7.3.1.1 How to Provide Protective Grounding for the Main Distribution Frame MDFU..............................111
7.3.1.2 How to Check the Grounding........................................................................................................ 115
7.3.2 Protective Grounding for 19’’ Rack-mount Installations........................................................................115
7.3.2.1 How to Provide Protective Grounding for the Communication System and the Patch Panel.........115
7.3.2.2 How to Check the Grounding........................................................................................................ 118
7.4 Configuration Notes...................................................................................................................................... 119
7.4.1 Board Slots in the Base Box................................................................................................................ 119
7.4.2 Board Slots in the Expansion Box........................................................................................................120
7.4.3 Special Board Slots...............................................................................................................................121
7.4.4 Initializing the Boards............................................................................................................................121
7.4.5 Distribution of the PCM Highways in the Base Box............................................................................. 122
7.4.6 Distribution of the PCM Highways in the Expansion Box.....................................................................124
7.4.7 Time-division Multiplex Channels of the Peripheral Boards................................................................. 124
7.4.8 Board Installation...................................................................................................................................125
7.4.8.1 How to Insert a Board................................................................................................................... 126
7.4.8.2 How to Remove a Board............................................................................................................... 126
7.4.8.3 How to Install Shielding Covers.................................................................................................... 127
7.5 Backplanes of the System Boxes................................................................................................................ 128
7.5.1 Backplane of the Base Box.................................................................................................................. 129
7.5.2 Expansion Box Backplane.................................................................................................................... 131
7.5.3 Connector or Shielding Panels for Backplanes.................................................................................... 132
7.5.3.1 How to Mount Connector or Shielding Panels.............................................................................. 134
7.5.4 Connection to Backplanes.................................................................................................................... 134
7.5.4.1 How to Connect the Connection Cable between the Base and Expansion Box (Optional)........... 134
7.5.4.2 How to Attach a Connection Cable to the External Main Distribution Frame (Optional)................135
7.5.4.3 How to Install the Connection Cables to the Patch Panel (Optional)............................................ 136
7.5.4.4 How to Install the Connection Cables to the S0 Patch Panel (Optional)....................................... 137
7.6 Trunk Connection......................................................................................................................................... 139
7.6.1 How to Set up an ISDN Point-to-Point or ISDN Point-to-Multipoint Connection via an S0 Port (Not for
U.S. and Canada)......................................................................................................................................140

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide v
Contents

7.6.2 How to Set up an ISDN Primary Rate Interface via an S2M Port (Not for U.S. and Canada)................ 141
7.6.3 How to Set up the ISDN Primary Rate Interface via a T1 Interface (For U.S. and Canada Only).........141
7.6.4 For Selected Countries Only: How to Set up a Trunk Connection via an E1-CAS Interface.................142
7.6.5 How to Set up an Analog Trunk Connection........................................................................................ 142
7.7 Connection of phones and devices..............................................................................................................143
7.7.1 How to Connect ISDN Phones Directly (Not for U.S. and Canada)..................................................... 144
7.7.2 How to Connect ISDN Phones via the S0 Bus (Not for U.S. and Canada).......................................... 145
7.7.3 How to Connect UP0/E Phones............................................................................................................. 148
7.7.4 How to Connect Analog Telephones and Devices............................................................................... 149
7.8 Closing Activities.......................................................................................................................................... 150
7.8.1 How to Insert the M.2 SSD or the SDHC Card (system with OCCM).................................................. 151
7.8.2 How to Perform a Visual Inspection..................................................................................................... 151
7.8.3 Only for Standalone Installations: How to Mount the Plastic Covers of a System Box.........................152
7.8.4 How to Connect the System to the Mains............................................................................................153

8 Installing the Linux Server........................................................................................................................... 154

8.1 Prerequisites................................................................................................................................................. 154
8.2 Installation in a Virtual Environment.............................................................................................................157
8.2.1 VM Co-Residency and Quality of Service policy.................................................................................. 160
8.2.2 Time Synchronization of the Guest Operating System Linux............................................................... 160
8.2.2.1 How to Configure Time Synchronization for the Guest Operating System Linux in VMWare........ 161
8.3 Linux Security Aspects and RAID Array...................................................................................................... 162
8.4 Initial Startup without a Software RAID....................................................................................................... 163
8.4.1 How to Install and Configure SLES 12 SP5 without a Software RAID................................................. 164
8.4.2 How to upgrade from SLES 11 to SLES 12 SP5................................................................................. 166
8.4.3 How to upgrade from SLES 12 SP3 to SLES 12 SP5......................................................................... 167
8.5 Initial Startup with a Software RAID............................................................................................................ 167
8.5.1 How to Deactivate the BIOS RAID....................................................................................................... 168
8.5.2 How to Install and Configure SLES 12 SP5 with a Software RAID......................................................169
8.6 Configuring a Uniform Time Base................................................................................................................173
8.6.1 How to Configure an SNTP Server...................................................................................................... 173
8.7 Updates.........................................................................................................................................................174
8.7.1 How to Enable Automatic Online Updates........................................................................................... 175
8.7.2 How to Enable Online Updates Manually.............................................................................................175
8.8 Server Software Backup and Restore......................................................................................................... 176

9 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X.................................................................................................... 177

9.1 Prerequisites for the Initial installation......................................................................................................... 177
9.2 Components..................................................................................................................................................178
9.3 Dial Plan....................................................................................................................................................... 180
9.4 IP Address Scheme......................................................................................................................................181
9.5 Initial Startup.................................................................................................................................................182
9.5.1 How to Start the Communication System.............................................................................................183
9.5.2 How to Connect the Admin PC to the Communication System........................................................... 183
9.5.3 How to Start the WBM..........................................................................................................................184
9.6 Integration into the Customer LAN.............................................................................................................. 186
9.6.1 How to Start the Initial Installation Wizard............................................................................................186
9.6.2 System Settings.................................................................................................................................... 187
9.6.2.1 How to Set the Display Logo and the Product Name................................................................... 187
9.6.2.2 How to Specify the IP Addresses (Optional).................................................................................188
9.6.2.3 How to Specify the Device Name................................................................................................. 189
9.6.3 DHCP Settings...................................................................................................................................... 189
9.6.3.1 How to Disable the Internal DHCP Server.................................................................................... 190
9.6.3.2 How to Enable and Configure the Internal DHCP Server............................................................. 190
9.6.4 Country and Time Settings................................................................................................................... 192
9.6.4.1 How to Select the Country Code and the Language for Event Logs............................................ 192

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
vi OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Contents

9.6.4.2 How to Enter the DECT System ID...............................................................................................193

9.6.4.3 How to Set the Date and Time Manually...................................................................................... 194
9.6.4.4 How to Obtain the Date and Time from an SNTP Server............................................................. 194
9.6.5 UC Solution........................................................................................................................................... 195
9.6.5.1 How to Define the UC Solution..................................................................................................... 195
9.6.6 Connecting the Communication System to the Customer LAN............................................................197
9.6.6.1 How to Connect the Communication System to the Customer LAN............................................. 197
9.7 Basic Configuration...................................................................................................................................... 197
9.7.1 How to Start the Basic Installation Wizard........................................................................................... 197
9.7.2 System Phone Numbers and Networking.............................................................................................198
9.7.2.1 How to Enter the System Phone Numbers for a Point-to-Point connection.................................. 199
9.7.2.2 How to Enter the System Phone Numbers for a Point-to-Multipoint Connection...........................199
9.7.2.3 How to Activate or Deactivate Networking.................................................................................... 200
9.7.3 Station Data...........................................................................................................................................201
9.7.3.1 How to Display the Station Data................................................................................................... 202
9.7.3.2 How to Delete all Call Numbers.................................................................................................... 202
9.7.3.3 How to Adapt Preconfigured Station Numbers for the Individual Dial Plan................................... 203
9.7.3.4 How to Import the Station Data from an XML File........................................................................ 203
9.7.3.5 How to display Mass data............................................................................................................. 204
9.7.4 ISDN Configuration............................................................................................................................... 205
9.7.4.1 How to Configure the Connection of ISDN Stations..................................................................... 205
9.7.4.2 How to Configure the ISDN Point-to-Point Connection................................................................. 206
9.7.4.3 How to Configure the ISDN Point-to-Multipoint Connection..........................................................206
9.7.4.4 How to Deactivate the ISDN Configuration................................................................................... 207
9.7.5 Internet Access......................................................................................................................................208
9.7.5.1 How to Configure Internet Access via an External Internet Router over the LAN Port.................. 209
9.7.5.2 How to Configure Internet Access via an External Internet Router over the WAN Port.................210
9.7.5.3 How to Configure Internet Access via a Preconfigured ISP..........................................................211
9.7.5.4 How to Configure Internet Access via the Standard ISP PPPoE.................................................. 213
9.7.5.5 How to Configure Internet Access via a Standard ISP PPTP....................................................... 215
9.7.5.6 How to Disable Internet Access.................................................................................................... 217
9.7.6 Internet Telephony.................................................................................................................................218
9.7.6.1 How to Configure a Predefined ITSP............................................................................................ 219
9.7.6.2 How to Deactivate Internet Telephony...........................................................................................226
9.7.7 Stations..................................................................................................................................................226
9.7.7.1 How to Configure ISDN Stations................................................................................................... 227
9.7.7.2 How to Configure Analog Stations................................................................................................ 229
9.7.7.3 How to Configure UP0 Stations.................................................................................................... 232
9.7.7.4 How to Configure DECT Stations..................................................................................................235
9.7.7.5 How to Configure IP and SIP Stations..........................................................................................238
9.7.8 Configuring UC Suite............................................................................................................................ 241
9.7.8.1 How to Configure the UC Suite..................................................................................................... 241
9.7.9 Configuring UC Smart Mailboxes......................................................................................................... 242
9.7.9.1 How to Configure UC Smart Voicemail Boxes.............................................................................. 242
9.7.10 Conference Server Settings................................................................................................................ 243
9.7.10.1 How to Edit the Conference Server Settings.............................................................................. 243
9.7.11 E-mail Delivery (Optional)................................................................................................................... 243
9.7.11.1 How to Configure the Sending of E-mails................................................................................... 243
9.8 Closing Activities.......................................................................................................................................... 245
9.8.1 How to Activate and Assign the Licenses............................................................................................ 245
9.8.2 How to Provision the UC Smart Client for Installation..........................................................................248
9.8.3 How to Provision the UC Suite Clients for Installation......................................................................... 248
9.8.4 How to Perform a Data Backup............................................................................................................249
9.9 Commissioning of IP Phones....................................................................................................................... 250
9.9.1 How to Configure an IP Phone.............................................................................................................251
9.9.2 How to Configure a SIP Phone............................................................................................................ 253

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide vii
Contents

10 Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster.................................................................................. 255

10.1 Prerequisites for the Initial Setup...............................................................................................................258
10.2 Backing up the Configuration Data of the Communication System........................................................... 261
10.2.1 How to Perform a Data Backup..........................................................................................................261
10.3 Commissioning the UC Booster Card........................................................................................................ 262
10.3.1 Installing the UC Booster Card........................................................................................................... 262
10.3.2 Configuring the UC Booster Card.......................................................................................................262
10.3.3 Updating the Software for the UC Booster Card................................................................................ 263
10.3.3.1 How to Perform a Software Update............................................................................................ 263
10.4 Commissioning the UC Booster Server..................................................................................................... 263
10.4.1 Installing the Communication Software...............................................................................................264
10.4.1.1 How to Install the Communication Software............................................................................... 265
10.4.2 Configuring the UC Booster Server.................................................................................................... 266
10.4.2.1 Announcing the IP Address of the Communication System........................................................267
10.4.3 Updating the Software for the UC Booster Card................................................................................ 269
10.5 Basic Configuration.................................................................................................................................... 269
10.6 Closing Activities........................................................................................................................................ 269
10.7 Uninstalling the Communication Software (UC Booster Server only)........................................................ 270
10.7.1 How to Uninstall the Communication Software.................................................................................. 270
10.8 Upgrading from the UC Booster Card to the UC Booster Server.............................................................. 270
10.9 Used Ports..................................................................................................................................................272
11 Discontinued components..........................................................................................................................275
11.1 Main Distribution Frame MDFU (Optional)................................................................................................. 275
11.1.1 How to Mount the Main Distribution Frame MDFU to a Wall..............................................................276
11.2 Connection Cable to External Main Distribution Frame (Optional)............................................................ 276
11.2.1 How to Connect a Connection Cable to the External Main Distribution Frame (Optional).................. 278

Index................................................................................................................................................................... 282

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
viii OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 History of improvements/fixes

1 History of improvements/fixes
Changes mentioned in this chapter are cumulative.

Changes in V3R1

Service case ID Date of change Description of change Impacted chapters

PRB000052823 21 Apr. 2021 Updated table with minimun Installation in a Virtual Environment
requirements to install the on page 157
communitcation system in a VM.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 9
Introduction and Important Notes
About this Documentation

2 Introduction and Important Notes

This introduction provides you with an overview of the documentation structure.
The introduction should assist you in finding information on selected topics
faster. Before you begin with the installation and startup of the communication
system, make sure that you have carefully read the safety information and
warnings as well as the important notes.

INFO: The safety information and requirements inform you

about the safety and other requirements to be observed. The im-
portant notes contain information on the emergency behavior,
the standards and guidelines for the installation, and the radio
frequency interference of the communication system. In addi-
tion, you will also find details on and the proper disposal and re-
cycling of the communication system here.

2.1 About this Documentation

This documentation informs you about the hardware installation and initial setup
of the OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 hardware models.
The information contained in this documentation should only be considered a
guideline and does not replace any training.
This document is intended for administrators and service technicians.
For more information beyond the contents of this document, please refer to the
OpenScape Business Service Documentation and OpenScape Business Ad-
ministrator Documentation.

2.1.1 Documentation and Target Groups

The documentation for OpenScape Business is intended for various target
groups.

Sales and Project Planning

The following documentation is intended for sales and project planning.
• Feature Description
This documentation describes all the features. This document is an extract
from the Administrator Documentation.

Installation and Service

The following documentation is intended for service technicians.
• OpenScape Business X1, Installation Guide
This document describes the installation of the hardware and the initial in-
stallation of OpenScape Business X1.
• OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8, Installation Guide
This document describes the installation of the hardware and the initial in-
stallation of OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
10 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Introduction and Important Notes

• OpenScape Business S, Installation Guide

This documentation describes the initial installation of the OpenScape Busi-
ness S softswitch.
• OpenScape Business X1, Service Documentation
This documentation describes the hardware of OpenScape Business X1.
• OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8, Service Documentation
This documentation describes the hardware of OpenScape Business X3/X5/
X8.

Administration
The following documentation is intended for administrators.
• Administrator Documentation
This documentation describes the configuration of features that are set up
using the OpenScape Business Assistant (WBM). The Administrator docu-
mentation is available in the system as online help.
• Configuration for Customer Administrators, Administrator Documentation
This documentation describes the configuration of features that can be set
up using the OpenScape Business Assistant (WBM) with the Basic adminis-
trator profile.
• Manager E, Administrator Documentation
This documentation describes the configuration of features that are set up
using Manager E.

UC Clients / Telephone User Interfaces (TUI)

The following documentation is intended for UC users.
• myPortal for Desktop, User Guide
This documentation describes the installation, configuration and operation of
the UC client myPortal for Desktop.
• myPortal for Outlook, User Guide
This documentation describes the installation, configuration and operation of
the UC client myPortal for Outlook.
• myPortal @work, User Guide
This documentation describes the installation, configuration and operation of
the UC client myPortal @work.
• Fax Printer, User Guide
This documentation describes the installation, configuration and operation of
Fax Printer.
• myPortal to go User Guide
This documentation describes the configuration and operation of the mobile
UC client myPortal to go for smartphones and tablet PCs.
• myAgent, User Guide
This documentation describes the installation, configuration and operation of
the Contact Center client myAgent.
• myReports, User Guide
This documentation describes the installation, configuration and operation of
the Contact Center client myReports.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 11
Introduction and Important Notes

• myAttendant, User Guide

This documentation describes the installation, configuration and operation of
the attendant console myAttendant.
• OpenScape Business Attendant, User Guide
This documentation describes the installation, configuration and operation of
the attendant console OpenScape Business Attendant.
• UC Smart Telephone User Interface (TUI), Quick Reference Guide
This documentation describes the voicemail phone menu of the UC solution
UC Smart.
• UC Suite Telephone User Interface (TUI), Quick Reference Guide
This documentation describes the voicemail phone menu of the UC solution
UC Suite.

2.1.2 Types of Topics

The types of topics include concepts and tasks:

Type of topic Description

Concept Explains the "What" and provides an
overview of context and background
information for specific features, etc.
Task (operating instructions) Describes task-oriented application
cases (i.e., the "How") step-by-step
and assumes familiarity with the asso-
ciated concepts.
Tasks can be identified by the title How
to ....

2.1.3 Display Conventions

This documentation uses a variety of methods to present different types of
information.

Type of information Presentation Example

User Interface Elements Bold Click OK.
Menu sequence > File > Exit
Special emphasis Bold Do not delete Name.
Cross-reference text Italics You will find more
information in the
topicNetwork.
Output Monospace font, e.g., Command not found.
Courier

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
12 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Introduction and Important Notes
Safety Information and Warnings

Type of information Presentation Example

Input Monospace font, e.g., Enter LOCAL as the
Courier file name.
Key combination Monospace font, e.g., <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<Esc>
Courier

2.2 Safety Information and Warnings

Safety information and warnings indicate situations that can result in death,
injury, property damage, and/or data loss.
Work on the communication systems and devices should only be performed by
personnel with proper qualifications.
Within the context of this safety information and these warnings, qualified per-
sonnel are people who are authorized to ground and label systems, devices,
and trunks and put them into operation in compliance with the applicable safety
regulations and standards.
Make sure you have read and noted the following safety information and warn-
ings before installing and starting up the communication system:
Make sure you also read carefully and follow all safety information and warnings
printed on the communication system and devices.
Familiarize yourself with emergency numbers.

Types of Safety Information and Warnings

This documentation uses the following levels for the different types of safety in-
formation and warning:

DANGER: Indicates an immediately dangerous situation that will cause

death or serious injuries.

WARNING: Indicates a universally dangerous situation that can cause

death or serious injuries.

CAUTION: Indicates a dangerous situation that can cause injuries.

NOTICE: Indicates situations that can cause property damage

and/or data loss.

Additional symbols for specifying the source of danger more exactly

The following symbol is generally not used in this documentation, but may ap-
pear on the devices or packaging.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 13
Introduction and Important Notes

ESD - electrostatically sensitive devices

2.2.1 Warnings: Danger

"Danger" warnings indicate immediately dangerous situations that will cause
death or serious injury.

DANGER: Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires

• Note: Voltages over 30 VAC (alternating current) or 60 VDC (direct
current) are dangerous.
• Only personnel with proper qualifications or qualified electricians
should perform work on the low-voltage network (<1000 VAC), and all
work must comply with the national/local requirements for electrical
connections.

2.2.2 Warnings: Warning

"Warnings" indicate universal dangerous situations that can cause death or
serious injury.

WARNING: Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires

• Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the
OpenScape Business X3R, X3W, X5R and X5W communication sys-
tems. Before you start up the system and connect the phones and
phone lines, connect the communication system with a permanent
earthing conductor.
• Provide protective grounding for each system box of the OpenScape
Business X8 communication system with a separate ground wire.
Before you start up the system and connect the phones and phone
lines, connect the communication system with a permanent earthing
conductor.
• Only use systems, tools and equipment which are in perfect condi-
tion. Do not use equipment with visible damage.
• Replace any damaged safety equipment (covers, labels and ground
wires) immediately.
• Replace the power cable immediately if it appears to be damaged.
• The communication systems and servers should only be operated
with outlets that have connected ground contacts.
• During a thunderstorm, do not connect or disconnect lines and do not
install or remove boards.
• Disconnect all power supply circuits if you do not require power for
certain activities (for example, when changing cables). Disconnect
all the communication system's power plugs and make sure that the

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
14 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Introduction and Important Notes

communication system is not supplied by another power source (un-

interrupted power supply unit, for instance).
Before starting any work, make sure that the communication system
is de-energized. Never take it for granted that all circuits have reli-
ably been disconnected from the power supply when a fuse or a main
switch has been switched off.
• Expect leakage current from the telecommunications network. Dis-
connect all telecommunication lines from the communication system
before disconnecting the prescribed ground wire from the system.
• As long as the power supply is switched on, always observe the
greatest caution when performing measurements on powered com-
ponents and maintenance work on PC boards and covers.
Metallic surfaces such as mirrors are conductive. If you touch them,
there is a risk of electric shocks or short circuits.

2.2.3 Warnings: Caution

"Caution" warnings indicate a dangerous situation that can result in injury.

CAUTION: Risk of explosion caused by the incorrect replacement of

batteries
• Use only the approved battery packs.
• The lithium battery should only be replaced with an identical battery
or one recommended by the manufacturer.

CAUTION: Fire hazard

• Only use communication lines with a conductor diameter of 0.4 mm
(AWG 26) or more.
• Do not store any documents or similar flammable items in a commu-
nication system.

CAUTION: General risk of injury or accidents in the workplace

• After completing test and maintenance work, make sure that all safe-
ty equipment is re-installed in the right place and that all covers and
the housing are closed.
• Install cables in such a way that they do not pose a risk of an acci-
dent (tripping), and cannot be damaged.
• When working on an open communication system or server, make
sure that it is never left unattended.
• Use appropriate tools to lift heavy objects or loads.
• Check your tools regularly. Only use intact tools.
• When working on the systems, never wear loose clothing and always
tie back long hair.
• Do not wear jewelry, metal watchbands or clothes with metal orna-
ments or rivets.
• Always wear the necessary eye protection whenever appropriate.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 15
Introduction and Important Notes

• Always wear a hard hat where there is a risk of injury from falling ob-
jects.
• Make sure that the work area is well lit and tidy.

2.2.4 Warnings: Note

"Note" warnings are used to indicate situations that could result in property
damage and/or data loss.
The following contains important information on how to avoid property damage
and/or data loss:
• Before placing the system into operation, check whether the nominal voltage
of the mains power supply corresponds to the nominal voltage of the com-
munication system or server (type plate).
• Follow these ESD measures to protect the electrostatically sensitive devices:
– Always wear the antistatic wristband in the prescribed manner before per-
forming any work on PC boards and modules.
– Always place PC boards and modules on a grounded conductive base.
– Make sure that the components of the communication system (e.g., the
boards) are transported and shipped only in the appropriate packaging.
• Use only original accessories. Failure to comply with this safety information
may damage the system equipment or violate safety and EMC regulations.
• Sudden changes in temperature can result in condensing humidity. If a
communication system or server is transported from a cold environment to
warmer areas, for example, this could result in the condensation of humidity.
Wait until the communication system or server has adjusted to the ambient
temperature and is completely dry before starting it up.
• Connect all cables only to the specified connection points.
• If no emergency backup power supply is available or if no switchover to
emergency analog phones is possible in the event of a power failure, then
no emergency calls can be made via the communication system following a
power failure.
• Before starting wall mounting, check that the wall has sufficient load bearing
capacity. Always use suitable installation and mounting materials to mount
the communication systems and devices securely.
• Do not allow easily flammable materials to be stored in or near the room
where the communication system is installed.

2.2.5 Country-specific Safety Information

Here, you will find information on the specific safety precautions to be observed
when installing, starting up and operating the communication systems in certain
countries.

2.2.5.1 Safety Information for Australia

The following safety precautions must always be observed when installing,

starting up and operating the OpenScape Business X and OpenScape Busi-

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
16 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Introduction and Important Notes

ness S communication systems and the OpenScape Business UC Booster

Server (Application Server) in Australia:
• The OpenScape Business X and OpenScape Business S communication
systems and the OpenScape Business UC Booster Server (Application Serv-
er) must be installed and serviced only by authorized personnel.
• OpenScape Business wall systems must be installed near the mains sock-
et outlet that supplies power to the respective communication system. The
wall socket shall be readily accessible. The integrity of the wall socket must
be assured.
• The OpenScape Business X and OpenScape Business S communication
systems and the OpenScape Business UC Booster Server (Application Serv-
er) must be configured to allow emergency calls (for example, 000) to be
made at all times.
• If no emergency backup power supply is available or if no switchover to
emergency analog phones (trunk failure transfer) is possible in the event of a
power failure, then no emergency calls can be made via the communication
system following a power failure).
• Music on Hold and paging devices must be connected to the communication
system via a Line Isolation Unit approved by the Australian Communications
Authority (ACA).

2.2.5.2 Safety Information for Brazil

The following safety precautions must always be observed when installing,

starting up and operating the OpenScape Business X and OpenScape Busi-
ness S communication systems and the OpenScape Business UC Booster
Server (Application Server) in Brazil:
• The use of the outlet strip with overvoltage protection with part number
C39334-Z7052-C33 is absolutely mandatory. The power supply of the
OpenScape Business X and OpenScape Business S communication sys-
tems and the OpenScape Business UC Booster Server (Application Server)
must be passed through an outlet strip with overvoltage protection.
• The use of shielded Ethernet cables for the LAN/WAN interfaces/ports of the
OCCL, OCCM, OCCMR, OCCMB, OCCMA, OCCMBR, OCCMRA and OC-
CLA mainboards and the UC Booster Card OCAB (Application Board) is ab-
solutely mandatory.

2.2.5.3 Safety Information for the U.S.

The following safety precautions must always be observed when installing,

starting up and operating the OpenScape Business X and OpenScape Busi-
ness S communication systems and the OpenScape Business UC Booster
Server (Application Server) in the United States:
• Disruption of the Network and T1
When communication systems are networked using T1 (1.544 Mbit/s), the
telecommunications company (Federal Communications Commission (FCC))
must be notified whenever a communication system is removed from the
grid.
If any of the communication systems of Unify Software and Solutions GmbH
& Co. KG described in this documentation disrupts the operation of the pub-

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 17
Introduction and Important Notes

lic telecommunications network, the telecommunications company is entitled

to temporarily block access to the outside line. In general, the telecommuni-
cations company will inform you about this in advance. If this is not possible,
you will receive notification at the earliest possible time. In this context, you
will also be informed that you can lodge a complaint with the telecommunica-
tions company.
• Telephone Company Facility Changes
The telecommunication company is entitled to adapt its own equipment, de-
vices, operating procedures, and processes as necessary; Such modifica-
tions may impair the operation of your communication systems. Under nor-
mal circumstances, you should be notified in advance so you can maintain
uninterrupted telephone service.
• Nonlive Voice Equipment
Nonlive voice equipment, such as music-on-hold devices and voice
recorders must be approved and released by Unify Software and Solutions
GmbH & Co. KG and registered in accordance with the rules and regulations
of Subpart C of the FCC Rules, Part 68.
Unreleased devices for voice playback may only be connected through pro-
tective circuitry that is approved and released by Unify Software and Solu-
tions GmbH & Co. KG and registered in accordance with the rules and regu-
lations in Subpart C of the FCC Rules, Part 68.
• Ringer Equivalence Number REN
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of
devices that can be connected to a telephone line so that all the devices ring
when that telephone number is called. In most areas, but not all, the sum of
the RENs of all devices connected to a line should not exceed five. Contact
the local telecommunication company to determine the maximum REN for
your calling area.
• New Local Area and CO Access Codes
Least Cost routing (LCR) must be configured to automatically recognize and
take changes in local area codes and CO access codes into account. Other-
wise, these codes will not be usable for calls when changes occur.
• Hearing Aid Compatibility
Emergency phones and public phones (installed in common areas such as
lobbies, hospital rooms, elevators, and hotel rooms, for example) must have
handsets that are compatible with magnetically coupled hearing aids. Hear-
ing-impaired individuals who are not in common areas must be provided with
hearing-aid compatible handsets, if needed.
All digital phones from Unify Software and Solutions GmbH & Co. KG manu-
factured after August 16, 1989, are hearing aid compatible and comply with
FCC Rules, Part 68, Section 68.316 and 68.317.
• Programmed Dialer features
When you program emergency numbers or make test calls to emergency
numbers with programmed dialer features using products by Unify Software
and Solutions GmbH & Co. KG, stay on the line and briefly explain to the dis-
patcher the reason for the call before hanging up. These activities should be
performed during off-peak hours, such early morning or late evening.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
18 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Introduction and Important Notes

• Connecting Off-Premises Station Facilities

Customers who intend to connect off-premises station (OPS) facilities must
inform the telecommunications company of the OPS class for which the
equipment is registered and the connection desired.
• Direct Inward Dialing Answer Supervision
Customers who operate any of the communication systems from Unify Soft-
ware and Solutions GmbH & Co. KG described in this documentation without
providing proper answer supervision are in violation of Part 68 of the FCC
rules.
Every communication system of Unify Software and Solutions GmbH & Co.
KG described in this documentation returns proper answer supervision to the
public switched telephone network (PSTN) when DID calls are:
– answered by the called station.
– answered by an attendant.
– routed to an announcement administered by the customer.
In addition, every communication system of Unify Software and Solutions
GmbH & Co. KG described in this documentation also returns proper answer
supervision on all DID calls forwarded to the PSTN. Permissible exceptions
are when:
– A call is not answered.
– A busy tone is received.
– A congestion tone (reorder tone) is received.
• Equal Access Requirements
Call aggregators with an increased volume of traffic (such as hotels, hospi-
tals, airports, schools, and so on) must provide end users equal access to
the providers of their choice. The current equal access codes (also known as
Carrier Access Codes, CACs) are 10xxx and 101xxxx, and 800/888 and 950,
where xxx or xxxx represents the provider code.
To select the provider of choice for a call, the user dials a provider-specific
access code before dialing the called party number. Equal access is also ob-
tained by dialing the 800/888 or 950 code of the provider of choice.
Every communication system of Unify Software and Solutions GmbH & Co.
KG described in this documentation is capable of providing user access to
interstate providers through the use of equal access codes.
Modifications by aggregators to alter these capabilities are a violation of the
Telephone Operator Consumer Services Improvement Act of 1990 and Part
68 of the FCC Rules.

2.2.5.4 Safety Information for Canada

DANGER: Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires

Only personnel with proper qualifications or qualified electricians should
perform work on the low-voltage network (<1000 VAC) and all work must
comply with the national/local requirements for electrical connections.

The following safety precautions must always be observed when installing,

starting up and operating the OpenScape Business X and OpenScape Busi-

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 19
Introduction and Important Notes
Important Notes

ness S communication systems and the OpenScape Business UC Booster

Server (Application Server) in Canada:
• Ringer Equivalence Number REN
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) defines how many devices can be
connected to a telephone line at the same time. The termination of an inter-
face may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the require-
ment that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.
• Restrictions for connecting devices
The Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada (ISED) label
identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment
meets certain requirements with regard to the protection, operation and se-
curity of telecommunication networks. The requirements are documented in
the Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements. Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada (ISED) provides no assurances that certi-
fied devices will always operate to the satisfaction of the customer.
Before installing the equipment and components described in this docu-
mentation, it must be ensured that connections to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company are permitted. The communication systems
and servers must also be installed using an acceptable method of connec-
tion. The customer should be aware that compliance with these conditions
may not prevent degradation of performance in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a service technician
designated by the manufacturer or supplier. Any repairs or alterations made
by the user to any of the equipment or components described in this docu-
mentation, or any equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications
company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
To ensure their own safety, users must verify that the electrical ground con-
nections of the power supply, telephone lines and the metallic water pipe
system, if present, are interconnected. This precaution may be particularly
important in rural areas.

2.3 Important Notes

The important notes inform you about emergency procedures and the proper
disposal, recycling, intended use and operating conditions of the communication
systems and servers. In addition, they also include details concerning
the standards and guidelines for the installation, the radio interference
characteristics of the communication systems, and data protection and data
security.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
20 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Introduction and Important Notes

2.3.1 Emergencies
This section provides information on how to proceed in an emergency.

What To Do In An Emergency

First Aid

Calling for Help

Reporting Accidents
• In the event of an accident, remain calm and controlled.

• Always switch off the power supply before you touch an accident victim.

• If you are not able to immediately switch off the power supply, only touch the
victim with non-conductive materials (such as a wooden broom handle), and
first of all try to isolate the victim from the power supply.
• Be familiar with basic first aid procedures for electrical shock. A fundamen-
tal knowledge of the various resuscitation methods if the victim has stopped
breathing or if the victim’s heart is no longer beating, as well as first aid for
treating burns, is absolutely necessary in such emergencies.
• If the victim is not breathing, immediately perform mouth-to-mouth or mouth-
to-nose resuscitation.
• If you have appropriate training, immediately perform heart massage if the
victim’s heart is not beating.
Immediately call an ambulance or an emergency physician. Provide the follow-
ing information in the following sequence:
• Where did the accident happen?
• What happened?
• How many people were injured?
• What type of injuries?
• Wait for questions.
• Immediately report all accidents, near accidents and potential sources of
danger to your manager.
• Report all electrical shocks, no matter how small.

2.3.2 Proper Use

The communication systems and servers may only be used as described in this
documentation and only in conjunction with add-on devices and components
recommended and approved by Unify Software and Solutions GmbH & Co. KG.
The prerequisites for the proper use of the communication systems and servers
include proper transportation, storage, installation, startup, operation and main-
tenance of the system.

NOTICE: Clean the housing of the communication system and

server only with a soft, slightly damp cloth. Do not use any abra-
sive cleaners or scouring pads.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 21
Introduction and Important Notes

2.3.3 Correct Disposal and Recycling

Please read the information on the correct disposal and recycling of electrical
and electronic equipment and old batteries.

All electrical and electronic products should be disposed

of separately from the municipal waste stream via desig-
nated collection facilities appointed by the government or
the local authorities. The correct disposal and separate
collection of your old appliance will help prevent poten-
tial negative consequences for the environment and hu-
man health. It is a precondition for reuse and recycling of
used electrical and electronic equipment. For more de-
tailed information about disposal of your old appliance,
please contact your city office, waste disposal service,
the shop where you purchased the product or your sales
representative. The statements quoted above are only
fully valid for equipment which is installed and sold in the
countries of the European Union and is covered by the
directive 2012/19/EU. Countries outside the European
Union may have other regulations regarding the disposal
of electrical and electronic equipment.

Old batteries that bear this logo are recyclable and must
be included in the recycling process. Old batteries that
are not recycled must be disposed of as hazardous
waste in compliance with all regulations.

2.3.4 Installation Standards and Guidelines

This section provides information on the specifications you must comply with
when connecting the communication systems and servers to the power supply
circuit and when using shielded cabling for LAN and WAN connectors.

2.3.4.1 Connecting OpenScape Office X to the Power Supply Circuit

The OpenScape Business X communication systems have been approved

for connection to TN-S power supply systems. They can also be connected to
a TN-C-S power supply system in which the PEN conductor is divided into a

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
22 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Introduction and Important Notes

ground wire and a neutral wire. TN-S and TN-C-S systems are defined in the
IEC 60364-1 and IEC60364-5-51 standard.
Only qualified electricians should perform any work that may be required on
the low-voltage network. These installation activities to connect the commu-
nication systems must be performed in compliance with IEC 60364-1 and
IEC 60364-4-41 or any corresponding legal norms or national regulations.

2.3.4.2 Connecting OpenScape Business S and OpenScape Business UC Booster

Server to the Power Supply Circuit

For information regarding the connection of OpenScape Business S and

OpenScape Business UC Booster Server (Application Server) to the power sup-
ply circuit, please refer to the manufacturer's documentation for the server PC
and the other components.
Only qualified electricians should perform any work that may be required on the
low-voltage network. These installation activities to connect OpenScape Busi-
ness S and the OpenScape Business UC Booster Server must be performed in
compliance with IEC 60364-1 and IEC 60364-4-41 or any corresponding legal
norms or national regulations (for example in the U.S. and in Canada).

2.3.4.3 Shielded Cabling for LAN and WAN Connections of OpenScape Business X

Compliance with CE requirements on electromagnetic compatibility in the

OpenScape Business X communication systems and their LAN and WAN con-
nections is subject to the following conditions:
• The communication systems should only be operated using shielded con-
nection cables. This means that a shielded Category 5 (CAT.5) cable with a
length of at least 3 m should be used between the shielded LAN and WAN
sockets of the communication systems and the building installation port or
the external active component port. The cable shield must be grounded at
the building installation end or the external active component end (connec-
tion to the building’s potential equalization terminal).
• A shielded Category 5 (CAT.5) cable should also be used for shorter connec-
tions with external active components (LAN switch or similar). However, the
active component must feature a shielded LAN connection with a grounded
shield connection (connection to the building’s potential equalization termi-
nal).
• The shield properties of the cable components should at least satisfy the re-
*)
quirements of the European standard EN 50173-1 "Information technology -
***)
Generic cabling systems" (and all references specified).
• Building installations that are fitted with shielded symmetrical copper cables
**)
throughout in accordance with the Class-D requirements of EN 50173-1
***)
satisfy the above condition.

*) The European standard EN 50173-1 is derived from the international standard ISO/IEC 11801.
**) Class-D is reached, for instance, if Category-5 (CAT.5) components (cables, wall outlets, connection
cables, etc.) are installed.
***) UTP cables (U.S. standard EIA/TIA 568 A/B) are the most widely used cables on the North American
market; this has the following implications for the LAN and WAN connections in communication systems:

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 23
Introduction and Important Notes

2.3.4.4 Fire Safety Requirements

Fire safety requirements are defined on a country-specific basis in the building

regulations. Please follow the valid regulations for your country.
To ensure the legal fire protection and EMC requirements, operate the OpenS-
cape Business X communication systems only when closed. The system may
only be opened temporarily for installation and maintenance purposes.
OpenScape Business system cables comply with the requirements of interna-
tional norm IEC 60332-1 regarding flammability. The following norms contain
similar requirements regarding cables:

IEC 60332-1 EN 60332-1-1 and EN DIN EN 60332-1-1 (VDE

60332-2-1 0482-332-1-1) and DIN
Note: IEC 60332-1 is
EN 60332-2-1 (VDE
equivalent to test method
0482-332-2-1)
UL VW-1

The division responsible for project planning and service must check whether
the IEC 60332-1 norm complies sufficiently with the relevant building regulation
and any other applicable regulations.

2.3.4.5 Lightning Protection Requirements

The protection of communication systems against high-energy surges requires

a low-impedance ground connection in accordance with the specifications in the
OpenScape Business Installation Guide.

NOTICE: Once a communication system has been grounded,

check the low-impedance ground connection of the system us-
ing the ground conductor of the mains power supply circuit and
the low-impedance connection (of the additional permanent-
ly-connected protective ground conductor) to the building's po-
tential equalization bus.

NOTICE:
Fire hazard due to surge voltage
Telecom lines which are over 500m in length or which must
leave the building must be conducted through an additional ex-
ternal lightning protection.
Lightning protection of this kind is known as additional prima-
ry protection. The additional primary protection is guaranteed
by the professional installation of ÜSAGs (surge arresters, gas
filled) in the main distribution frame, the patch panel or at the en-
try point of the pipe in the building. A gas-filled surge arrester

The systems may only be operated with shielded connection cables. This means that a shielded Category
5 (CAT.5) cable with a length of at least 3 m should be used between the shielded LAN and WAN sockets
of the communication systems and the building installation port or the external active component port.
The cable shield must be grounded at the building installation end or the external active component end
(connection to the building’s potential equalization terminal).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
24 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Introduction and Important Notes

with 230 V nominal voltage is switched to ground from each wire

that is to be protected.
Without this additional primary protection, lightning could ir-
reparably damage the boards. This can cause the entire com-
munication system to fail or result in components overheating
(Fire hazard).

2.3.4.6 Markings for OpenScape Business X

The compliance of the equipment according to EU direc-

tives is confirmed by the CE mark. This Declaration of
Conformity and, where applicable, other existing declara-
tions of conformity as well as further information on regu-
lations that restrict the usage of substances or affect the
declaration of substances used in products can be found
in the Unify Expert WIKI at http://wiki.unify.com under the
section “Declarations of Conformity”.

2.3.5 Notes on Electromagnetic and Radio Frequency Interference of

OpenScape Business X
The OpenScape Business X communication systems are Class B devices in
accordance with EN 55032.

2.3.6 Data Protection and Data Security

Please note the details below with respect to protecting data and ensuring
privacy.
The communication systems and servers described in this documentation
process and use personal data for purposes such as call detail recording, dis-
plays, and customer data acquisition.
In Germany, the processing and use of such data is subject to various regula-
tions, including those of the General data Protection Regulation (GDPR) and
the Federal Data Protection Law (Bundesdatenschutzgesetz, BDSG). For other
countries, please follow the appropriate national laws.
The aim of data protection is to protect the rights of individuals from being ad-
versely affected by use of their personal data.
In addition, the aim of data protection is to prevent the misuse of data when it is
processed and to ensure that one’s own interests and the interests of other par-
ties which need to be protected are not affected.

INFO: The customer is responsible for ensuring that the com-

munication systems and servers are installed, operated and
maintained in accordance with all applicable labor laws and reg-

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 25
Introduction and Important Notes

ulations and all laws and regulations relating to data protection,

privacy and safe labor environment.

Employees of Unify Software and Solutions GmbH & Co. KG are bound to safe-
guard trade secrets and personal data under the terms of the company’s work
rules.
In order to ensure that the statutory requirements are consistently met during
service – whether on-site or remote – you should always observe the following
rules. You will not only protect the interests of your and our customers, you will
also avoid personal consequences.
A conscientious and responsible approach helps protect data and ensure priva-
cy:
• Ensure that only authorized persons have access to customer data.
• Take full advantage of password assignment options; never give passwords
to an unauthorized person orally or in writing.
• Ensure that no unauthorized person is able to process (store, modify, trans-
mit, disable, delete) or use customer data in any way.
• Prevent unauthorized persons from gaining access to storage media such as
backup CDs and DVDs or log printouts. This applies to service calls as well
as to storage and transport.
• Ensure that storage media which are no longer required are completely de-
stroyed. Ensure that no sensitive documents are left unprotected.
• Work closely with your customer contact; this promotes trust and reduces
your workload.

2.3.7 Technical Regulations and Conformity of OpenScape Business X

Details on how the OpenScape Business X communication systems meet
conformity requirements can be found here.

2.3.7.1 CE Conformity

The CE certification is based on: 2014/35/EU - Low Voltage Directive (LVD);

(Official Journal of the EU L96, 29.03.2014, p. 357-374) 2014/30/EU - Elec-
tromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC); (Official Journal of the EU L96,
29.03.2014, p. 79-106) 2011/65/EU - Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous
Substances Directive (RoHS); (Official Journal of the EU L174, 01.07.2011, p.
88–110)

Standards reference
Safety EN 62368-1
Electromagnetic Compati- EN55032 (EMC Emission)
bility EMC
EN55024 (EMC Immunity Residential)

2.3.7.2 Conformity with US and Canadian Standards

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
26 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Introduction and Important Notes

Standards reference
Safety USA and Canada CSA/UL 62368-1
EMC Emission Canada ICES-003 Issue 6 Class B
EMC Emission USA FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Subpart B Class B

FCC Registration Number and Power Consumption

A label on the rear of the housing of the communication systems identifies the
FCC registration number, the ringer equivalence number (REN), and other infor-
mation. Upon request, this information may be disclosed to the telecommunica-
tion company.

2.3.7.3 Conformity with International Standards

Standards reference
Safety IEC 60950-1 and IEC 62368-1
EMC Emission CISPR 32

2.3.8 Operating Conditions

Note the environmental and mechanical conditions for operating the
OpenScape Business X and OpenScape Business S communication systems
and the OpenScape Business UC Booster Server (Application Server).

2.3.8.1 Operating Conditions for OpenScape Business X

The environmental and mechanical conditions for operating the

OpenScape Business X communication systems are specified.

Environmental Operating Conditions

Operating limits:
• Room temperature: + 5 to + 40 °C (41 to 104 °F)
• Absolute humidity: 1 to 25 g H2O/m
3

• Relative humidity: 5 to 80%

Ventilation of the communication systems is by convection only. Forced venti-
lation is required for all OpenScape Business X systems if a UC Booster Card
(OCAB) is inserted or if there are more than 32 a/b interfaces in an X5W sys-
tem.

NOTICE: Damage caused by local temperature increases

Avoid exposing the communication systems to direct sunlight
and other sources of heat.

NOTICE: Damage caused by condensation due to humidity

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 27
Introduction and Important Notes

Avoid any condensation of humidity on or in the communication

systems before or during operation under all circumstances.
A communication system must be completely dry before you put
it into service.

Mechanical Operating Conditions

The communication systems are intended for stationary use.

2.3.8.2 Operating Conditions for OpenScape Business S and OpenScape Business UC

Booster Server

For details on the environmental and mechanical conditions for operating

OpenScape Business S and OpenScape Business UC Booster Server (Applica-
tion Server), please also refer to the manufacturer documentation of the server
PCs and the other components.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
28 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Preparing for the Installation of OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8
Prerequisites for the Installation

3 Preparing for the Installation of OpenScape Business

X3/X5/X8
Before one of the OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 communication systems can
be set up and put into operation for the first time, a suitable installation site must
be found, that complies with the operating conditions (see Operating Condi-
tions for OpenScape Business X), and some preparatory activities must be per-
formed.

3.1 Prerequisites for the Installation

A number of different tools and resources are required for the installation of the
OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 communication systems. Certain requirements
must be observed when selecting the installation site. Note that there are
also some specific requirements regarding the power supply when using the
communication systems in the United States and Canada.
OpenScape Business X3W and OpenScape Business X5W can only be wall-
mounted.
OpenScape Business X3R and OpenScape Business X5R are communica-
tion systems in 19-inch rack mount cases that can be mounted in 19-inch rack
mount cabinets, as standalone units (desktop operation) or as wall-mounted
units.
OpenScape Business X8 is a modular communication system that can be used
as a one-box system (base box) or a two-box system (base box + expansion
box). OpenScape Business X8 can be installed as a standalone unit or mounted
in a 19-inch rack.
Warning: Only authorized service personnel should install and start up the
communication systems.

Tools and Resources

The following tools and resources are required:

• Diagonal cutting pliers, telephone pliers, wire stripper, flat-nosed pliers
• Slotted screwdriver set
• Phillips or Pozidriv screwdriver set
• TORX screwdriver set
• Meter stick
• Hex or open-end wrench, 8 mm, open-end wrench, 13 mm (only for X8)
• Board wrench (only for X8)
• Drill, hammer, spirit level (only for wall mounting)
• Wiring tool for splitting and jumper strips in main distribution frames
• Digital multimeter for testing ground connections and partial voltages

General Prerequisites for Selecting the Installation Site

Make sure that the installation site meets the following requirements:
• Do not expose the communication system (and the 19" rack) to direct
sources of heat (for example, direct sunlight, radiators, etc).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 29
Preparing for the Installation of OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8

• The communication system (and the 19 '' rack) must not be exposed to ex-
cessive dust.
• Avoid any contact between the communication system (and the 19 '' rack)
and abrasive chemicals.
• Avoid all condensation of humidity on or in the communication system during
operation.
The communication system must be completely dry before putting it into ser-
vice.
• Avoid standard carpeting, as it tends to produce electrostatic charges.
• Note the environmental and mechanical conditions for operating the commu-
nication system (see Operating Conditions for OpenScape Business X).
• The power cable connector must be readily accessible for quick disconnec-
tion from the power source at any time.
• Allow sufficient space for a main distribution frame or other additional equip-
ment.
• For U.S. and Canada only: The distance between equipment from Unify
Software and Solutions GmbH & Co. KG and other electrical equipment
must be no less than 40 in. (101.6 cm). The National Electrical Code (NEC)
requires 36 in. (91.4 cm) of clearance in front of electrical equipment and 40
in. (101.6 cm) of clearance from other electrical service equipment.

Special Prerequisites for Selecting the X3R/X5R Installation Site

Make sure that the installation site meets the following requirements:
• Make sure that a clearance distance of 10 cm to the housing is maintained to
guarantee sufficient ventilation for the communication system.

Special Prerequisites for Selecting the X3W/X5W Installation Site for Wall
Mounting

Make sure that the installation site meets the following requirements for wall
mounting:
• The following minimum clearances to the housing must be maintained to
guarantee sufficient ventilation for the communication system:
– Left side: 30 cm (for board installation or board change)
– Right side, top and bottom: 10 cm each
• For U.S. and Canada only: The equipment room in which the communication
system is installed must provide adequate space for installation and main-

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
30 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Preparing for the Installation of OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8

tenance activities (such as removal and replacement of the housing cover).

The following figure shows the space requirements.
We recommend the use of a sheet of plywood with a minimum thickness of
12,5 mm (0.5'') and minimum dimensions of 122 x 122 cm (4 ft. x 4 ft.).

Special Prerequisites for Selecting the X8 Installation Site for a

Standalone Installation

Make sure that the installation site meets the following requirements for stand-
alone installation:
• Between the base of a system box and the ground or between stacked sys-
tem boxes, a minimum clearance of 50 mm must be maintained to guarantee
sufficient ventilation for the system boxes.
• When system boxes are stacked, the base box must always be at the bottom
of the stack.
• Allow a minimum clearance of 10 cm at the rear and the front of the system
boxes for board installation and change.

Special Prerequisites for Selecting the X8 Installation Site for 19-Inch Rack
Mounting

Make sure that the installation site meets the following requirements for 19’’
rack-mount installation:

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 31
Preparing for the Installation of OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8

• The 19-inch rack(s) provided for installing the OpenScape Business X8 com-
munication system must have the following characteristics:
– Components installed in the 19-inch rack must be accessible from both
the front and the rear.
– It should be possible to install components both at the front and at the
rear of the 19-inch rack (no less than four vertical bars).
– It is recommended that the width of the cabinet measure 70 to 80 cm; the
depth at least 60 cm. Deeper cabinets (80 to 90 cm) make installation,
cable servicing, and the installation of additional components in the rear
of the cabinet much easier.
– The support brackets required for installing the system boxes must have
a minimum ultimate load of 40 kg. The support brackets must be obtained
from vendor of the 19-inch rack.
– The system boxes must be fixed to the cabinet bars using the angle
brackets included in the delivery.
• One height unit (one height unit is approx. 1.7” = 43 mm) must be kept clear
above the system box to accommodate the gray plastic cover attached to the
top of a system box. Never remove this plastic cover.
• To guarantee sufficient heat dissipation, the base box must be mounted at
the lowest position in a 19-inch rack. In a 19-inch rack with active (heat-emit-
ting) components already installed, the lowest position must be cleared for
installation of the base box. If inactive components (e.g., patch panels) are
involved, the base box can also be installed above them.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
32 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Preparing for the Installation of OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8

• The following minimum clearance must be observed in order to ensure ade-

quate ventilation of the system boxes in the 19-inch rack:
– three height units between two stacked system boxes.
– one height unit above one system box if a patch panel is being installed,
for example.

Figure 1: OpenScape Business X8 – Examples for a 19-inch rack height

of 1.92 m (37 height units)

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 33
Preparing for the Installation of OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8
Preparatory Steps

For U.S. and Canada only: Prerequisites for Connecting the Power Supply

The power supply for the communication systems must meet the following re-
quirements:
• Electrical Connection Specifications:

Nominal Nominal voltage Nominal frequency Wall Outlet

voltage range range Configura-
tions
from to from to
120 110 V AC 130 V AC 47 Hz 63 Hz NEMA
V AC/60 Hz 5-15, 2-
pin, 3-wire,
grounded
• For X8 only: A UL-listed or CSA-certified overvoltage protector must be in-
serted between the socket and the communication system. Two system box-
es can be connected to each overvoltage protector.

NOTICE: The OpenScape Business X8 communication sys-

tem must not be connected directly to a socket!
• For X3/X5 only: An overvoltage protector must be inserted between the
socket and the communication system.
• For X8 only: The power source must not be more than 2.4 m (8 ft.) away
from the communication system and must provide 120 V AC (single-phase,
fused) power at 50-60 Hz and 20 A.
• For X3/X5 only: The power source must not be more than 2 m (6 ft.) away
from the communication system and must provide 120 V AC (single-phase,
fused) power at 50-60 Hz.
• An independent electric circuit with an isolated ground conductor should be
used for each communication system.
• A warning should be attached to the circuit breaker of the power supply to
prevent accidental removal of power from the communication system.

3.2 Preparatory Steps

Unpack and check the supplied components before starting the installation.

3.2.1 How to Unpack the Components

Proceed as follows to unpack the communication system and parts supplied:

Step by Step
1) Open the packaging without damaging the contents.
2) Check the components delivered against the packing slip to make sure noth-
ing is missing.
3) Report any shipping damage to the address indicated on the packing slip.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
34 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Preparing for the Installation of OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8

4) All packaging material must be disposed of in compliance with the relevant

country-specific requirements.

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Only use communication systems, tools and equipment which are in
perfect condition. Do not use equipment with visible damage.

3.2.2 How to Remove the X3W/X5W Housing Cover

Step by Step
1) Loosen the two screwed plugs on the housing cover with a slotted screw dri-
ver.
2) Remove the housing cover.

CAUTION: Cuts caused by sharp edges on the shielding plate

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 35
Preparing for the Installation of OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8

Make sure that you only touch the outside of the housing cover. The
shielding plate on the inside of the housing cover may have sharp
edges which can cause cuts.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
36 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Preparing for the Installation of the OpenScape Business UC Booster Server

4 Preparing for the Installation of the OpenScape

Business UC Booster Server
Before the OpenScape UC Business Booster server can be installed and put
into operation for the first time, some preparatory activities must be performed.
The UC Booster Server is supported only in combination with the following
mainboards:
• OCCM
• OCCMR
• OCCL
The following system do not require a UC Booster Server:
• OCCMA
• OCCMB
• OCCMRA
• OCCMRB
• OCCLA
For the OpenScape UC Business Booster Server, the OpenScape Business
communication software is installed on a Linux server.
The prerequisites for the Linux server and the installation of the Linux operating
system can be found in Installing the Linux Server on page 154.
The prerequisites for the OpenScape Business UC Booster Server and the in-
stallation of the OpenScape Business communication software can be found in
Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster on page 255.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 37
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W
Type of Installation

5 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/

X5W
This section covers the standard installation procedure for the OpenScape
Business X3W and OpenScape Business X5W communication systems.
OpenScape Business X3W and OpenScape Business X5W can only be wall-
mounted.

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
• Work on the housing must only be performed in the de-energized
state.
• Before starting any work, make sure that all circuits are de-energized.
Never take it for granted that all circuits have reliably been discon-
nected from the power supply when a fuse or a main switch has been
switched off.

5.1 Type of Installation

The OpenScape Business X3W and OpenScape Business X5W communication
systems are released exclusively for wall mounting.

5.1.1 How to Mount the Communication System to a Wall

Prerequisites
The prerequisites for selecting the installation site were taken into account (see
Prerequisites for the Installation on page 29).
A strong wall with enough space for the installation of the communication sys-
tem and any other components (for example, a main distribution frame) is avail-
able.

Step by Step
1) Attach the enclosed drilling template at the desired location.
2) Drill three holes.
3) Insert the wall anchors into the drill holes and screw in the screws, leaving
approx. 5 mm projecting.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
38 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W
Protective Grounding

4) Hang the communication system on the screws at the mounting holes and
align it.

Figure 2: OpenScape Business X3W/X5W - Mounting Holes in the Rear

Wall of the Housing
5) Tighten the three screws.

5.2 Protective Grounding

The protective grounding provides a secure connection to the ground potential
to protect against dangerously high touch voltages in the event of a malfunction.

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
• Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the
OpenScape Business X3W and OpenScape Business X5W com-
munication systems and possibly any main distribution frames being
used. Connect your communication system and your main distribu-
tion frame to the ground wire before starting up the system and con-
necting telephones and lines.
• Make sure that the ground wires laid are protected and strain-re-
lieved.

WARNING:
Assembly of Protection Ground Terminal
In case of a migration from HiPath 3350/3550 to OpenScape Business
X3W/X5W, the protection ground terminal has to be installed as shown
in Figure: Assembly of the protection ground terminal.
Afterwards, the protection ground wire has to be connected as described
in How to Provide Protective Grounding for the Main Distribution Frame
MDFU.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 39
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

Figure 3: Assembly of the protection ground terminal

5.2.1 How to Provide Protective Grounding for the Main Distribution Frame
MDFU
Prerequisites
A low-impedance ground connection is available.

DANGER:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Only personnel with proper qualifications or qualified electricians should
perform work on the low-voltage network (<1000 VAC) and all work must
comply with the national/local requirements for electrical connections.

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
• Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the
OpenScape Business X3W and OpenScape Business X5W com-
munication systems and possibly any main distribution frames being
used. Connect your communication system and your main distribu-
tion frame to the ground wire before starting up the system and con-
necting telephones and lines.
• Make sure that the ground wires laid are protected and strain-re-
lieved.

The grounding of the communication system and the external main distribution
frame must be performed from the grounding point in a star configuration.
The implementation rules specified in IEC 60364, IEC 60950-1 and
IEC 62368-1 must be complied with during the installation.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
40 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

NOTICE: The listed requirements also apply if you are using a

main distribution frame from another vendor instead of the MD-
FU.

Proceed as follows to ensure protective grounding:

Step by Step
1) Attach a separate ground wire to the communication system's ground termi-
nal.
2) Provide strain relief for the ground wire by securing it to of the communica-
tion system with a cable tie.
3) If an MDFU is present: Attach a separate ground wire to the ground terminal
of the MDFU main distribution frame.
4) If an MDFU is present: Provide strain relief for the ground wire by securing it
to the housing of the main distribution frame MDFU with a cable tie.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 41
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

5) Select one of the following options:

• Not for U.S. and Canada - Equipotential bonding strip
Connect the separate ground wire(s) with the grounding point (e.g., the
equipotential bonding strip of the building) as illustrated in the conceptual
diagram.

Make sure that all ground wires laid are protected and strain-relieved.
2
The minimum conductor cross-section is 12 AWG/2.5 mm . A minimum
2
conductor cross section of 10 AWG/4 mm is needed to block the effects
of external factors if the ground wire cannot be protected.
• Not for U.S. and Canada - Outlet to the low-voltage network
Connect a junction box to the low-voltage network close to the Schuko
wall socket into which the communication system is plugged. Use a sep-

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
42 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

arate ground wire to set up a fixed connection to the junction box as illus-
trated in the conceptual diagram.

Make sure that all ground wires laid are protected and strain-relieved.
2
The minimum conductor cross-section is 16 AWG/1.5 mm .
• Not for U.S. and Canada - Lockable grounded plug to the low-volt-
age network
Insert the lockable grounded plug (special Schuko with fixed protective
earth conductor) into a wall outlet of the low-voltage network and lock the
plug. Use the ground wire connected to the plug to set up a fixed con-
nection to the communication system, as illustrated in the conceptual di-

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 43
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

agram. Use a second lockable grounded plug for a possibly existing MD-
FU.

Make sure that all ground wires laid are protected and strain-relieved.
2
The minimum conductor cross section is 16 AWG/1.5 mm for up to 2m
2
and at least 12 AWG/2.5 mm for 2m and above.
• For U.S. and Canada only: Main ground busbar
Connect the separate ground wire(s) with the grounding point (e.g., the
main ground busbar, ground field) as illustrated in the conceptual dia-
gram.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
44 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

Make sure that all ground wires laid are protected and strain-relieved.
2
The minimum conductor cross-section is 12 AWG/2.5 mm . A minimum
2
conductor cross section of 10 AWG/4 mm is needed to block the effects
of external factors if the ground wire cannot be protected.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 45
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W
Cable for direct connection of telephones, trunks, etc.

5.2.2 How to Check the Grounding

Prerequisites
The communication system is not yet connected to the low-voltage network via
the power cable.
The communication system and the main distribution frame have been properly
grounded using separate ground wires.

Run the following test before startup to make sure that the protective grounding
for the communication system and the MDF (if any) is working properly.

Step by Step
1) Check the ohmic resistance of the separate ground connection to the com-
munication system:
The measurement is taken between the ground contact of a grounded power
outlet of the home installation (where the communication system is connect-
ed) and the housing of the communication system.
2) If a main distribution frame is used, check the ohmic resistance of the sepa-
rate ground connections to the main distribution frame.
The measurement is taken between the ground contact of a grounded power
outlet of the home installation (where the communication system is connect-
ed) and the housing of the main distribution frame.

The result (reference value) of a measurement must be significantly less than

10 Ohms.
If you obtain some other results, contact a qualified electrician. The electrician
will need to check the equipotential bonding of the domestic installation and en-
sure the low resistance grounding (ohmage) of the earthing conductors.

5.3 Cable for direct connection of telephones, trunks, etc.

The connection of telephones, trunks, etc., for the OpenScape Business wall
model occurs directly at the board.

Wieland screw clamp

When using individual Wieland screw clamps, the connection cables of the
phones, trunks, etc. must be connected individually.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
46 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W
Configuration Notes

Figure 4: Wieland screw clamp

5.4 Configuration Notes

The configuration notes include information about the board slots of the
OpenScape Business X3W and OpenScape Business X5W communication
systems.

5.4.1 Board Slots in OpenScape Business X3W

OpenScape Business X3W includes a board shelf with three slot levels, which
are equipped as follows.
• Slot level 1: slots for two peripheral boards
• Slot level 2: slot for the OCCM mainboard
• Slot level 3: slots for five options

Figure 5: OpenScape Business X3W - Board Slots

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 47
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

5.4.2 Board Slots in OpenScape Business X5W

OpenScape Business X5W includes a board shelf with six slot levels.
The slot levels are equipped as follows:
• Slot levels 1 through 3: each slot level provides slots for two peripheral
boards
• Slot level 4: slot for the OCCM, OCCMA and OCCMB mainboard
• Slot level 6: slot for five options

O1
Slot 4

Slot 8

Slot 6

O2
OCCM
Wall

O3
O4
Slot 5

Slot 9

Slot 7

O5

1 2 3 4 5
Slot levels

Figure 6: OpenScape Business X5W - Board Slots

Only the new fan kit (L30251-U600-A985) can be used in new systems. Existing
fan kits (L30251-U600-A918), cannot be connected.

NOTICE: Existing OpenScape Business systems need not to

be upgraded to new backplanes, in case that a UPSC-D/DR
power supply is replaced by an OCPSM. The appropriate PSU
Upgrade Kit contains all the necessary adapters and cables.
When migrating from HiPath 33xx / 35xx to OpenScape Busi-
ness, the existing backplane does not need to be replaced if an
OCPSM power supply is used instead of the PSU and the ap-
propriate PSU upgrade Kit is used.
The slots of the new backplane are recognized from OpenScape
Business V2 onwards. Systems with SW version V1 needs to be
upgraded to SW version V2 before replacing the old backplane
by a new one.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
48 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

IMPORTANT: (*) With new backplanes, Slot level 5 (Slot 10) is

no longer provided by OpenScape Business X5W wall systems.
Cards with SIPAC connector strip (SLMO24, SLC16N) cannot
be used in combination with the new backplane.

5.4.3 Board Installation

5.4.3.1 How to Insert a Board

Prerequisites
The housing cover is not mounted.
A free board slot is available.

NOTICE: Always wear an antistatic wristband when handling

boards.
The ESD measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive de-
vices must be observed and followed (see Warnings: Note on
page 16)

Step by Step
1) Remove the stabilizer cap.
2) Using its guide rails slide the board into the desired board slot until it stops.
3) Mount the stabilizer cap.

5.4.3.2 How to Remove a Board

Prerequisites
The housing cover is not mounted.

NOTICE: Always wear an antistatic wristband when handling

boards.
The ESD measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive de-
vices must be observed and followed (see Warnings: Note on
page 16)

Step by Step
1) Remove the stabilizer cap.
2) Pull out the board from the board shelf.
3) Mount the stabilizer cap.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 49
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W
LAN and WAN Port

5.5 LAN and WAN Port

The OpenScape Business X3W and OpenScape Business X5W communication
systems offer different options for LAN and WAN connections.

NOTICE: To ensure sufficient electromagnetic shielding accord-

ing to EN 55032, the cable shield of each LAN and WAN ca-
ble must be conductively connected to the metal housing of the
communication system.

5.5.1 How to Connect to a LAN or WAN

Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system and any main distribution frames used before con-
necting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with
a conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger. The recom-
mended cable is a shielded Cat.5 cable (multi-element cables character-
ized up to 100 MHz - horizontal and building backbone cables as per EN
50288). These are specified with a conductor diameter from 0.4 mm to
0.8 mm.

At least one free LAN or WAN port is available (mainboard OCCM, OCCMA,
OCCMB or Application Board OCAB).

Step by Step
1) Strip the cable shield of the LAN/WAN cable over a length of about 3 cm.
The exposed cable shield must be within reach of a T-tongue of the housing.
2) Wrap the exposed cable shield of the LAN/WAN cable with conductive adhe-
sive tape (at least 1.5 times around).
3) Use a cable tie [B] to attach the cable shield [A] (wrapped with the conduc-
tive tape) of the LAN/WAN cable to one of the T tongues [C] of the housing

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
50 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W
Trunk Connection

to ensure a permanent conductive connection between the cable shield and

the housing.

4) Connect the required LAN or WAN port to the device to be connected (LAN
switch, IP phone, DSL modem, etc.).

5.6 Trunk Connection

The OpenScape Business X3W and OpenScape Business X5R communication
systems offer different options for trunk connections and thus for access to the
public communication network.
You can select the trunk connection or connections required for your communi-
cation system from the following options:
• ISDN point-to-point connection and ISDN point-to-multipoint connection via
S0 interface (not for U.S. and Canada)
• Only for OpenScape Business X5W and X3W: ISDN Primary Rate Interface
via S2M interface (not for U.S. and Canada)
• Only for OpenScape Business X5W: ISDN Primary Rate Interface via T1 in-
terface (for U.S. and Canada only)
• Only for OpenScape Business X5W and X3W: Trunk connection with CAS
protocol via CAS interface (for selected countries only)
• Analog trunk connections

5.6.1 How to Set up an ISDN Point-to-Point or ISDN Point-to-Multipoint

Connection via an S0 Port (Not for U.S. and Canada)
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 51
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system and any main distribution frames used before con-
necting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

At least one free S0 port is available (mainboard OCCM or peripheral board

STLSX2, STLSX4).
During startup, the S0 interface must be configured as an ISDN point-to-point or
ISDN point-to-multipoint connection.
An ISDN point-to-point or point-to-multipoint connection is available.

Step by Step
Connect the desired S0 port with NTBA of the ISDN point-to-point or ISDN multi-
point connection.
Select one of the following options to do this:
• If the connection is to be made via the external main distribution frame MD-
FU, connect the NTBA connection cable to the desired splitting strip/jumper
strip in the MDFU.
• If the connection is to be made directly at the communication system, i.e., via
a CABLU with Wieland screw clamps, insert the connection cable to the NT-
BA into the desired RJ45 connector of the CABLUS.

5.6.2 How to Set up an ISDN Primary Rate Interface via an S2M Port (Not for
U.S. and Canada)
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system and any main distribution frames used before con-
necting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
52 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

OpenScape Business X3W or OpenScape Business X5W is equipped with one

TS2N board.

NOTICE: For OpenScape Business X3W, CUX3W must be

used as backplane.

One ISDN Primary Rate Interface is available.

Step by Step
Connect the S2M port with the NTPM the ISDN Primary Rate Interface.
Select one of the following options to do this:
• If you are using a symmetric line (120 ohms), it is connected through the
edge connector X2 of the TS2N board. Insert a Wieland screw clamp on the
edge connector and attach the cable to the NTPM.
• If you are using an MW line (patch cable), it is connected via the RJ45 jack
X5 of the TS2N board. Plug the connection cable to the NTPM into the RJ45
jack.

5.6.3 How to Set up the ISDN Primary Rate Interface via a T1 Interface (For
U.S. and Canada Only)
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system and any main distribution frames used before con-
necting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

OpenScape Business X3W or OpenScape Business X5W is equipped with one

TST1 board.

NOTICE: For OpenScape Business X3W, CUX3W must be

used as backplane.

One Channel Service Unit (CSU) that is approved as per FCC Part 68 and that
satisfies the ANSI directive T1.403 is available. The T1 interface must not be di-
rectly connected to the PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). It is essen-
tial that one CSU be installed between the communication system and the dig-
ital trunk connection. The CSU provides the following features for OpenScape
Business X3W or OpenScape Business X5W: Isolation and overvoltage pro-

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 53
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

tection of the communication system, diagnostic options in the event of a mal-

function (such as signal loopback, application of test signals and test patterns),
line-up of the output signal in compliance with the line lengths specified by the
network provider. A CSU is not a delivery component of the OpenScape Busi-
ness X3W or OpenScape Business X5W communication system.
One ISDN Primary Rate Interface is available.

Step by Step
Connect the T1 interface with the Channel Service Unit (CSU).
The connection is made via the edge connector X2 of the TST1 board. Insert a
Wieland-screw clamp on the edge connector and connect the cable to the CSU.

5.6.4 How to Set up a Trunk Connection via an E1-CAS Interface (For

Selected Countries Only)
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system and any main distribution frames used before con-
necting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

OpenScape Business X3W or OpenScape Business X5W is equipped with one

TCAS-2 board.

NOTICE: For OpenScape Business X3W, CUX3W must be

used as backplane.

A trunk connection with the CAS protocol is available.

Step by Step
Connect the required CAS interface of the TCAS-2 board with the NT of the
trunk connection.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
54 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

5.6.5 How to Set up an Analog Trunk Connection

Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system and any main distribution frames used before con-
necting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

NOTICE:
Fire hazard due to surge voltage
In the case of line lengths exceeding 500 m and where the lines
exit the building, the TLANI2, TLANI4 and TLANI8 boards must
be protected by external lightning protection.
Lightning protection of this kind is known as additional primary
protection. The additional primary protection is guaranteed by in-
stalling ÜSAGs (surge arresters, gas filled) in the main distribu-
tion frame, the patch panel or at the entry point of the pipe in the
building. A gas-filled surge arrester with 230 V nominal voltage
is switched to ground from each wire that is to be protected.

The communication system is equipped with at least one TLANI2, TLANI4 or

TLANI8 board.
For the U.S. and Canada only: A protector as per UL 497A or CSA C22.2
No. 226 is available. The installation regulations require analog trunks to be
connected using approved protectors as per UL 497A or CSA C22.2 No. 226.
An analog trunk connection with MSI (main station interface) signaling proce-
dures (ground-start and loop-start signaling) is available.

Step by Step
Connect the desired a/b port of the desired board with the TAE socket of the
analog trunk connection.
Select one of the following options to do this:
• If the connection is to be made via the external main distribution frame MD-
FU, connect the TAE connection cable to the desired splitting strip/jumper
strip in the MDFU.
• If the connection is to be made directly at the communication system, i.e., via
a CABLU with Wieland screw clamps, insert the connection cable to the TAE
socket into the desired RJ45 jack of the CABLUS.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 55
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W
Connection of phones and devices

5.7 Connection of phones and devices

The OpenScape Business wall models offer various options for connecting
phones and devices.
You can select the connection(s) required for your communication system from
the following options:
• Direct connection of ISDN phones (not for U.S. and Canada)
• Connection of ISDN phones via the S0 bus (not for U.S. and Canada)
• Connection of UP0/E phones
• Connection of analog phones and devices

5.7.1 How to Connect ISDN Phones Directly (Not for U.S. and Canada)
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system and any main distribution frames used before con-
necting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

NOTICE:
Fire hazard due to surge voltage
Only for the station connection interfaces: In the case of line
lengths exceeding 500 m and where the lines exit the building,
the OCCM, STLSX2 and STLSX4 boards must be protected by
external lightning protection.
Lightning protection of this kind is known as additional primary
protection. The additional primary protection is guaranteed by in-
stalling ÜSAGs (surge arresters, gas filled) in the main distribu-
tion frame, the patch panel or at the entry point of the pipe in the
building. A gas-filled surge arrester with 230 V nominal voltage
is switched to ground from each wire that is to be protected.

At least one free S0 port is available (mainboard OCCM or peripheral board

STLSX2, STLSX4).
The S0 ports used must be configured at startup as an internal S0 connection.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
56 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

The ISDN phones to be connected must have a separate power source, e.g.,
via a power adapter. It is not possible to obtain power via the S0 ports of the
OCCM, STLSX2 and STLSX4 boards.

Step by Step
1) Connect the desired S0 port with the ISDN telephone.
If the connection is to be made via the external main distribution frame MD-
FU, connect the ISDN phone connection cable to the desired splitting strip/
jumper strip in the MDFU.

INFO:
Refer to the installation instructions of the phone to be con-
nected.

2) If present, connect any further ISDN phones to the communication system

by the same method.

5.7.2 How to Connect ISDN Phones via the S0 Bus (Not for U.S. and
Canada)
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system and any main distribution frames used before con-
necting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

NOTICE:
Fire hazard due to surge voltage
Only for the station connection interfaces: In the case of line
lengths exceeding 500 m and where the lines exit the building,
the OCCM, STLSX2 and STLSX4 boards must be protected by
external lightning protection.
Lightning protection of this kind is known as additional primary
protection. The additional primary protection is guaranteed by in-
stalling ÜSAGs (surge arresters, gas filled) in the main distribu-
tion frame, the patch panel or at the entry point of the pipe in the

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 57
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

building. A gas-filled surge arrester with 230 V nominal voltage

is switched to ground from each wire that is to be protected.

At least one free S0 port is available (mainboard OCCM or peripheral board

STLSX2, STLSX4).
The S0 ports used must be configured at startup as an internal S0 connection.
The ISDN phones to be connected must have a separate power source, e.g.,
via a power adapter. It is not possible to obtain power via the S0 ports of the
OCCM, STLSX2 and STLSX4 boards.
Every individual ISDN phone (ISDN stations) must be assigned a unique Multi-
ple Subscriber Number (MSN). This assignment must be made in the configura-
tion menu of the ISDN station.

Step by Step
1) Connect the desired S0 port with the Mini Western socket of the S0 bus.
If the connection is to be made via the external main distribution frame MD-
FU, connect the connection cable of the Mini Western socket of the S0 bus to
the desired splitting strip/jumper strip in the MDFU.

INFO:
Refer to the installation instructions of the phone to be con-
nected.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
58 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

2) Complete the wiring as shown in the following diagram.

3) Install terminating resistors (100 Ohm/0.25 W) in the last socket of the S0

bus.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 59
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

4) Make sure that terminating resistors are only connected to the two ends of
the S0 bus. No terminating resistors are required for the other sockets of the
S0 bus.

INFO:
Since terminating resistors are already integrated into
OpenScape Business X3W and OpenScape Business X5W,
the communication system forms one end of an S0 bus.

INFO:
Refer to the installation instructions of the phone to be con-
nected.

5.7.3 How to Connect UP0/E Phones

Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system and any main distribution frames used before con-
necting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

NOTICE:
Fire hazard due to surge voltage
In the case of line lengths exceeding 500 m and where the lines
exit the building, the OCCM, OCCMA, OCCMB and SLU8N
boards must be protected by external lightning protection.
Lightning protection of this kind is known as additional primary
protection. The additional primary protection is guaranteed by in-
stalling ÜSAGs (surge arresters, gas filled) in the main distribu-
tion frame, the patch panel or at the entry point of the pipe in the
building. A gas-filled surge arrester with 230 V nominal voltage
is switched to ground from each wire that is to be protected.

At least one free UP0/E port is available (mainboard OCCM, OCCMA and OC-
CMB or peripheral board SLU8N).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
60 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

Step by Step
1) Connect the desired UP0/E port with the UP0/E phone.
If the connection is to be made via the external main distribution frame MD-
FU, connect the UP0/E phone connection cable to the desired splitting strip/
jumper strip in the MDFU.

INFO:
Refer to the installation instructions of the phone to be con-
nected.

2) If present, connect any further UP0/E phones to the communication system by

the same method.

5.7.4 How to Connect Analog Telephones and Devices

Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system and any main distribution frames used before con-
necting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

NOTICE:
Fire hazard due to surge voltage
In the case of line lengths exceeding 500 m and where the lines
exit the building, the OCCM, OCCMA, OCCMB, SLAV4, SLAB8
and SLAV16 boards must be protected by external lightning pro-
tection.
Lightning protection of this kind is known as additional primary
protection. The additional primary protection is guaranteed by in-
stalling ÜSAGs (surge arresters, gas filled) in the main distribu-
tion frame, the patch panel or at the entry point of the pipe in the
building. A gas-filled surge arrester with 230 V nominal voltage
is switched to ground from each wire that is to be protected.

At least one free a/b interface is available (mainboard OCCM, OCCMA, OC-
CMB or peripheral board SLAV4, SLAB8 or SLAV16).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 61
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W
Interference Emissions

Step by Step
1) Connect the desired a/b port to be connected to the analog telephone or
analog device (fax, modem, TFE-S, etc.).
If the connection is to be made via the external main distribution frame MD-
FU, connect the connection cable of the analog phone or device to the de-
sired splitting strip/jumper strip in the MDFU.

INFO: Refer to the installation instructions of the phone/de-

vice to be connected.

2) If present, connect any further analog phones or devices to the communica-

tion system by the same method.

5.8 Interference Emissions

To keep within the interference emission limits permitted by EMC Class B,
ferrites must be attached to certain communication systems lines.

Power cable

To minimize interference emissions, the power cable must be routed through

the C39022-Z7000-C7 ferrite sleeve supplied with the communication system in
the add on pack.

Peripheral Cables
To minimize interference emissions, the peripheral cables must be equipped
with ferrite sleeves. The five C39022-Z7000-C6 ferrite sleeves included in the
delivery package of the communication system should be used for this purpose.
As fas as possible, the ferrite sleeves should be placed within the cable duct. If
the number of lines makes this impossible, the ferrite sleeve should be attached
directly at the exit of the cable duct.
If the number of ferrite sleeves supplied are not sufficient for all the connection
cables, additional ferrite sleeves must be ordered: L30460-X1358-X includes
five C39022-Z7000-C6 ferrite sleeves.
• OpenScape Business X3W
– OCCM, OCCMA and OCCMB (mainboard)
The connection cables of all UP0/E, a/b and S0interfaces must be
equipped with the C39022-Z7000-C6 ferrite sleeve.
The connection cables must re run through a ferrite sleeve twice, i.e.,
in a loop. A maximum of three connection cables are allowed per ferrite
sleeve.
– All trunk, tie trunk and subscriber line modules
The connection cables for all interfaces need to be equipped with the
C39022-Z7000-C6 ferrite sleeve.
The connection cables must re run through a ferrite sleeve twice, i.e.,
in a loop. A maximum of three connection cables are allowed per ferrite
sleeve.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
62 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

• OpenScape Business X5W

– OCCM, OCCMA and OCCMB (mainboard)
The connection cables of all UP0/E, a/b and S0interfaces must be
equipped with the C39022-Z7000-C6 ferrite sleeve.
The connection cables must re run through a ferrite sleeve twice, i.e.,
in a loop. A maximum of three connection cables are allowed per ferrite
sleeve.
– All trunk, cordless, tie trunk and subscriber line modules
The connection cables for all interfaces need to be equipped with the
C39022-Z7000-C6 ferrite sleeve.
The connection cables must re run through a ferrite sleeve twice, i.e.,
in a loop. A maximum of three connection cables are allowed per ferrite
sleeve.

5.8.1 How to Attach a Ferrite Sleeve to the Power Cable

Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system and any main distribution frames used before starting
up the system.

The housing cover of the communication system is not mounted.

Step by Step
1) Run the power cable through the C39022-Z7000-C7 ferrite sleeve included
in the delivery package of the communication system.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 63
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

2) Place the ferrite sleeve [A] as shown in the following figure to allow the hous-
ing cover to be closed.

5.8.2 How to Attach Ferrite Sleeves to Peripheral Connection Cables

Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system and any main distribution frames used before starting
up the system.

The housing cover of the communication system is not mounted.

Step by Step
Select the procedure based on the communication system and the board.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
64 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

If Then
Communica- Board
tion system
OpenScape Mainboard Run the connection cables of all UP0/E, a/
Business X3W OCCM, OCC- b and S0 interfaces through the C39022-
MA and OC- Z7000-C6 ferrite sleeve twice, i.e., in a loop.
CMB
As fas as possible, place the ferrite sleeves
within the cable duct. If this is not possi-
ble due to the number of cables, the ferrite
sleeve should be attached directly at the exit
of the cable duct.
A maximum of three connection cables are
allowed per ferrite sleeve.

All trunk, tie Run the connection cables of all interfaces

trunk and sub- through the C39022-Z7000-C6 ferrite sleeve
scriber line twice, i.e., in a loop.
modules
As fas as possible, place the ferrite sleeves
within the cable duct. If this is not possi-
ble due to the number of cables, the ferrite
sleeve should be attached directly at the exit
of the cable duct.
A maximum of three connection cables are
allowed per ferrite sleeve.
OpenScape Mainboard Run the connection cables of all UP0/E, a/
Business X5W OCCM b and S0 interfaces through the C39022-
Z7000-C6 ferrite sleeve twice, i.e., in a loop.
As fas as possible, place the ferrite sleeves
within the cable duct. If this is not possi-
ble due to the number of cables, the ferrite
sleeve should be attached directly at the exit
of the cable duct.
A maximum of three connection cables are
allowed per ferrite sleeve.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 65
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W
Closing Activities

If Then
Communica- Board
tion system

All further Run the connection cables of all interfaces

trunk, cordless, through the C39022-Z7000-C6 ferrite sleeve
tie trunk and twice, i.e., in a loop.
subscriber line
As fas as possible, place the ferrite sleeves
modules
within the cable duct. If this is not possi-
ble due to the number of cables, the ferrite
sleeve should be attached directly at the exit
of the cable duct.
A maximum of three connection cables are
allowed per ferrite sleeve.

5.9 Closing Activities

To complete the installation, the M2,SSD for OCCMA, OCCMB or the SDHC
card for OCCM only must be inserted, a visual inspection must be performed,
the housing cover must be reattached, and the system must be connected to
the mains power supply.
The communication system can then be put into operation with the OpenScape
Business Assistant (WBM). The description of this can be found in the online
help of the WBM or in the Administrator Documentation in the section "Initial In-
stallation of OpenScape Business".

NOTICE: During the initial startup of the communication sys-

tem, the charge state of the battery on the mainboard is unde-
fined. To achieve an adequate charge state, the system must re-
main connected to the mains for at least 2 days. If the system is
disconnected from the mains power supply, the battery may be
insufficiently charged and could potentially cause the activation
period to be blocked due to time manipulation

5.9.1 How to Insert the M.2 SSD or the SDHC Card (system with OCCM)
The M.2 SSD or the SDHC card contains the OpenScape Business
communication software and must be mounted/inserted before starting up the
communication system.

Step by Step
1) Make sure that the write protection of the SDHC card is disabled (switch di-
rected toward metal contacts).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
66 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

2) Insert the SDHC card into the SDHC slot of the mainboard until it snaps in-
to place. The metal contacts of the SDHC card must point towards the main-
board.

5.9.2 How to Perform a Visual Inspection

Before starting up the communication system, you must perform a visual
inspection of the hardware, cables, and the power supply.

Prerequisites

DANGER:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Disconnect all power supply circuits of the communication system before
starting to perform a visual inspection:
• Disconnect the battery voltage (if present), supply voltage (LUNA2)
and line voltage at any connected OpenScape Business Powerbox.
• Disconnect the line cords attached to any connected OpenScape
Business Powerbox.
• Disconnect the line cords of any connected battery pack or any con-
nected batteries.
• Disconnect the power plug of the communication system.

NOTICE:
Always wear an antistatic wristband when handling boards.
The ESD measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive de-
vices must be observed and followed (see Warnings: Note).

The housing cover of the communication system is not mounted.

Step by Step
1) Disconnect all power supply circuits of the communication system.
2) Make sure that the communication system is de-energized.
3) Verify that the M2.SSD or the SDHC card is properly seated. The write pro-
tection of the SDHC card must be disabled (switch directed toward metal
contacts).
4) Check that all boards are secure.
If requires, verify that the boards involved have been inserted properly (see
How to Insert a Board).
5) Ensure that all connection cables have been correctly laid and secured. Is
there any risk of tripping over a cable, for example?
If required, make sure that the connection cables are properly installed.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 67
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

6) Check whether a separate ground wire is connected to the communication

system's ground terminal.
Optionally, ground the communication system using a separate ground wire
(see How to Provide Protective Grounding for the Main Distribution Frame
MDFU).
7) Make sure that any main distribution frames being used are properly con-
nected to the ground wire.
Optionally, ground all main distribution frames (see How to Provide Protec-
tive Grounding for the Main Distribution Frame MDFU).
8) Check whether the nominal voltage of the mains power supply corresponds
to the nominal voltage of the communication system (type plate).

Next steps
Close the communication system with the housing cover (see How to Put the
Cover in Place).

5.9.3 How to Put the Housing Cover in Place

Step by Step
1) Place the cover on the communication system. Insert the two retaining pins
into the holes provided for this purpose on the shelf.

CAUTION: Cuts caused by sharp edges on the shielding plate

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
68 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

Make sure that you only touch the outside of the housing cover. The
shielding plate on the inside of the housing cover may have sharp
edges which can cause cuts.

2) Secure the cover with the two screws.

5.9.4 How to Connect the System to the Mains

Step by Step
Plug the power cord into the socket of the power supply. The communication
system boots up.

NOTICE: Leave the system connected to the mains for at least

2 days so that the mainboard battery is adequately charged. If

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 69
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3W/X5W

the charge state is insufficient, it is possible that repeated boot-

ing of the system could cause the activation period to be blocked
due to time manipulation.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
70 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R
Installation Methods

6 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/

X5R
This section covers the standard installation procedure for the OpenScape
Business X3R and OpenScape Business X5R communication systems.
OpenScape Business X3R and OpenScape Business X5R are communica-
tion systems in 19-inch rack mount cases that can be mounted in 19-inch rack
mount cabinets, as standalone units (desktop operation) or as wall-mounted
units.

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
• Work on the housing must only be performed in the de-energized
state.
• Before starting any work, make sure that all circuits are de-energized.
Never take it for granted that all circuits have reliably been discon-
nected from the power supply when a fuse or a main switch has been
switched off.

6.1 Installation Methods

The OpenScape Business X3R and OpenScape Business X5R communication
systems can be mounted in a 19'' rack, on a wall or as a standalone unit
(desktop operation).

6.1.1 How to Mount OpenScape Business X3R in a 19-inch Rack

Prerequisites
The prerequisites for selecting the installation site were taken into account (see
Prerequisites for the Installation on page 29).
The cabinet-specific screws required for attaching the angle brackets to the 19-
inch rack are available (these must be provided by the 19-inch rack supplier).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 71
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

Step by Step
1) Attach the two supplied angle brackets to the sides of the communication
system using the two screws provided for each bracket.

Figure 7: OpenScape Business X3R – Angle Brackets

2) Lift the communication system into the 19’’ rack and attach it to the 19-inch
rack using the angle brackets [A] and the screws provided for this purpose.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
72 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

6.1.2 How to Mount OpenScape Business X5R in a 19-inch Rack

Prerequisites
The prerequisites for selecting the installation site were taken into account (see
Prerequisites for the Installation on page 29).
The cabinet-specific screws required for attaching the support and angle brack-
ets to the 19-inch rack are available (These must be provided by the 19-inch
rack supplier).

Step by Step
1) Attach the two supplied angle brackets to the sides of the communication
system using the two screws provided for each bracket.

Figure 8: OpenScape Business X5R – Angle Brackets

2) Mount a right and a left support bracket (included with the 19 inch rack
mounting kit (C39165-A7027-D1)) to the 19-inch rack with the screws provid-
ed for this purpose.

Figure 9: OpenScape Business X5R – Support Brackets

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 73
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

3) Lift the communication system into the 19-inch rack and place it on the two
support brackets [A]. Slide the communication system into the 19-inch rack
until the two brackets are flush with the front of the 19-inch frame.
4) Use the two angle brackets [B] and the screws provided to attach the com-
munication system to the 19-inch rack.

6.1.3 How to Mount the Communication System to a Wall

Prerequisites
The prerequisites for selecting the installation site were taken into account (see
Prerequisites for the Installation on page 29).
A strong wall for the installation of the communication system is available.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
74 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R
Protective Grounding

Step by Step
1) Attach the two angle brackets [A] and [B] of the wall mount kit C39165-
A7027-D2 to the underside of the communication system housing using the
supplied screws.

2) Drill a hole for the top angle bracket [A].

3) Insert a wall anchor into the drilled hole and screw in a screw, leaving ap-
prox. 2 mm projecting.
4) Hang the communication system with the upper angle bracket [A].
5) Drill a hole for the bottom angle bracket [B].
6) Insert a wall anchor into the drilled hole and secure the bottom angle bracket
[B] with a screw.

6.2 Protective Grounding

The protective grounding provides a secure connection to the ground potential
to protect against dangerously high touch voltages in the event of a malfunction.

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
• Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the
OpenScape Business X3R and OpenScape Business X5R commu-
nication systems. Before you start up the system and connect the
phones and phone lines, connect the communication system with a
permanent earthing conductor.
• Make sure that the ground wire laid is protected and strain-relieved.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 75
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

6.2.1 Protective Grounding for 19’’ Rack-mount Installations

The equipotential bonding strip of the 19’’ rack is used to provide protective
grounding for the communication system.

6.2.1.1 How to Provide Protective Grounding for the Communication System

Prerequisites
2
A protective ground wire with a minimum cross section of 12 AWG/2.5 mm and
a ring terminal exists (see figure below). A minimum conductor cross section of
2
10 AWG/4 mm is needed to block the effects of external factors if the ground
wire cannot be protected.

A low-impedance ground connection is available.

The 19-inch rack is grounded by a separate ground conductor (green/yellow).
The 19-inch rack is equipped with an equipotential bonding strip at which the
communication system can be separately grounded.

DANGER:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Only personnel with proper qualifications or qualified electricians should
perform work on the low-voltage network (<1000 VAC) and all work must
comply with the national/local requirements for electrical connections.

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
• Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the
OpenScape Business X3R and OpenScape Business X5R commu-
nication systems. Before you start up the system and connect the
phones and phone lines, connect the communication system with a
permanent earthing conductor.
• Make sure that the ground wire laid is protected and strain-relieved.

The implementation rules specified in IEC 60364, IEC 60950-1 and

IEC 62368-1 must be complied with during the installation.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
76 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

Proceed as follows to ensure protective grounding:

Step by Step
1) Attach the ring terminal [1] of the separate ground wire as shown in the fig-
ure using a tooth lock washer [2] and an M4 screw [3] to the protective con-
ductor of the communication system.

2) Secure the ground wire with a cable tie to the appropriate fastening eyelet
for strain relief.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 77
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

3) Connect the ground wire with the equipotential bonding strip in the 19-inch
rack as shown in the conceptual diagram in the figure below.

Make sure that the ground wire is protected and strain-relieved (minimum
2
conductor cross section = 12 AWG/2.5 mm ). A minimum conductor cross
2
section of 10 AWG/4 mm is needed to block the effects of external factors if
the ground wire cannot be protected.

6.2.1.2 How to Check the Grounding

Prerequisites
The communication system and all other devices in the 19-inch rack are not
connected to the low-voltage network via power cables.
The communication system has been properly grounded using a separate
ground wire.
The 19-inch rack is grounded by a separate ground conductor (green/yellow).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
78 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

Run the following test before startup to make sure that the communication sys-
tem's protective grounding is working properly.

Step by Step
Check the ohmic resistance on the ground connection to the communication
system:
a) The first measurement is taken between the ground contact of a grounded
power outlet of the home installation and the equipotential bonding strip in
the 19-inch rack.
b) The second measurement is taken between the equipotential bonding strip
in the 19-inch rack and the housing of the communication system.

The result (reference value) of a measurement must be significantly less than

10 Ohms.
If you obtain some other measurement results, contact a qualified electrician.
The electrician will need to check the equipotential bonding of the domestic in-
stallation and ensure the low resistance grounding (ohmage) of the earthing
conductors.

6.2.2 Protective Grounding for Wall-Mount and Standalone Installations

The protective grounding of the communication system occurs via the
equipotential bonding strip of the building, an additional outlet to the low-voltage
network, a main ground busbar or a ground field, for example.

6.2.2.1 How to Provide Protective Grounding for the Communication System

Prerequisites
2
A protective ground wire with a minimum cross section of 12 AWG/2.5 mm and
a ring terminal exists (see figure below). A minimum conductor cross section of
2
10 AWG/4 mm is needed to block the effects of external factors if the ground
wire cannot be protected. When using an additional junction box of the low-volt-
age network, the minimum conductor cross-section may also be 16 AWG/1.5
2
mm .

A low-impedance ground connection is available.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 79
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

DANGER:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Only personnel with proper qualifications or qualified electricians should
perform work on the low-voltage network (<1000 VAC) and all work must
comply with the national/local requirements for electrical connections.

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
• Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the
OpenScape Business X3R and OpenScape Business X5R commu-
nication systems. Before you start up the system and connect the
phones and phone lines, connect the communication system with a
permanent earthing conductor.
• Make sure that the ground wire laid is protected and strain-relieved.

The implementation rules specified in IEC 60364, IEC 60950-1 and

IEC 62368-1 must be complied with during the installation.
Proceed as follows to ensure protective grounding:

Step by Step
1) Attach the ring terminal [1] of the separate ground wire as shown in the fig-
ure using a tooth lock washer [2] and an M4 screw [3] to the protective con-
ductor of the communication system.

2) Secure the ground wire with a cable tie to the appropriate fastening eyelet
for strain relief.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
80 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

3) Select one of the following options:

• Not for U.S. and Canada - Equipotential bonding strip
Connect the ground wire with the grounding point (e.g., the equipotential
bonding strip of the building) as illustrated in the conceptual diagram.

Make sure that the ground wire is protected and strain-relieved. The mini-
2
mum conductor cross section equals 12 AWG/2.5 mm ). A minimum con-
2
ductor cross section of 10 AWG/4 mm is needed to block the effects of
external factors if the ground wire cannot be protected.
• Not for U.S. and Canada - Outlet to low-voltage network
Connect a junction box to the low-voltage network close to the Schuko
wall socket into which the communication system is plugged. Use a sep-

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 81
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

arate ground wire to set up a fixed connection to the junction box as illus-
trated in the conceptual diagram.

Make sure that the ground wire is protected and strain-relieved. The mini-
2
mum conductor cross section is 16 AWG/1.5 mm .
• Not for U.S. and Canada - Lockable grounded plug to the low-volt-
age network
Insert the lockable grounded plug (special Schuko with fixed protective
earth conductor) into a wall outlet of the low-voltage network and lock the
plug. Use the ground wire connected to the plug to set up a fixed con-
nection to the communication system, as illustrated in the conceptual di-

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
82 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

agram. Use a second lockable grounded plug for a possibly existing MD-
FU.

Make sure that all ground wires laid are protected and strain-relieved.
2
The minimum conductor cross section is 16 AWG/1.5 mm for up to 2m
2
and at least 12 AWG/2.5 mm for 2m and above.
• For U.S. and Canada only: Main ground busbar
Connect the ground wire with the grounding point (e.g., the main ground
busbar, ground field) as illustrated in the conceptual diagram.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 83
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

Make sure that all ground wires laid are protected and strain-relieved.
2
The minimum conductor cross-section is 12 AWG/2.5 mm . A minimum
2
conductor cross section of 10 AWG/4 mm is needed to block the effects
of external factors if the ground wire cannot be protected.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
84 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R
Configuration Notes

6.2.2.2 How to Check the Grounding

Prerequisites
The communication system is not yet connected to the low-voltage network via
the power cable.
The communication system has been properly grounded using a separate
ground wire.

Run the following test before startup to make sure that the communication sys-
tem's protective grounding is working properly.

Step by Step
Check the ohmic resistance on the ground connection to the communication
system:
The measurement is taken between the ground contact of a grounded power
outlet of the home installation (where the communication system is connected)
and the housing of the communication system.

The result (reference value) of a measurement must be significantly less than

10 Ohms.
If you obtain some other results, contact a qualified electrician. The electrician
will need to check the equipotential bonding of the domestic installation and en-
sure the low resistance grounding (ohmage) of the earthing conductors.

6.3 Configuration Notes

The configuration notes include information about the board slots of the
OpenScape Business X3R and OpenScape Business X5R communication
systems.

6.3.1 Board Slots in OpenScape Business X3R

OpenScape Business X3R has three slot levels for the installation of boards
and options.
• Slot level 1: slots for two peripheral boards

• Slot level 2: slot for the OCCMR mainboard

• Slot level 3: slots for three options

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 85
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

Figure 10: OpenScape Business X3R – Board Slots

6.3.2 Board Slots in OpenScape Business X5R

OpenScape Business X5R has five slot levels for the installation of boards and
options.
• Slot levels 1 through 3: each slot level provides slots for two peripheral
boards

• Slot level 4: slot for the OCCMR mainboard

• Slot level 5: slots for three options

Figure 11: OpenScape Business X5R Board Slots

6.3.3 Board Installation

6.3.3.1 How to Insert a Board

Prerequisites
A free board slot is available.

NOTICE: Always wear an antistatic wristband when handling

boards.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
86 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R
Trunk Connection

The ESD measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive de-

vices must be observed and followed (see Warnings: Note on
page 16)

Step by Step
1) Loosen the two locking screws for the shielding panel of the desired board
slot.
2) Remove the shielding cover.
3) Using its guide rails slide the board into the board slot until it stops.
4) Attach the board to the housing using the two locking screws.

6.3.3.2 How to Remove a Board

Prerequisites

NOTICE: Always wear an antistatic wristband when handling

boards.
The ESD measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive de-
vices must be observed and followed (see Warnings: Note on
page 16)

Step by Step
1) Loosen the two locking screws in the front panel of the board to be removed.
2) Pull out the board from the board slot.

6.3.3.3 How to Install a Shielding Cover

To ensure sufficient shielding, all empty board slots must be provided with a
shielding panel.

Step by Step
1) Place the shielding cover on the empty board slot.
2) Attach the shielding cover to the housing using the two locking screws.

6.4 Trunk Connection

The OpenScape Business X3R and OpenScape Business X5R communication
systems offer different options for trunk connections and thus for access to the
public communication network.
You can select the trunk connection or connections required for your communi-
cation system from the following options:
• ISDN point-to-point connection and ISDN point-to-multipoint connection via
S0 interface (not for U.S. and Canada)
• Only for OpenScape Business X5R and X3R: ISDN Primary Rate Interface
via S5M interface (not for U.S. and Canada)

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 87
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

• Only for OpenScape Business X5R: ISDN Primary Rate Interface via T1 in-
terface (for U.S. and Canada only)
• Only for OpenScape Business X5R and X3R: Trunk connection with CAS
protocol via CAS interface (for selected countries only)
• Analog trunk connections

6.4.1 Not for U.S. and Canada: How to Set up an ISDN Point-to-Point or
ISDN Point-to-Multipoint Connection via the S0 Port
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system before connecting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

At least one free S0 port is available (mainboard OCCMR, OCCMRA, OCCMRB

or peripheral board STLSX4R, STLS4R).
During startup, the S0 interface must be configured as an ISDN point-to-point or
ISDN point-to-multipoint connection.
An ISDN point-to-point or point-to-multipoint connection is available.

Step by Step
Connect the desired S0 port with NTBA of the ISDN point-to-point or ISDN multi-
point connection.

6.4.2 Not for U.S. and Canada: How to Set up an ISDN Primary Rate
Interface via the S2M Port
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system before connecting telephones and lines.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
88 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

OpenScape Business X3R or OpenScape Business X5R is equipped with one

TS2RN board.
One ISDN Primary Rate Interface is available.

Step by Step
Connect the S2M port with the NTPM the ISDN Primary Rate Interface.

6.4.3 For U.S. and Canada Only: How to Set up the ISDN Primary Rate
Interface via the T1 Interface
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system before connecting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

OpenScape Business X3R or OpenScape Business X5R is equipped with one

TST1R board.
One Channel Service Unit (CSU) that is approved as per FCC Part 68 and that
satisfies the ANSI directive T1.403 is available. The T1 interface must not be di-
rectly connected to the PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). It is essen-
tial that one CSU be installed between the communication system and the dig-
ital trunk connection. The CSU provides the following features for OpenScape
Business X5R: Isolation and overvoltage protection of the communication sys-
tem, diagnostic options in the event of a malfunction (such as signal loopback,
application of test signals and test patterns), line-up of the output signal in com-
pliance with the line lengths specified by the network provider. A CSU is not a
delivery component of the OpenScape Business X5R communication system.
One ISDN Primary Rate Interface is available.

Step by Step
Connect the T1 interface with the Channel Service Unit (CSU).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 89
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

6.4.4 For Selected Countries Only: How to Set up a Trunk Connection via
the E1-CAS Interface
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system before connecting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

OpenScape Business X3R or OpenScape Business X5R is equipped with one

TCASR-2 board.
A trunk connection with the CAS protocol is available.

Step by Step
Connect the required CAS interface of the TCASR-2 board with the NT of the
trunk connection.

6.4.5 How to Set up an Analog Trunk Connection

Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system before connecting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

NOTICE:
Fire hazard due to surge voltage

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
90 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R
Connection of phones and devices

In the case of line lengths exceeding 500 m and where the lines
exit the building, the TLANI4R board must be protected by exter-
nal lightning protection.
Lightning protection of this kind is known as additional primary
protection. The additional primary protection is guaranteed by in-
stalling ÜSAGs (surge arresters, gas filled) in the main distribu-
tion frame, the patch panel or at the entry point of the pipe in the
building. A gas-filled surge arrester with 230 V nominal voltage
is switched to ground from each wire that is to be protected.

The communication system is equipped with at least one TLANI4R board.

For the U.S. and Canada only: A protector as per UL 497A or CSA C22.2
No. 226 is available. The installation regulations require analog trunks to be
connected using approved protectors as per UL 497A or CSA C22.2 No. 226.
An analog trunk connection with MSI (main station interface) signaling proce-
dures (ground-start and loop-start signaling) is available.

Step by Step
Connect the desired a/b port of the desired board with the TAE socket of the
analog trunk connection.

6.5 Connection of phones and devices

The OpenScape Business X3R and OpenScape Business X5R communication
systems offer different options for connecting phones and devices.
You can select the connection(s) required for your communication system from
the following options:
• Direct connection of ISDN phones (not for U.S. and Canada)
• Connection of ISDN phones via the S0 bus (not for U.S. and Canada)
• Connection of UP0/E phones
• Connection of analog phones and devices

6.5.1 Not for U.S. and Canada: How to Connect ISDN Phones Directly
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system before connecting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 91
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

NOTICE:
Fire hazard due to surge voltage
Only for the station connection interfaces: In the case of line
lengths exceeding 500 m and where the lines exit the building,
the OCCMR, STLSX4R and STLS4R boards must be protected
by external lightning protection.
Lightning protection of this kind is known as additional primary
protection. The additional primary protection is guaranteed by in-
stalling ÜSAGs (surge arresters, gas filled) in the main distribu-
tion frame, the patch panel or at the entry point of the pipe in the
building. A gas-filled surge arrester with 230 V nominal voltage
is switched to ground from each wire that is to be protected.

At least one free S0 port is available (mainboard OCCMR or peripheral board

STLSX4R, STLS4R).
The S0 ports used must be configured at startup as an internal S0 connection.
The ISDN phones to be connected must have a separate power source, e.g.,
via a power adapter. It is not possible to obtain power via the S0 ports of the
OCCMR, OCCMRA, OCCMRB, STLSX4R and STLS4R boards.

Step by Step
1) Connect the desired S0 port with the ISDN telephone.

INFO:
Refer to the installation instructions of the phone to be con-
nected.

2) If present, connect any further ISDN phones to the communication system

by the same method.

6.5.2 Not for U.S. and Canada: How to Connect ISDN Phones via the S0
Bus
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system before connecting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
92 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

NOTICE:
Fire hazard due to surge voltage
Only for the station connection interfaces: In the case of line
lengths exceeding 500 m and where the lines exit the building,
the OCCMR, OCCMRA, OCCMRB, STLSX4R and STLS4R
boards must be protected by external lightning protection.
Lightning protection of this kind is known as additional primary
protection. The additional primary protection is guaranteed by in-
stalling ÜSAGs (surge arresters, gas filled) in the main distribu-
tion frame, the patch panel or at the entry point of the pipe in the
building. A gas-filled surge arrester with 230 V nominal voltage
is switched to ground from each wire that is to be protected.

At least one free S0 port is available (mainboard OCCMR, OCCMRA, OCCMRB

or peripheral board STLSX4R, STLS4R).
The S0 ports used must be configured at startup as an internal S0 connection.
The ISDN phones to be connected must have a separate power source, e.g.,
via a power adapter. It is not possible to obtain power via the S0 ports of the
OCCMR, OCCMRA, OCCMRB, STLSX4R and STLS4R boards.
Every individual ISDN phone (ISDN stations) must be assigned a unique Multi-
ple Subscriber Number (MSN). This assignment must be made in the configura-
tion menu of the ISDN station.

Step by Step
1) Connect the desired S0 port with the Mini Western socket of the S0 bus.

INFO:
Refer to the installation instructions of the phone to be con-
nected.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 93
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

2) Complete the wiring as shown in the following diagram.

3) Install terminating resistors (100 Ohm/0.25 W) in the last socket of the S0

bus.
4) Make sure that terminating resistors are only connected to the two ends of
the S0 bus. No terminating resistors are required for the other sockets of the
S0 bus.

INFO:
Since terminating resistors are already integrated into
OpenScape Business X3R and OpenScape Business X5R,
the communication system forms one end of an S0 bus.

INFO:
Refer to the installation instructions of the phone to be con-
nected.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
94 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

6.5.3 How to Connect UP0/E Phones

Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system before connecting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

NOTICE:
Fire hazard due to surge voltage
In the case of line lengths exceeding 500 m and where the
lines exit the building, the OCCMR, OCCMRA, OCCMRB and
SLU8NR boards must be protected by external lightning protec-
tion.
Lightning protection of this kind is known as additional primary
protection. The additional primary protection is guaranteed by in-
stalling ÜSAGs (surge arresters, gas filled) in the main distribu-
tion frame, the patch panel or at the entry point of the pipe in the
building. A gas-filled surge arrester with 230 V nominal voltage
is switched to ground from each wire that is to be protected.

At least one free UP0/E port is available (mainboard OCCMR, OCCMRA, OC-
CMRB or peripheral board SLU8NR).

Step by Step
1) Connect the desired UP0/E port with the UP0/E phone.

INFO:
Refer to the installation instructions of the phone to be con-
nected.

2) If present, connect any further UP0/E phones to the communication system by

the same method.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 95
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

6.5.4 How to Connect Analog Telephones and Devices

Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system before connecting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

NOTICE:
Fire hazard due to surge voltage
In the case of line lengths exceeding 500 m and where the lines
exit the building, the OCCMR, OCCMRA, OCCMRB, SLAV8R
and SLAv16R boards must be protected by external lightning
protection.
Lightning protection of this kind is known as additional primary
protection. The additional primary protection is guaranteed by in-
stalling ÜSAGs (surge arresters, gas filled) in the main distribu-
tion frame, the patch panel or at the entry point of the pipe in the
building. A gas-filled surge arrester with 230 V nominal voltage
is switched to ground from each wire that is to be protected.

At least one free a/b port is available (mainboard OCCMR, OCCMRA and OC-
CMRB or peripheral board SLAV8R, SLAV16R).

Step by Step
1) Connect the desired a/b port to be connected to the analog telephone or
analog device (fax, modem, TFE-S, etc.).

INFO:
Refer to the installation instructions of the phone/device to be
connected.

2) If present, connect any further analog phones or devices to the communica-

tion system by the same method.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
96 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R
Closing Activities

6.6 Closing Activities

To complete the installation, the M.2 SSD or SDHC card must be inserted, a
visual inspection must be performed, and the system must be connected to the
mains power supply.
The communication system can then be put into operation with the OpenScape
Business Assistant (WBM). The description of this can be found in the online
help of the WBM or in the Administrator Documentation in the section "Initial In-
stallation of OpenScape Business".

NOTICE: During the initial startup of the communication sys-

tem, the charge state of the battery on the mainboard is unde-
fined. To achieve an adequate charge state, the system must re-
main connected to the mains for at least 2 days. If the system is
disconnected from the mains power supply, the battery may be
insufficiently charged and could potentially cause the activation
period to be blocked due to time manipulation

6.6.1 How to Insert the M.2 SSD or the SDHC Card (system with OCCM)
The M.2 SSD or the SDHC card contains the OpenScape Business
communication software and must be mounted/inserted before starting up the
communication system.

Step by Step
1) Make sure that the write protection of the SDHC card is disabled (switch di-
rected toward metal contacts).
2) Insert the SDHC card into the SDHC slot of the mainboard until it snaps in-
to place. The metal contacts of the SDHC card must point towards the main-
board.

6.6.2 How to Perform a Visual Inspection

Before starting up the communication system, you must perform a visual
inspection of the hardware, cables, and the power supply.

Prerequisites

DANGER:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Disconnect all power supply circuits of the communication system before
starting to perform a visual inspection:
• Disconnect the line cords of any connected battery pack or any con-
nected batteries.
• Disconnect the power plug of the communication system.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 97
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X3R/X5R

NOTICE: Always wear an antistatic wristband when handling

boards.
The ESD measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive de-
vices must be observed and followed (see Warnings: Note on
page 16).

Step by Step
1) Disconnect all power supply circuits of the communication system.
2) Make sure that the communication system is de-energized.
3) Verify that the M.2 SSD or SDHC card is properly seated. The write protec-
tion of the SDHC card must be disabled (switch directed toward metal con-
tacts).
4) Verify that all boards are secure.
If requires, verify that the boards involved have been inserted properly (see
How to Insert a Board).
5) Verify the presence of shielding covers at the empty board slots.
If required, install the missing shielding covers (see How to Install a Shield-
ing Cover).
6) Ensure that all connection cables have been correctly laid and secured. Is
there any risk of tripping over a cable, for example?
If required, make sure that the connection cables are properly installed.
7) Check whether a separate ground wire is connected to the communication
system's ground terminal.
If necessary, ground the communication system using a separate ground
wire (see Protective Grounding for 19’’ Rack-mount Installations and Protec-
tive Grounding for Wall-Mount and Standalone Installations ).
8) Check whether the nominal voltage of the mains power supply corresponds
to the nominal voltage of the communication system (type plate).

6.6.3 How to Connect the System to the Mains

Step by Step
Plug the power cord into the socket of the power supply. The communication
system boots up.

NOTICE: Leave the system connected to the mains for at least

2 days so that the mainboard battery is adequately charged. If
the charge state is insufficient, it is possible that repeated boot-
ing of the system could cause the activation period to be blocked
due to time manipulation.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
98 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8
Installation Methods

7 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

This section covers the standard installation procedure for the OpenScape
Business X8 communication system.
OpenScape Business X8 is a modular communication system that can be used
as a one-box system (base box) or a two-box system (base box + expansion
box). OpenScape Business X8 can be installed as a standalone unit or mounted
in a 19-inch rack.

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
• Work on the housing must only be performed in the de-energized
state.
• Before starting any work, make sure that all circuits are de-energized.
Never take it for granted that all circuits have reliably been discon-
nected from the power supply when a fuse or a main switch has been
switched off.

7.1 Installation Methods

OpenScape Business X8 can be installed as a standalone unit or mounted in a
19-inch rack.

7.1.1 Standalone Installation

OpenScape Business X8 is a modular communication system that can be used
as a one-box system (base box) or a two-box system (base box + expansion
box). In a two-box system, the system boxes can either be stacked or set up
side by side.

7.1.1.1 How to Set Up a One-Box System

Prerequisites
The prerequisites for selecting the installation site for a standalone installation
were taken into account (see Prerequisites for the Installation on page 29).
The front and rear plastic covers are not attached to the system box.

Step by Step
1) Place the system box in the installation site and make sure that it is level and
stable.
2) Check that the space between the base of the system box and the ground is
at least 50 mm.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 99
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

3) If necessary, set up the system box in the following way:

a) Unscrew lock nut [A] on one of the feet using an open-end wrench
(wrench size = 13 mm).
b) Adjust the height of the foot by turning the screw nut [B] so that the sys-
tem box is steady and the minimum clearance is observed.
c) Fix the foot in position by tightening the lock nut [A].
d) If necessary, repeat steps a through c for more feet until the system box
is level and the minimum clearance is maintained.

7.1.1.2 Two-box System: How to Stack System Boxes

Prerequisites
The prerequisites for selecting the installation site for a standalone installation
were taken into account (see Prerequisites for the Installation on page 29).
The front and rear plastic covers are not attached to the system boxes.

Step by Step
1) Place the base box at the installation site and make sure that it is level and
stable.
2) Check that the space between the base of the base box and the ground is at
least 50 mm.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
100 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

3) If necessary, set up the base box as follows:

a) Unscrew lock nut [A] on one of the feet using an open-end wrench
(wrench size = 13 mm).
b) Adjust the height of the foot by turning the screw nut [B] so that the base
box is steady and the minimum clearance is observed.
c) Fix the foot in position by tightening the lock nut [A].
d) If necessary, repeat steps a through c for more feet until the base box is
level and the minimum clearance from the base box is maintained.

4) Place the expansion box on top of the base box.

The feet of system boxes are provided with recesses. When placing the ex-
pansion box on top of the base box, ensure that these recesses are placed
precisely on top of the screw heads in the four corners of the base box.

5) Check that the space between the expansion box and the base box is at
least 50 mm.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 101
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

6) If necessary, set up the expansion box in the following way:

a) Unscrew lock nut [A] on one of the feet using an open-end wrench
(wrench size = 13 mm).
b) Adjust the height of the foot by turning the screw nut [B] so that the ex-
pansion box is steady and the minimum clearance is observed.
c) Fix the foot in position by tightening the lock nut [A].
d) If necessary, repeat steps a through c for more feet until the expansion
box is level and the minimum clearance from the base box is maintained.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
102 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

7.1.1.3 Two-box System: How to Set Up the System Boxes Side by Side

Prerequisites
The prerequisites for selecting the installation site for a standalone installation
were taken into account (see Prerequisites for the Installation on page 29).
The front and rear plastic covers are not attached to the system boxes.

Step by Step
1) Place the base box at the installation site and make sure that it is level and
stable.
2) Check that the space between the base of the base box and the ground is at
least 50 mm.
3) If necessary, set up the base box as follows:
a) Unscrew lock nut [A] on one of the feet using an open-end wrench
(wrench size = 13 mm).
b) Adjust the height of the foot by turning the screw nut [B] so that the base
box is steady and the minimum clearance is observed.
c) Fix the foot in position by tightening the lock nut [A].
d) If necessary, repeat steps a through c for more feet until the base box is
level and the minimum clearance from the base box is maintained.

4) Place the expansion box next to the base box.

5) Check that the space between the base of the expansion box and the
ground is at least 50 mm.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 103
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

6) If necessary, set up the expansion box in the following way:

a) Unscrew lock nut [A] on one of the feet using an open-end wrench
(wrench size = 13 mm).
b) Adjust the height of the foot by turning the screw nut [B] so that the ex-
pansion box is steady and the minimum clearance is observed.
c) Fix the foot in position by tightening the lock nut [A].
d) If necessary, repeat steps a through c for more feet until the expansion
box is level and the minimum clearance is maintained.

7.1.2 19’’ Rack-mount Installation

OpenScape Business X8 is a modular communication system that can be
mounted as a one-box system (base box) or a two-box system (base box +
expansion box) in a 19-inch rack.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
104 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

7.1.2.1 How to Mount a System Box in a 19-inch Rack

Prerequisites
The prerequisites for selecting the installation site for a 19’’ rack-mount installa-
tion were taken into account (see Prerequisites for the Installation on page 29).
The front and rear plastic covers are not attached to the system box.
Two cabinet-specific support brackets (with an ultimate load > 40 kg) are avail-
able. These must be provided by the 19-inch cabinet supplier).

NOTICE: The use of cabinet floors is not permitted to prevent

overheating.

The cabinet-specific screws required for attaching the support and angle brack-
ets to the 19-inch rack are available.

Step by Step
1) Remove the four feet of the system box:
a) Unscrew lock nut [A] on one of the feet using an open-end wrench
(wrench size = 13 mm).
b) Unscrew the foot completely.
c) Repeat steps a and b for the remaining three case feet.

2) Attach the two supplied angle brackets [B] to the sides of the system box us-
ing the screws provided.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 105
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

3) Attach a right-handed and a left-handed support bracket [C] to the 19-inch

rack using the screws provided.

4) Lift the system box into the 19-inch rack and place it on the the two support
brackets [C]. Slide the system box into the 19-inch rack until the front edge
of the system box is flush with the front of the 19-inch frame.

CAUTION: General risk of injury or accidents in the workplace

Never attempt to lift a system box into a 19-inch rack without assis-
tance.

5) Use the two angle brackets [B] and the screws provided to attach the system
box to the 19-inch rack.
6) Repeat steps 1 through 6 if you want to install an expansion box.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
106 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8
Patch Panels (Optional)

7.2 Patch Panels (Optional)

For a 19’’ rack-mount installation of the OpenScape Business X8
communication system, the telephones, trunks, etc., can be connected via the
external patch panel.

Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X

Figure 12: Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X

Main Features
• Two SIVAPAC connectors (X1, X5) for connection to the backplane of the
communication system via CABLUs (prefabricated cabling units)
Using jumper wire, bridges must be inserted between the terminal strips X12
and X14 and between the terminal strips X13 and X15. The contact between
the SIVAPAC connector X5 and the first eight RJ45 jacks is only set up when
wire bridges are present.
When jumpering telephones, trunks, etc. directly to the terminal strips X12
and X13, no wire bridges are needed.
• 48 RJ45 jacks (1 to 48) for the connection of telephones, trunks, etc.

Table 1: Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X - Assignment of the RJ45 Jacks

Pin Signal
4 a
5 b
The RJ45 jacks each have two wires.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 107
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

• Eight slots for surge arresters (ÜSAGs) (F1 to F8)

NOTICE:
Fire hazard due to surge voltage
In the case of line lengths exceeding 500 m and where the
lines exit the building, analog and digital subscriber line mod-
ules must be protected by external lightning protection.
Lightning protection of this kind is known as additional prima-
ry protection. The additional primary protection is guaranteed
by installing ÜSAGs (surge arresters, gas filled) in the patch
panel.

INFO: X9, X10, X11 and PFT1 are not be used with OpenScape
Business.

Figure 13: Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X – Usage of the 48 RJ45 Jacks

The above figure shows the use of the 48 RJ45 jacks depending on the number
of interfaces of the connected peripheral boards.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
108 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

S0 Patch Panel C39104-Z7001-B3

Figure 14: S0 Patch Panel C39104-Z7001-B3

Main Features
• 24 RJ45 jacks (1 to 24) for the connection of ISDN telephones, ISDN trunks,
etc.
The connection to the backplane of the communication system is made via
open-end cables which must be manually attached to the S0 patch panel.

Table 2: S0 Patch Panel C39104-Z7001-B3 - Assignment of the RJ45

Jacks

Pin Signal
Trunk connection/Net- Station connection
working
3 Transmit + Receive +
4 Receive + Transmit +
5 Receive – Transmit –
6 Transmit – Receive –
Each of the RJ45 jacks must have four wires.

NOTICE: If you use patch panels from a third-party vendor, you

must observe the manufacturer's instructions for installation and
protective grounding.

7.2.1 How to Mount a Patch Panel in a 19-inch Rack

Prerequisites
The prerequisites for selecting the installation site for a 19’’ rack-mount installa-
tion were taken into account (see Prerequisites for the Installation on page 29).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 109
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8
Protective Grounding

Cabinet-specific screws for attaching the patch panel to the 19-inch’ rack are
available.

Step by Step
Lift the patch panel into the 19’’ rack and attach it to the 19-inch rack with the
screws [A] provided for this purpose.

7.3 Protective Grounding

The protective grounding provides a secure connection to the ground potential
to protect against dangerously high touch voltages in the event of a malfunction.

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
• Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the
system boxes of the OpenScape Business X8 communication sys-
tem and possibly any main distribution frames and patch panels be-
ing used. Connect the system boxes of your communication system,
your main distribution frame and your patch panels to the ground wire
before starting up the system and connecting telephones and lines.
• Make sure that the ground wires are protected and strain-relieved
2
(minimum conductor cross section = 12 AWG/2.5 mm ). A minimum

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
110 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

2
conductor cross section of 10 AWG/4 mm is needed to block the ef-
fects of external factors if the ground wire cannot be protected.

7.3.1 Protective Grounding for Standalone Installations

The system boxes of the communication system and any main distribution
frames used are grounded via the equipotential bonding strip of the building, via
a main ground busbar or via a ground field, for example.

7.3.1.1 How to Provide Protective Grounding for the Main Distribution Frame MDFU

Prerequisites
A ground connection with a resistance of less than 2 ohms exists. Examples:
equipotential bonding strip of the building, main ground busbar, ground field

DANGER:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Only personnel with proper qualifications or qualified electricians should
perform work on the low-voltage network (<1000 VAC) and all work must
comply with the national/local requirements for electrical connections.

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
• Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the
system boxes of the OpenScape Business X8 communication system
and possibly any main distribution frames being used. Connect the
system boxes of your communication system and your main distribu-
tion frame to the ground wire before starting up the system and con-
necting telephones and lines.
• Make sure that the ground wires are protected and strain-relieved
2
(minimum conductor cross section = 12 AWG/2.5 mm ). A minimum
2
conductor cross section of 10 AWG/4 mm is needed to block the ef-
fects of external factors if the ground wire cannot be protected.

The grounding of the system boxes must be performed from the grounding point
in a star configuration.
The implementation rules specified in IEC 60364, IEC 60950-1 and
IEC 62368-1 must be complied with during the installation.
Proceed as follows to ensure protective grounding:

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 111
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

Step by Step
1) Attach a separate ground wire to the ground terminal of the base box of the
communication system as indicated in the following figure.

2) Provide strain relief for the ground wire by securing it to the base box with a
cable tie.
3) Use a 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 thick wire (solid or stranded copper) with a max.
length of 39 meters (126 feet) to connect the ground terminal of the base box
with the ground terminal of the main external distribution frame MDFU. To
avoid confusion, you may use any color except green/yellow.
4) If an expansion box is present: Attach a separate ground wire to the ground
terminal of the expansion box of the communication system.
5) If an expansion box is present: Provide strain relief for the ground wire by se-
curing it to the expansion box with a cable tie.
6) Select one of the following options:
• Not for U.S. and Canada: Connect the separate ground wire(s) of the
system box(es) with the grounding point (e.g., the equipotential bonding
strip of the building) as illustrated in the conceptual diagram in the figure

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
112 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

below. Make sure that all ground wires laid are protected and strain-re-
lieved.

• For U.S. and Canada only: Connect the separate ground wire(s) of the
system box(es) with the grounding point (e.g., the main ground busbar,

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 113
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

ground field) as illustrated in the conceptual diagram in the figure below.

Make sure that all ground wires laid are protected and strain-relieved.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
114 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

7.3.1.2 How to Check the Grounding

Prerequisites
The system box or system boxes of the communication system are not yet con-
nected to the low-voltage network via the power cable.
Each individual system box of the communication system as well as any main
distribution frames have been properly grounded using separate ground wires.

Run the following test before startup to make sure that the protective grounding
for the communication system and the MDFs used is working properly.

Step by Step
1) Check the ohmic resistance on the ground connection to the communication
system:
The measurement is taken between the ground contact of a grounded power
outlet of the home installation (where the communication system is connect-
ed) and a system box of the communication system.
2) Repeat the measurement for all additional system boxes of the communica-
tion system.
3) Check the ohmic resistance between the system boxes of the communica-
tion system and the main distribution frame(s).

The result (reference value) of a measurement must be significantly less than

10 Ohms.
If you obtain some other measurement results, contact a qualified electrician.
The electrician will need to check the equipotential bonding of the domestic in-
stallation and ensure the low resistance grounding (ohmage) of the earthing
conductors.

7.3.2 Protective Grounding for 19’’ Rack-mount Installations

The system boxes of the communication system and any patch panels used are
grounded via the equipotential bonding strip of the 19’’ rack.

7.3.2.1 How to Provide Protective Grounding for the Communication System and the
Patch Panel

Prerequisites
A ground connection with a resistance of less than 2 ohms exists. Examples:
equipotential bonding strip of the building, main ground busbar, ground field
The 19-inch rack is grounded by a separate ground conductor (green/yellow).
The 19-inch rack is equipped with an equipotential bonding strip at which the
system boxes of the communication system and the patch panels can be sepa-
rately grounded.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 115
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

DANGER:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Only personnel with proper qualifications or qualified electricians should
perform work on the low-voltage network (<1000 VAC) and all work must
comply with the national/local requirements for electrical connections.

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
• Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the
system boxes of the OpenScape Business X8 communication sys-
tem and possibly any patch panels being used. Connect the system
boxes of your communication system and your patch panels to the
ground wire before starting up the system and connecting telephones
and lines.
• Make sure that the ground wires are protected and strain-relieved
2
(minimum conductor cross section = 12 AWG/2.5 mm ). A minimum
2
conductor cross section of 10 AWG/4 mm is needed to block the ef-
fects of external factors if a ground wire cannot be protected.

The grounding of the system boxes must be performed from the grounding point
in a star configuration.
The implementation rules specified in IEC 60364, IEC 60950-1 and
IEC 62368-1 must be complied with during the installation.

NOTICE:
The listed requirements apply if you are using patch panels from
another vendor.
A protective grounding of the S0 patch panel (C39104-Z7001-
B3) is not required.

Proceed as follows to ensure protective grounding:

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
116 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

Step by Step
1) Attach a separate ground wire to the ground terminal of the base box of the
communication system as indicated in the following figure.

2) Provide strain relief for the ground wire by securing it to the base box with a
cable tie.
3) Use a 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 thick wire (solid or stranded copper) with a max.
length of 39 meters (126 feet) to connect the ground terminal of the base box
with the ground terminal of the patch panel (S30807-K6143-X). To avoid con-
fusion, you may use any color except green/yellow.
4) If an additional patch panel (S30807-K6143-X) is present: Use a
2
12 AWG/2.5 mm thick wire (solid or stranded copper) with a max. length
of 39 meters (126 feet) to connect the ground terminals of the patch panels
with each other. To avoid confusion, you may use any color except green/
yellow.
5) If an expansion box is present: Attach a separate ground wire to the ground
terminal of the expansion box of the communication system.
6) If an expansion box is present: Provide strain relief for the ground wire by se-
curing it to the expansion box with a cable tie.
7) Connect the separate ground wire(s) of the system box(es) with the equipo-
tential bonding strip in the 19-inch rack as shown in the conceptual diagram

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 117
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

in the figure below. Make sure that all ground wires laid are protected and
strain-relieved.

7.3.2.2 How to Check the Grounding

Prerequisites
The system box or system boxes of the communication system and all other de-
vices in the 19-inch rack are not connected to the low-voltage network through
power cables.
Each individual system box of the communication system as well as any patch
panels have been properly grounded using separate ground wires.
The 19-inch rack is grounded by a separate ground conductor (green/yellow).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
118 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8
Configuration Notes

Run the following test before startup to make sure that the protective grounding
for the communication system and the patch panels used is working properly.

Step by Step
1) Check the ohmic resistance on the ground connection to the communication
system:
a) The first measurement is taken between the ground contact of a ground-
ed power outlet of the home installation and the equipotential bonding
strip in the 19-inch rack.
b) The second measurement is taken between the equipotential bonding
strip in the 19-inch rack and a system box of the communication system.
c) Repeat the second measurement for all additional system boxes of the
communication system.
2) Check the ohmic resistance between the system boxes of the communica-
tion system and the patch panels.

The result (reference value) of a measurement must be significantly less than

10 Ohms.
If you obtain some other measurement results, contact a qualified electrician.
The electrician will need to check the equipotential bonding of the domestic in-
stallation and ensure the low resistance grounding (ohmage) of the earthing
conductors.

7.4 Configuration Notes

The configuration notes include information on the board slots in the base box
and expansion box, the initialization of the boards, the distribution of the PCM
highways in the base box and the expansion box and the board installation.

7.4.1 Board Slots in the Base Box

The base box provides nine slots for peripheral boards (slots 1 to 5 and 7
to 10). A fixed slot is assigned to the OCCL or OCCLA mainboard (slot 6).
Depending on your requirements, up to three LUNA2 power supply units can be
used in the base box.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 119
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

Figure 15: OpenScape Business X8 – Board Slots in the Base Box

7.4.2 Board Slots in the Expansion Box

The expansion box provides thirteen slots for peripheral boards (slots 1 to 6 and
8 to 14). Depending on your requirements, up to four LUNA2 power supply units
can be used in the expansion box.

Figure 16: OpenScape Business X8 – Board Slots in the Expansion Box

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
120 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

7.4.3 Special Board Slots

The following boards are used in special slots.

DBSAP
The DBSAP board is part of the expansion box shipment and is plugged into the
corresponding backplane connector of the expansion box by factory.

LUNA2
The slots for the LUNA2 are located in the lower part of the shelf of a system
box. The base box has three slots and the expansion box has four slots.

NOTICE:
LUNA2 may only be plugged in or out when the system is
switched off (switch position = DC-OFF).

The slots of the power supply units must be covered with outer panels before
the communication system is started up.

REALS
The slot for the REALS board is located in the lower part of the shelf of the base
box.
The slots of the power supply units and the slot of the REALS board must be
covered with outer panels before the communication system is started up.
For more detailed information, see the relevant board description.

7.4.4 Initializing the Boards

The system software detects and initializes the boards in ascending order,
starting with the lowest installation position the first time the system starts up.
The board interfaces are initialized in the sequence indicated by the arrow in the
following figure.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 121
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

Figure 17: OpenScape Business X8 - Initialization of the Boards

The system activates all connected boards in the following situations:

• The maximum configuration of the communication system has not yet been
reached.
While sequentially scanning the slots, the system software checks whether
the maximum number of stations or trunks has been exceeded. If it has, the
board is not activated.
• At least one B channel is available for the slot in the case of trunk boards.
Only the number of B channels available in the communication system is put
into operation.

7.4.5 Distribution of the PCM Highways in the Base Box

The base box provides two PCM highway trunk groups with 2 x 4 PCM
highways for each peripheral board slot. There are 32 time-division multiplex
channels available for each PCM highway. If all of these channels are busy, no
further call requests can be accepted.
To guarantee that the system operates without blocking, make sure when per-
forming the configuration that the boards on a PCM segment do not require
more than the number of time-division multiplex channels available.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
122 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

Figure 18: OpenScape Business X8 – PCM Highways in the Base Box

The PCM highway bundles in the base box are used by peripheral boards ac-
cording to the following rules:
• One-box System
– Bundle A's PCM highway
With the exception of boards DIUT2, DIUN2 and DIU2U, the peripheral
boards only use the PCM highways of trunk group A.
128 time-division multiplex channels (4 PCM highways) are available on
the PCM segment for board slots 1 to 5 and on the PCM segment for
board slots 7 to 10.
– PCM highway trunk group F
The peripheral boards DIUT2, DIUN2 and DIU2U use the PCM highways
of trunk group F.
128 time-division multiplex channels are thus available for these boards
on the PCM segment for board slots 1 to 5 and on the PCM segment for
board slots 7-10.
If more than the 2 x 128 time-division multiplex channels from PCM high-
way trunk group F are required because of the configuration with these
boards, the communication system will automatically resort to time-divi-
sion multiplex channels from PCM highway trunk group A. However, on-
ly complete boards are activated on the other trunk group. The remaining
time-division multiplex channels of PCM highway trunk group F remain
free.
• Two-box system
All peripheral boards use the PCM highways from trunk group A only.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 123
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

7.4.6 Distribution of the PCM Highways in the Expansion Box

The expansion box provides a PCM highway bundle with 2 x 4 PCM highways
for each peripheral board slot. There are 32 time-division multiplex channels
available for each PCM highway. If all of these channels are busy, no further call
requests can be accepted.
To guarantee that the system operates without blocking, make sure when per-
forming configuration that the boards on a PCM segment do not require more
than the number of time-division multiplex channels available.

Figure 19: OpenScape Business X8 – PCM Highways in the Expansion

Box

All peripheral boards in the expansion box use the PCM highways from trunk
group A only.
128 time-division multiplex channels (4 PCM highways) are available on the
PCM segment for board slots 1 to 6 and on the PCM segment for board slots 8
to 14.
PCM highway bundle F is not used.

7.4.7 Time-division Multiplex Channels of the Peripheral Boards

Each peripheral board requires a different number of time-division multiplex
channels to execute call requests. OpenScape Business X8 provides these
time-division multiplex channels in the form of PCM highways.
OpenScape Business X8 provides PCM highway trunk groups with 2 x 4 PCM
highways for each peripheral board slot. There are 32 time-division multiplex
channels available for each PCM highway. If all of these channels are busy,
no further call requests can be accepted. To guarantee that the communica-
tion system operates without blocking, make sure when performing configura-

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
124 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

tion that the boards on a PCM segment do not require more than the number of
time-division multiplex channels available.
When assigning time-division multiplex channels to the peripheral boards, a dis-
tinction is made between the following types of assignment:
• Static assignment
Time-division multiplex channels are assigned statically for trunk and tie-traf-
fic boards. This ensures that all calls can be processed.

NOTICE: The TMDID board only uses the first half of a PCM
segment, which means that up to 64 channels are available
per PCM segment for TMDID static time-division multiplex
channels. To guarantee that the communication system oper-
ates without blocking when using the TMDID, the boards on
a PCM segment must not occupy more than 64 static time-di-
vision multiplex channels.
Examples for a PCM segment:
2 x TMDID + 1 x DIU2U = 64 static time-division multiplex
channels = approved equipment
1 x TMDID + 1 x TMANI + 1 x DIUT2 = 76 static time-division
multiplex channels = unapproved equipment
1 x TMDID + 2 x SLMO2 = 8 static and 96 dynamic time-divi-
sion multiplex channels = approved equipment
• Dynamic assignment
Time-division multiplex channels are subject to dynamic assignment in sub-
scriber line modules. The channels are seized with every call and released
at the end of each call. The current number of time-division multiplex chan-
nels required is determined by the number of active stations.
• Static/dynamic assignment
For boards with S0 interfaces, the way in which the time-division multiplex
channels are assigned depends on the actual use of the individual S0 inter-
faces. The channels are assigned statically if the S0 interface is used for the
ISDN trunk connection (ISDN trunk). The channels are assigned dynamically
if the S0 interface is used for the ISDN station connection.

For details on the number of time-division multiplex channels required by the

various peripheral boards, see OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 Service Docu-
mentation, Appendix - Hardware Expansion,

7.4.8 Board Installation

Peripheral boards can be inserted and removed while the power is connect-
ed (hot swappable). Always use the board wrench for removing and inserting
boards.
The mainboard (OCCL or OCCLA) must not be pulled out when the system is
energized. In this case, the system must be first disconnected from the mains.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 125
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

7.4.8.1 How to Insert a Board

Prerequisites
The front plastic cover of the system box is not attached.
A free board slot is available.
The specifications on the distribution of the PCM highways in the system boxes
were taken into account.

NOTICE: Always wear an antistatic wristband when handling

boards.
The ESD measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive de-
vices must be observed and followed (see Warnings: Note on
page 16)

Step by Step
1) Using its guide rails slide the board into the system box until it stops.
2) Insert the tip of the board wrench marked "Plug-In" into the bottom opening
in the front cover of the board.
3) Lever the board into the board shelf of the system box by pushing the board
wrench upwards.

7.4.8.2 How to Remove a Board

Prerequisites
The front plastic cover of the system box is not attached.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
126 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

NOTICE: Always wear an antistatic wristband when handling

boards.
The ESD measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive de-
vices must be observed and followed (see Warnings: Note on
page 16)

Step by Step
1) Insert the tip of the board wrench marked “Pull” into the top opening on the
front cover of the board to be removed.
2) Lever the board out of the board shelf of the system box by pushing the
board wrench upwards.

3) Pull the board out of the system box over the guide rails.

7.4.8.3 How to Install Shielding Covers

By installing a shielding cover, you can ensure that unused board slots or
slots that are equipped with peripheral boards that only have plastic covers
are adequately shielded. The following boards are affected: STMD3, TMDID,
TMEW2, SLMU, SLMAV8N, SLMAV24N.

Prerequisites
The front plastic cover is not attached to the system box.

Step by Step
1) Insert the two bottom pins on the shielding cover into the openings provided
for this purpose on the shelf.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 127
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8
Backplanes of the System Boxes

2) Press the shielding cover towards the board shelf until it snaps into place.

7.5 Backplanes of the System Boxes

The backplanes provide the connection between the central control board
OCCL, the peripheral boards and the LUNA2 power supplies; they also provide
connectors for telephones, trunks, etc.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
128 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

7.5.1 Backplane of the Base Box

The backplane of the base box provides the connection between the central
control board OCCLA, the peripheral boards and the LUNA2 power supplies; it
also provides connectors for telephones, trunks, etc.

Figure 20: OpenScape Business X8 – Backplane of the Base Box

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 129
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

Table 3: OpenScape Business X8 – Connections on the Backplane of the

Base Box

Connection Function
X101 to SIVAPAC connectors for picking up the signals from the periph-
X105, X109 eral boards in slots 1 to 5 and 9 to 12
to X112
An external main distribution frame or patch panels are con-
nected via CABLUs (Cabling Units = prefabricated cabling
units) or open-end cables. The connection of the S0 patch pan-
el is made through an open-ended cable.
The following connector panels can be plugged into the SIVA-
PAC connectors:
• Connector panel with CHAMP jack for connecting an exter-
nal main distribution frame or patch panel using CABLUs.
• Connector panels with 8 and 24 RJ45 jacks for direct con-
nection of telephones, trunks, etc.
X116 SIVAPAC connectors for picking up the signals from the REALS
board
An external main distribution frame or patch panels are con-
nected through an open-ended cable (24 DA):
• S30267-Z196-A100: 10 m length
• S30267-Z196-A250: 25 m length
X201 68-pin DB68 jack for connecting the cable to the expansion box
(i.e., to the DBSAP board)
X209 DC port
X211, X212 AC power

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
130 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

7.5.2 Expansion Box Backplane

The backplane of the expansion box provides the connection between the
peripheral boards and the LUNA2 power supplies; it also provides connectors
for telephones, trunks, etc.

Figure 21: OpenScape Business X8 – Expansion Box Backplane

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 131
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

Table 4: OpenScape Business X8 – Connections on the Backplane of the

Expansion Box

Connection Function
X101 to SIVAPAC connectors for picking up the signals from the periph-
X106, X109 eral boards in slots 1 to 6 and 9 to 15
to X115
An external main distribution frame or patch panels are con-
nected via CABLUs (Cabling Units = prefabricated cabling
units) or open-end cables. The connection of the S0 patch pan-
el is made through an open-ended cable.
The following connector panels can be plugged into the SIVA-
PAC connectors:
• Connector panel with CHAMP jack for connecting an exter-
nal main distribution frame or patch panel using CABLUs.
• Connector panels with 8 and 24 RJ45 jacks for direct con-
nection of telephones, trunks, etc.
X209 DC port
X211 AC power
X220 to X223 Connections for plugging in the DBSAP board

DBSAP has a 68-pin DB-68 jack for connecting the connection

cable to the base box (X201).

7.5.3 Connector or Shielding Panels for Backplanes

Connector panels with CHAMP jacks (for connecting the main distribution
frame or a patch panel via CABLUs) and connector panels with RJ45 jacks (for
direct connection of telephones, trunks, etc.) can be plugged into the SIVAPAC
connectors on the backplanes of the base and extension boxes. Shielding
panels are installed to ensure adequate shielding of the backplane for boards
whose signals are not picked up via connector panels.

Connector Panel with CHAMP Jack (NPPSC, S30807-Q6626-X)

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
132 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

Connector Panel with 24 RJ45 Jacks (NPPAB, S30807-Q6622-X)

Table 5: Connector Panel with 24 RJ45 Jacks - Pin Assignments of the

RJ45 Jacks

Pin Signal
4 a
5 b
The RJ45 jacks have two wires.

Connector Panel with eight RJ45 Jacks (NPPS0, S30807-Q6624-X)

Table 6: Connector Panel with 8 RJ45 Jacks - Pin Assignments of the

RJ45 Jacks

Pin Signal
Trunk connection/Net- Station connection
working
3 Transmit + Receive +
4 Receive + Transmit +
5 Receive – Transmit –
6 Transmit – Receive –
The RJ45 jacks have four wires.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 133
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

Shielding Panel (C39165-A7075-C44)

7.5.3.1 How to Mount Connector or Shielding Panels

Prerequisites
The back plastic cover is not attached to the system box.

Step by Step
Select one of the following options:
• If you want to install a connector panel, press it onto the desired SIVAPAC
connector on the backplane.
Attach the connection panel to the system box with the two screws included
in the delivery package.
• If you wish to install a shielding panel, run any existing CABLUs through the
cable guides.
Attach the shielding panel to the system box with the two screws included in
the delivery package.

7.5.4 Connection to Backplanes

The backplanes of the base box and the expansion box provide connectors
for phones, trunks, etc. The connection can be made via an external main
distribution frame or via external patch panels. The direct connection to the
backplane can be made via connector panels with RJ45 jacks.

7.5.4.1 How to Connect the Connection Cable between the Base and Expansion Box
(Optional)

The connection cable (C39195-Z7611-A10) ensures that the expansion box

receives HDLC, PCM and clock signals from the base box.

Prerequisites
The back plastic covers of the system boxes are not attached.
The DBSAP board (S30807-Q6722-X) is installed on the backplane of the ex-
pansion box.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
134 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

Step by Step
1) Plug one of the cable connectors into the 68-pin DB68 jack X201 of the base
box.
2) Plug the other cable connector into the 68-pin DB68 jack of the DBSAP
board.
3) Use cable ties to secure both ends of the connecting cable to the system
boxes.

7.5.4.2 How to Attach a Connection Cable to the External Main Distribution Frame
(Optional)

Several different options are available to connect the backplane to the main
distribution frame or any other external main distribution frame. These depend
on which peripheral boards occupy which slots and on the connector panels
used.

Prerequisites

WARNING: Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires

Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the sys-
tem boxes of your communication system and all main distribution
frames before connecting telephones and lines.

The back plastic cover is not attached to the system box.

Step by Step
1) Select the appropriate connection cable depending on the peripheral board
and the connector panel used.

If Then
Peripher- Connec- Connection cable
al board tor panel

STMD3 – Connection to the MDFU-E or another ex-

ternal main distribution frame: open-end
TMANI
cable (24 DA) with SIVAPAC socket (back-
TMDID plane):
TMEW2 • S30267-Z196-A100: 10 m length
SLMAV8N • S30267-Z196-A250: 25 m length

Connector Connection to external main distribution

panel with frame: cable with CHAMP connector
CHAMP jack

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 135
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

If Then
Peripher- Connec- Connection cable
al board tor panel

SLMU – Connection to the external main distribu-

tion frame: open-end cable (24 DA) with
SLMAV24N
SIVAPAC socket (backplane):
• S30267-Z196-A100: 10 m length
• S30267-Z196-A250: 25 m length

Connector Connection to external main distribution

panel with frame: cable with CHAMP connector
CHAMP jack
2) Plug the connection cable into the desired backplane connector.
3) Attach the cable to the system box using cable ties.
4) Select one of the following options to connect to any external main distribu-
tion frame:
• If you use an external main distribution frame and an open-end cable,
connect the cable to the desired splitting/jumper strip in the external main
distribution frame.
• If you use an external main distribution frame with CHAMP connectors
and a CHAMP cable, insert the connector into the desired CHAMP jack of
the external main distribution frame.
5) Attach the connection cable to the external main distribution frame using ca-
ble ties.

7.5.4.3 How to Install the Connection Cables to the Patch Panel (Optional)

To connect the backplane with the patch panel, CABLUs (24 DA) with SIVAPAC
connectors in lengths of 2 m (S30267-Z333-A20) and 5 m (S30267-Z333-A50)
are available.

Prerequisites

WARNING: Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires

Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the sys-
tem boxes of your communication system and all patch panels before
connecting telephones and lines.

The back plastic cover is not attached to the system box.

Step by Step
1) Plug the connection cable into the desired backplane connector.
2) Attach the cable to the system box using cable ties.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
136 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

3) Plug the connection cable into the desired connector of the patch panel.
For information on the assignment of the RJ45 jacks of the patch panel
S30807-K6143-X, see Patch Panels (Optional) on page 107.
4) Attach the connection cable to the patch panel using cable ties.

7.5.4.4 How to Install the Connection Cables to the S0 Patch Panel (Optional)

To connect the backplane (SIVAPAC connector) with the S0 patch panel, open-
ended cables (24 DA) in lengths of 10 m (S30267-Z196-A100) and 25 m
(S30267-Z196-A250) are available.

Prerequisites

WARNING: Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires

Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the sys-
tem boxes of your communication system before connecting telephones
and lines.

The back plastic cover is not attached to the system box.

Step by Step
1) Plug the connection cable into the desired backplane connector.
2) Attach the cable to the system box using cable ties.
3) Strip the cable wires (stripping length = 60 cm (+/– 0.5 cm)).

4) Strip the cable shield of the cable over a length of about 3 cm. Cut the drain
wire to about 2.5 cm and fix it on the cable shield by wrapping it with tape (at
least 1.5 times around).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 137
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

5) Use a standard wiring tool for laying the cable wires on the S0 patch panel.
Twist the wire pairs before laying them (see figure below).

Table 7: Color codes for the open-end cable

Color Group Pair A-wire B-wire

1 1 white/blue
blue/white
2 white/orange
orange/white
3 white/green
green/white
4 white/brown
brown/white
5 white/gray
gray/white
2 6 red/blue
blue/red
7 red/orange
orange/red
8 red/green
green/red
9 red/brown
brown/red
10 red/gray
gray/red
3 11 black/blue
blue/black
12 black/orange

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
138 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8
Trunk Connection

Color Group Pair A-wire B-wire

orange/black
13 black/green
green/black
14 black/brown
brown/black
15 black/gray
gray/black
4 16 yellow/blue
blue/yellow
17 yellow/orange
orange/yellow
18 yellow/green
green/yellow
19 yellow/brown
brown/yellow
20 yellow/gray
gray/yellow
5 21 purple/blue
blue/purple
22 purple/orange
orange/purple
23 purple/green
green/purple
24 purple/brown
brown/purple

For information on the assignment of the RJ45 jacks of the S0 patch panel
C39104-Z7001-B3 for the station connection and the trunk connection, see
Patch Panels (Optional).
6) Attach the connection cable to the S0 patch panel using cable ties.

7.6 Trunk Connection

The OpenScape Business X8 communication system offers different options for
trunk connections and thus for access to the public communication network.
You can select the trunk connection or connections required for your communi-
cation system from the following options:
• ISDN point-to-point connection and ISDN point-to-multipoint connection via
S0 interface (not for U.S. and Canada)

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 139
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

• ISDN Primary Rate Interface via the S2M Interface (not for U.S. and Canada)
• ISDN Primary Rate Interface via the T1 interface (not for U.S. and Canada)
• Trunk connection with CAS protocol via CAS interface (for selected countries
only)
• Analog trunk connections

7.6.1 How to Set up an ISDN Point-to-Point or ISDN Point-to-Multipoint

Connection via an S0 Port (Not for U.S. and Canada)
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the sys-
tem boxes of your communication system as well as all main distribution
frames and patch panels before connecting telephones and lines.
A protective grounding of the S0 patch panel (C39104-Z7001-B3) is not
required.

CAUTION: Fire hazard

To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

OpenScape Business X8 is equipped with at least one STMD3 board.

During startup, the S0 interface must be configured as an ISDN point-to-point or
ISDN point-to-multipoint connection.
An ISDN point-to-point or point-to-multipoint connection is available.

Step by Step
Connect the desired S0 port with NTBA of the ISDN point-to-point or ISDN multi-
point connection.
Select one of the following options to do this:
• If the connection is to be made via the external main distribution frame MD-
FU, connect the NTBA connection cable to the desired splitting strip/jumper
strip in the MDFU-E.
• If the connection is to be made via the external S0 patch panel, connect the
NTBA connection cable to the desired RJ45 jack of the S0 patch panel.
• If the connection is to be made via the backplane of a system box (i.e., via a
connector panel with eight RJ45 jacks), connect the NTBA connection cable
to the desired RJ45 jack of the desired connector panel.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
140 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

7.6.2 How to Set up an ISDN Primary Rate Interface via an S2M Port (Not for
U.S. and Canada)
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the sys-
tem boxes of your communication system as well as all main distribution
frames and patch panels before connecting telephones and lines.

CAUTION: Fire hazard

To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

OpenScape Business X8 is equipped with at least one DIUT2 board.

One ISDN Primary Rate Interface is available.

Step by Step
Connect the desired sub-D connector in the front panel of the desired board
with the NTPM of the ISDN Primary Rate Interface.

7.6.3 How to Set up the ISDN Primary Rate Interface via a T1 Interface (For
U.S. and Canada Only)
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the sys-
tem boxes of your communication system as well as all main distribution
frames and patch panels before connecting telephones and lines.

CAUTION: Fire hazard

To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

OpenScape Business X8 is equipped with at least one DIUT2 board.

One Channel Service Unit (CSU) that is approved as per FCC Part 68 and that
satisfies the ANSI directive T1.403 is available. The T1 interface must not be di-
rectly connected to the PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). It is essen-
tial that one CSU be installed between the communication system and the dig-
ital trunk connection. The CSU provides the following features for OpenScape

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 141
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

Business X8: Isolation and overvoltage protection of the communication system,

diagnostic options in the event of a malfunction (such as signal loopback, ap-
plication of test signals and test patterns), line-up of the output signal in compli-
ance with the line lengths specified by the network provider. A CSU is not a de-
livery component of the OpenScape Business X8 communication system.
One ISDN Primary Rate Interface is available.

Step by Step
Connect the desired sub-D connector in the front panel of the desired board
with the Channel Service Unit (CSU).

7.6.4 For Selected Countries Only: How to Set up a Trunk Connection via
an E1-CAS Interface
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the sys-
tem boxes of your communication system as well as all main distribution
frames and patch panels before connecting telephones and lines.

CAUTION: Fire hazard

To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

OpenScape Business X8 is equipped with at least one TMCAS2 or TMCAS

board.
A trunk connection with the CAS protocol is available.

Step by Step
Connect the desired CAS interface in the front panel of the desired board with
the NT of the trunk connection.

7.6.5 How to Set up an Analog Trunk Connection

Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the sys-
tem boxes of your communication system as well as all main distribution
frames and patch panels before connecting telephones and lines.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
142 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8
Connection of phones and devices

CAUTION: Fire hazard

To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

NOTICE:
Fire hazard due to surge voltage
In the case of line lengths exceeding 500 m and where the lines
exit the building, the TMANI and TMDID boards must be protect-
ed by external lightning protection.
Lightning protection of this kind is known as additional primary
protection. The additional primary protection is guaranteed by in-
stalling ÜSAGs (surge arresters, gas filled) in the main distribu-
tion frame, the patch panel or at the entry point of the pipe in the
building. A gas-filled surge arrester with 230 V nominal voltage
is switched to ground from each wire that is to be protected.

OpenScape Business X8 is equipped with at least one TMANI or TMDID board.

For the U.S. and Canada only: A protector as per UL 497A or CSA C22.2
No. 226 is available. The installation regulations require analog trunks to be
connected using approved protectors as per UL 497A or CSA C22.2 No. 226.
An analog trunk connection with MSI (main station interface) signaling proce-
dures (ground-start and loop-start signaling) is available.

Step by Step
Connect the desired a/b port of the desired board with the TAE socket of the
analog trunk connection.
Select one of the following options to do this:
• If the connection is to be made via the external main distribution frame MD-
FU, connect the TAE connection cable to the desired splitting strip/jumper
strip in the MDFU.
• If the connection is to be made via the external patch panel, connect the TAE
connection cable to the desired RJ45 jack of the patch panel.
• If the connection is to be made via the backplane of a system box (i.e., via a
connector panel with 24 RJ45 jacks), connect the TAE connection cable to
the desired RJ45 jack of the desired connector panel.

7.7 Connection of phones and devices

The OpenScape Business X8 communication system offers various options for
connecting phones and devices.
You can select the connection(s) required for your communication system from
the following options:
• Direct connection of ISDN phones (not for U.S. and Canada)
• Connection of ISDN phones via the S0 bus (not for U.S. and Canada)
• Connection of UP0/E phones

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 143
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

• Connection of analog phones and devices

7.7.1 How to Connect ISDN Phones Directly (Not for U.S. and Canada)
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the sys-
tem boxes of your communication system as well as all main distribution
frames and patch panels before connecting telephones and lines.
A protective grounding of the S0 patch panel (C39104-Z7001-B3) is not
required.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

NOTICE:
Fire hazard due to surge voltage
Only for the station connection interfaces: In the case of line
lengths exceeding 500 m and where the lines exit the building,
the STMD3 board must be protected by external lightning pro-
tection.
Lightning protection of this kind is known as additional primary
protection. The additional primary protection is guaranteed by in-
stalling ÜSAGs (surge arresters, gas filled) in the main distribu-
tion frame, the patch panel or at the entry point of the pipe in the
building. A gas-filled surge arrester with 230 V nominal voltage
is switched to ground from each wire that is to be protected.

OpenScape Business X8 is equipped with at least one STMD3 board.

The S0 ports used must be configured at startup as an internal S0 connection.
The ISDN phones to be connected must have a separate power source, e.g.,
via a power adapter. It is not possible to obtain power via the S0 ports of the ST-
MD3 board.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
144 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

Step by Step
1) Connect the desired S0 port with the ISDN telephone.
Select one of the following options to do this:
• If the connection is to be made via the external main distribution frame
MDFU-E, connect the ISDN phone connection cable to the desired split-
ting strip in the MDFU-E.
• If the connection is to be made via the external S0 patch panel, connect
the ISDN phone connection cable to the desired RJ45 jack of the S0
patch panel.
• If the connection is to be made via the backplane of a system box (i.e.,
via a connector panel with eight RJ45 jacks), connect the ISDN phone
connection cable to the desired RJ45 jack of the desired connector panel.

INFO: Refer to the installation instructions of the phone to be

connected.

2) If present, connect any further ISDN phones to the communication system

by the same method.

7.7.2 How to Connect ISDN Phones via the S0 Bus (Not for U.S. and
Canada)
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the sys-
tem boxes of your communication system as well as all main distribution
frames and patch panels before connecting telephones and lines.
A protective grounding of the S0 patch panel (C39104-Z7001-B3) is not
required.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

NOTICE:
Fire hazard due to surge voltage
Only for the station connection interfaces: In the case of line
lengths exceeding 500 m and where the lines exit the building,
the STMD3 board must be protected by external lightning pro-
tection.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 145
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

Lightning protection of this kind is known as additional primary

protection. The additional primary protection is guaranteed by in-
stalling ÜSAGs (surge arresters, gas filled) in the main distribu-
tion frame, the patch panel or at the entry point of the pipe in the
building. A gas-filled surge arrester with 230 V nominal voltage
is switched to ground from each wire that is to be protected.

OpenScape Business X8 is equipped with at least one STMD3 board.

The S0 ports used must be configured at startup as an internal S0 connection.
The ISDN phones to be connected must have a separate power source, e.g.,
via a power adapter. It is not possible to obtain power via the S0 ports of the ST-
MD3 board.
Every individual ISDN phone (ISDN stations) must be assigned a unique Multi-
ple Subscriber Number (MSN). This assignment must be made in the configura-
tion menu of the ISDN station.

Step by Step
1) Connect the desired S0 port with the Mini Western socket of the S0 bus.
Select one of the following options to do this:
• If the connection is to be made via the external main distribution frame
MDFU, connect the connection cable of the Mini Western socket of the S0
bus to the desired splitting strip in the MDFU.
• If the connection is to be made via the external S0 patch panel, connect
the connection cable of the Mini Western socket of the S0 bus to the de-
sired RJ45 jack of the S0 patch panel.
• If the connection is to be made via the backplane of a system box (i.e.,
via a connector panel with eight RJ45 jacks), connect the connection ca-
ble of the Mini Western socket of the S0 bus to the desired RJ45 jack of
the desired connector panel.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
146 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

2) Complete the wiring as shown in the following diagram.

3) Install terminating resistors (100 Ohm/0.25 W) in the last socket of the S0

bus.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 147
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

4) Make sure that terminating resistors are only connected to the two ends of
the S0 bus. No terminating resistors are required for the other sockets of the
S0 bus.

INFO: Since terminating resistors are already integrated into

OpenScape Business X8, the communication system forms
one end of an S0 bus.

INFO: Refer to the installation instructions of the phone to be

connected.

7.7.3 How to Connect UP0/E Phones

Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the sys-
tem boxes of your communication system as well as all main distribution
frames and patch panels before connecting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

NOTICE:
Fire hazard due to surge voltage
In the case of line lengths exceeding 500 m and where the lines
exit the building, the SLMO2 and SLMO8 boards must be pro-
tected by external lightning protection.
Lightning protection of this kind is known as additional primary
protection. The additional primary protection is guaranteed by in-
stalling ÜSAGs (surge arresters, gas filled) in the main distribu-
tion frame, the patch panel or at the entry point of the pipe in the
building. A gas-filled surge arrester with 230 V nominal voltage
is switched to ground from each wire that is to be protected.

OpenScape Business X8 is equipped with at least one SLMU board.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
148 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

Step by Step
1) Connect the desired UP0/E port with the UP0/E phone.
Select one of the following options to do this:
• If the connection is to be made via the external main distribution frame
MDFU, connect the UP0/E phone connection cable to the desired splitting
strip/jumper strip in the MDFU.
• If the connection is to be made via the external patch panel, connect the
connection cable of the UP0/E telephone to the desired RJ45 jack of the
patch panel.
• If the connection is to be made via the backplane of a system box (i.e.,
via a connector panel with 24 RJ45 jacks), connect the UP0/E phone con-
nection cable to the desired RJ45 jack of the desired connector panel.

INFO: Refer to the installation instructions of the phone to be

connected.

2) If present, connect any further UP0/E phones to the communication system by

the same method.

7.7.4 How to Connect Analog Telephones and Devices

Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for the sys-
tem boxes of your communication system as well as all main distribution
frames and patch panels before connecting telephones and lines.

CAUTION:
Fire hazard
To reduce the risk of fire, you may only use communication cables with a
conductor diameter of at least 0.4mm (AWG 26) or larger.

NOTICE:
Fire hazard due to surge voltage
In the case of line lengths exceeding 500 m and where the lines
exit the building, the SLMAV8N and SLMAV24N boards must be
protected by external lightning protection.
Lightning protection of this kind is known as additional primary
protection. The additional primary protection is guaranteed by in-
stalling ÜSAGs (surge arresters, gas filled) in the main distribu-
tion frame, the patch panel or at the entry point of the pipe in the

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 149
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8
Closing Activities

building. A gas-filled surge arrester with 230 V nominal voltage

is switched to ground from each wire that is to be protected.

OpenScape Business X8 is equipped with at least one SLMAV8N or SL-

MAV24N board.

Step by Step
1) Connect the desired a/b port to be connected to the analog device (phone,
fax, modem, loudspeaker, etc.).
Select one of the following options to do this:
• If the connection is to be made via the external main distribution frame
MDFU, connect the connection cable of the analog phone or device to the
desired splitting strip/jumper strip in the MDFU.
• If the connection is to be made via the external patch panel, connect the
connection cable of the analog telephone or device to the desired RJ45
jack of the patch panel.
• If the connection is to be made via the backplane of a system box (i.e.,
via a connector panel with 24 RJ45 jacks), connect the connection cable
of the analog telephone or device to the desired RJ45 jack of the desired
connector panel.
2) If present, connect any further analog phones or devices to the communica-
tion system by the same method.

7.8 Closing Activities

To complete the installation, the M.2 SSD or SDHC card must be inserted,
and a visual inspection must be performed. Furthermore, for standalone
installations, all system boxes of the communication system must be closed
with the plastic covers provided for this purpose. Finally, the system is
connected to the mains power supply.
The communication system can then be put into operation with the OpenScape
Business Assistant (WBM). The description of this can be found in the online
help of the WBM or in the Administrator Documentation in the section "Initial In-
stallation of OpenScape Business".

NOTICE: During the initial startup of the communication sys-

tem, the charge state of the battery on the mainboard is unde-
fined. To achieve an adequate charge state, the system must re-
main connected to the mains power supply for at least 2 days.
If the system is disconnected from the mains power supply, the
battery may be insufficiently charged and could potentially cause
the activation period to be blocked due to time manipulation

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
150 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

7.8.1 How to Insert the M.2 SSD or the SDHC Card (system with OCCM)
The M.2 SSD or the SDHC card contains the OpenScape Business
communication software and must be mounted/inserted before starting up the
communication system.

Step by Step
1) Make sure that the write protection of the SDHC card is disabled (switch di-
rected toward metal contacts).
2) Insert the SDHC card into the SDHC slot of the mainboard until it snaps in-
to place. The metal contacts of the SDHC card must point towards the main-
board.

7.8.2 How to Perform a Visual Inspection

Before starting up the communication system, you must perform a visual
inspection of the hardware, cables, and the power supply.

Prerequisites

DANGER:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Disconnect all power supply circuits of the communication system before
starting to perform a visual inspection:
• Disconnect the battery voltage, supply voltage (LUNA2) and line volt-
age.
• Disconnect the line cords of any connected battery pack or any con-
nected batteries.
• Disconnect all power plugs of the communication system.

NOTICE:
Always wear an antistatic wristband when handling boards.
The ESD measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive de-
vices must be observed and followed (see Warnings: Note).

The front and rear plastic covers are not attached to the system boxes.

Step by Step
1) Disconnect all power supply circuits of the communication system.
2) Make sure that the communication system is de-energized.
3) Make sure that the M.2 SSD or SDHC card is correctly inserted. The write
protection of the SDHC card must be disabled (switch directed toward met-
al contacts).
4) Check that all boards are secure.
If requires, verify that the boards involved have been inserted properly (see
How to Insert a Board).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 151
Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

5) Ensure that all connection cables have been correctly laid and secured. Is
there any risk of tripping over a cable, for example?
If required, make sure that the connection cables are properly installed.
6) Check to ensure that the shielding covers are properly installed for unused
board slots or slots that are equipped with peripheral boards that only have
plastic covers.
If required, install the missing shielding covers (see How to Install Shielding
Covers).
7) Verify that the slots for the LUNA2 power supplies and the REALS board
inside the base box are covered by an outer panel.
If necessary, attach the missing outer panel.
8) Verify that the slots for the LUNA2 power supplies and the REALS board
inside the expansion box (if available) are covered by an outer panel.
If necessary, attach the missing outer panel.
9) Check for the presence of shielding panels on the backplane for boards
that do not have connector panels.
If necessary, install the missing shielding panel (see How to Mount Con-
nector or Shielding Panels).
10) Check whether a separate ground wire is connected to the ground terminal
of each system box.
If required, perform the separate grounding of all system boxes (see Pro-
tective Grounding for Standalone Installations and Protective Grounding for
19’’ Rack-mount Installations).
11) Make sure that any main distribution frames and/or patch panels being
used are properly connected to the ground wire.
If required, perform the separate grounding of all main distribution frames
and/or patch panels (see Protective Grounding for Standalone Installations
and Protective Grounding for 19’’ Rack-mount Installations).
12) Check whether the nominal voltage of the mains power supply corresponds
to the nominal voltage of the communication system (type plate).

Next steps
Only for standalone installations: close all system boxes of the communication
system with the plastic covers provided for this purpose (see Only for Stand-
alone Installations: How to Mount the Plastic Covers of a System Box on page
152).

7.8.3 Only for Standalone Installations: How to Mount the Plastic Covers
of a System Box

For standalone installations, all system boxes must be closed with the provided
plastic covers provided for this purpose before starting up the communication
system.

Step by Step
1) Place the pins on the lower edge of a plastic cover into the guide slots on the
front side of the base box.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
152 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Hardware for OpenScape Business X8

2) Press the plastic cover towards the base box until it snaps into place.

3) Repeat steps 1 and 2 to mount the plastic cover on the back of the base box.
4) Repeat steps 1 through 3 to mount the plastic covers for the extension box, if
any.

7.8.4 How to Connect the System to the Mains

Step by Step
Plug the power cord into the socket of the power supply. The communication
system boots up.

NOTICE: Leave the system connected to the mains for at least

2 days so that the mainboard battery is adequately charged. If
the charge state is insufficient, it is possible that repeated boot-
ing of the system could cause the activation period to be blocked
due to time manipulation.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 153
Installing the Linux Server
Prerequisites

8 Installing the Linux Server

For OpenScape Business S and OpenScape Business UC Booster Server, the
OpenScape Business communication software is installed on a Linux operating
system. The communication software can be operated directly on a Linux server
or in a virtual environment with VMware vSphere or Microsoft Hyper-V.

NOTICE: In the following, whenever a description applies to

both OpenScape Business S and the OpenScape Business
Booster UC Server, the generic term OpenScape Business is
used for the sake of simplicity.

Either the regular SLES 12 SP5 64-bit version or an SLES 12 SP5 64-bit ver-
sion optimized by the manufacturer of the server PC must be installed as the
Linux operating system.
These installation instructions describe the initial startup of the Linux server.
This depends on whether or not the Linux server is using a software RAID. The
installation of the OpenScape Business communication software and the sub-
sequent configuration of OpenScape Business are described in the OpenScape
Business Administrator Documentation.
The initial startup of the Linux server described here is based on the English
user interface. The installation and configuration can, of course, also be per-
formed in a different interface language.

8.1 Prerequisites
The prerequisites and general constraints for the operation of OpenScape
Business on the Linux server (the server PC) are described below.

Hardware
The server PC must satisfy the following minimum requirements:
• 64-bit capable
• Equipped for 24/7 operation.
• Certified by the PC manufacturer for SLES 12 SP5 64 bit
• The communication software for OpenScape Business must be the only ap-
plication running (excluding virus scanners)
• At least a dual-core processor with 2.0 GHz per core (for OpenScape Busi-
ness Contact Center or more than 500 users: at least a quad-core processor
with 3.3 GHz per core)
• At least 2 GB RAM (recommended: 4 GB RAM)
The following features require 4 GB RAM:
– Fax as PDF
– More than 500 users
– OpenScape Business Contact Center
– Gate View
– XMPP
• LAN connection with min. 100 Mbps
• DVD drive, keyboard, mouse

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
154 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Linux Server

• Screen resolution: 1024x768 or higher

• The size of the hard disk depends on the number of users:

# Users Hard disk size

Up to 50 users 60 GB or more
Up to 100 users 100 GB or more
Up to 500 users 200 GB or more
OpenScape Business Contact 200 GB or more
Center
More than 500 users 500 GB or more

The installation can be performed even if the minimum requirements are not
satisfied; however, this could result in problems during operation.

Software
To install the Linux operating system on the server PC, the SLES 12 SP5 64-bit
Linux version is required.
When procuring the OpenScape Business communication software, you can
purchase a DVD or .ISO file with this version of Linux. This DVD or .ISO file
may only be used in conjunction with the communication software.
Some PC manufacturers offer their own optimized Linux installation disks for
their server PC models. These can be used if they support the Linux version
SLES 12 SP5 64 bit.
Keep the Linux DVD or .ISO file handy during the installation of the OpenScape
Business communication software, since some software packages (RPM) re-
quired for the communication software may need to installed later from this DVD
or .ISO file.

SLES 12 SP5 64-bit Certification

The server PC must be certified for SLES 12 SP5 64 Bit.
Novell offers PC manufacturers a certification program called "YES" for the cer-
tification of their server PCs. The results can be found on the Internet at:
http://developer.novell.com/yessearch/Search.jsp
If no certification is available, the PC manufacturer must be asked whether the
server PC is compatible with SLES 12 SP5 64 Bit. If any additional hardware
(e.g., a network or graphics card) that is incompatible with SLES 12 SP5 64 Bit
is installed, a suitable driver must be obtained from the card vendor, regardless
of the certification. If no driver is available, the corresponding card must be re-
placed by a model that is compatible with SLES 12 SP5 64 Bit.

Registering with Novell

Although the installation and operation of SLES 12 SP5 64 bit is possible with-
out registering with Novell, registration at Novell is required in order to obtain
security patches and software updates. To do this, you will need to create a cus-
tomer account with Novell with the help of the activation code (see also Updates
on page 174). It is recommended that the customer account be set up before
the Linux installation.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 155
Installing the Linux Server

A Novell Activation Code (registration code) can be procured via the order item
"OpenScape Business SLES Upgrade Key".

Infrastructure
The internal network must satisfy the following conditions:
• LAN with at least 100 Mbps and IPv4
• Uniform time base (e.g., via an NTP server)
• Fixed IP address for the server PC

Internet Access
The server PC must have Internet access for:
• Registering with Novell
• Security patches and general Linux software updates
OpenScape Business requires an Internet connection for:
• OpenScape Business software updates
• OpenScape Business features such as Internet telephony, for example
• Remote Service (SSDP)/RSP.servicelink

Network Configuration
During the Linux installation, you will be prompted for the network configuration
details. Consequently, it is advisable to create an IP address scheme contain-
ing all network components and their IP addresses before the network configu-
ration.
The following is an example of an IP address scheme with the IP address range
192.168.5.x:The parameters shown in bold are the minimum mandatory
specifications required during the Linux installation.

Parameters Sample values

External DHCP server or Linux DHCP server DHCP server of the Internet
router (external)
DHCP address range 192.168.5.50 through
192.168.5.254
Subnet mask of the network or network 255.255.255.0
segment
Fixed IP address of the Linux server 192.168.5.10
This IP address must be outside the DHCP
range.

Internet Router 192.168.5.1

Server with fixed IP address (optional), e.g., e- 192.168.5.20
mail server
Clients with fixed IP address (optional) 192.168.5.1 through
192.168.5.49
This IP address must be outside the DHCP
range.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
156 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Linux Server
Installation in a Virtual Environment

Parameters Sample values

Default Gateway, i.e., the Internet router in 192.168.5.1
the example
DNS Server (i.e., the Internet router in the 192.168.5.1
example)
Domain name when using a DNS server customer.com
(e.g., the Internet domain name
Host name of OpenScape Business comm_server
The name can be freely selected, but should
be coordinated with the network administrator.

If the actual network data is not available at time of installation, the network
should be configured with the data of this sample network.
After the successful installation of Linux, the network data can be edited at any
time with YaST and adapted to the network.
Skipping the network configuration is not recommended, since the subsequent
installation of OpenScape Business cannot be successfully completed without a
fully configured network.

8.2 Installation in a Virtual Environment

The communication software can run in a virtual environment.
To set up a virtual environment, the virtualization software (host operating sys-
tem) must be first installed and configured on the server PC. Linux is then in-
stalled as a guest operating system. Finally, the communication software is in-
stalled within the Linux operating system.
For licensing in a virtual environment, an Advanced Locking ID is generated and
used for the softswitch instead of the MAC address of the server PC.
The following virtualization software has been released:
• Details about VMware vSphere released versions including the latest patch-
es are in the OpenScape Business Release Notes.
For details on the hardware requirements of the physical server PC, refer to
the "VMware Compatibility Guide and the "VMware Management Resource
Guide" at www.vmware.com.
To determine the hardware requirements at the physical server PC, VMware
offers an online search function for certified and tested hardware under "Com-
patibility Guides" on their Internet homepage at http://www.vmware.com/
guides
Disk Provision guidelines can be found at https://
pubs.vmware.com/vsphere-50/index.jsp?top-
ic=%2Fcom.vmware.vsphere.vm_ad-
min.doc_50%2FGUID-81629CAB-72FA-42F0-9F86-F8FD0DE39E57.html

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 157
Installing the Linux Server

• Windows Server (2008 R2, 2012, 2012 R2) Hyper-V, including the latest
patches.
For details in the hardware requirements of the physical server PC, refer to
technet.microsoft.com.
You will find all necessary information about Hyper-V in the section Library ->
Windows Server 2012 R2 (or your current windows server system) -> Server
Roles and Technologies -> Hyper V on the Microsoft technet page.
The description of the installation and configuration of the virtualization software
is not part of this documentation. The installation of Linux and the communica-
tion software in a virtual environment is exactly the same as for a direct installa-
tion on the server PC.
The following minimum requirements must be configured for Linux and the com-
munication software in the virtual environment:

Parameters VM Settings
Guest Operating System SLES 12 SP5 64 Bit
VM HD Capacity Up to 50 users: 60 GB or more
Up to 100 users: 100 GB or more
Up to 500 users: 200 GB or more
OpenScape Business Contact Center: 200
GB or more
As of 500 users: 500 GB or more
Virtual Disk Mode Default
Virtual Disk Format Type Thin Provisioning (dynamic HD Capacity) or
Thick Provisioning (fixed HD Capacity)
vCPUs 2
4 for OpenScape Business Contact Center
or more than 500 users
vCPUs Shares (High/Normal) High
vCPU Reservation 2 GHz
vCPU Limit Unlimited

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
158 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Linux Server

Parameters VM Settings
VM Memory 2 GB
4 GB for:
- Fax as PDF
- OpenScape Business Contact Center
- Gate View
- XMPP
8 GB for:
- More than 500 users
VM Memory Shares (High/ Normal
Normal)
VM Memory Reservation 4 GB
VM Memory Limit Unlimited
Number of vNICs 1
VMware Manual MAC Used NO
Virtual Network Adapter YES, vmxnet3 driver
Support
VMware Tools Installation YES

The VM (Virtual Machine) may utilize the CPU up to 70%; values above that can
result in erratic behavior.
The following VMware vSphere features are supported:
• Thin Provisioning
• High Availability (HA)
• VMotion
• Data Recovery (VDR)
• DRS (Automatic VMotion)
• Storage VMotion
The following VMware vSphere features are not supported:
• Fault tolerance
The following Microsoft Hyper-V features are supported:
• Thin Provisioning
• High Availability (HA)
• Live Migration
• Data Recovery
The screen saver for the virtual environment must be disabled.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 159
Installing the Linux Server

8.2.1 VM Co-Residency and Quality of Service policy

This VM Co-Residency and Quality of Service Policy provides the rules for the
parties responsible for deploying the Unify VMs and managing the virtual envi-
ronment when deploying Unify VMs on consolidated network and hardware re-
sources:
• It is up to the parties responsible for deploying the Unify VMs and manag-
ing the virtual environment to ensure the performance criteria is met. Uncer-
tainty can be reduced by pre-deployment testing, baselining, and following
the rules of Unify VM Configuration and Resource Guide (VM R&C) including
this policy.
• VMs with Unify real time and mission critical applications shall be protected
from other applications in the routing and switching network to ensure voice/
video network traffic get the needed bandwidth and protection from delay
and jitter.
• VMs with Unify real time and mission critical applications shall be protected
from other applications when the virtualization host shares compute, storage,
and network hardware among multiple application virtual machines (e.g. you
cannot schedule Unify real time.
• Adherence to Unify Virtualization and Resource configuration rules (e.g.
physical/virtual hardware sizing, co-residency policy, etc.) is required in or-
der to ensure Unify VMs get the needed CPU, memory, storage capacity and
storage/network performance.
• Unify VMs shall not be hosted on the same HW with third-party VMs that
have incomplete resource requirements defined.
• Host hardware shall be continuously monitored (e.g. by vCenter) and operat-
ed below 80% CPU usage with a %RDY value of 5% max.
• The total amount of RAM, Storage, and NW (including Storage Network)
throughput shall not be exceed the capacity of the Host hardware (no over
subscription).
• Even if the host processor is hyper-threading-capable and HT is enabled, a
physical core shall only be counted once.
• vCPU Shares shall be configured to guarantee mission critical Unify VMs (in-
cluding real time VMs) are never starved for CPU time.
• Customers are responsible to fulfill the requirements, even if the VM is
moved around in the environment, e.g. by manually re-configuring the CPU
shares of a VM if it gets moved to another VM host or resource pool.
• Disaster Recovery plans need to take into account the additional resources
required when failing over to fail over site (datacenter 2).

8.2.2 Time Synchronization of the Guest Operating System Linux

The time synchronization (uniform time base for date and time) between the
host operating system VMware vSphere or Microsoft Hyper-V and the guest

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
160 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Linux Server

operating system Linux must be disabled. The uniform time base should be
obtained by the guest operating system via an NTP server.

8.2.2.1 How to Configure Time Synchronization for the Guest Operating System Linux
in VMWare

Step by Step
1) Right-click in the VMware client vSphere Client on the guest operating sys-
tem Linux and select the menu item Edit Settings.
2) Under the Virtual Machine Properties on the Options tab, disable the op-
tion Synchronize guest time with host under the VMware Tools entry in
the Advanced area.
3) Edit the NTP settings for the guest operating system Linux in the ./etc/
ntp.conf file as follows in accordance with the parameters shown in bold:

************************************************

...

tinker panic 0

# server 127.127.1.0

# local clock (LCL)

# fudge 127.127.1.0 stratum 10

# LCL is unsynchronized

...

server 0.de.pool.ntp.org iburst

restrict 0.de.pool.ntp.org

restrict 127.0.0.1

restrict default kod nomodify notrap

...

************************************************

NOTICE: The NTP server de.pool.ntp.org is an example

and may need to be replaced by an NTP server address that
can be reached by the guest operating system Linux.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 161
Installing the Linux Server
Linux Security Aspects and RAID Array

8.3 Linux Security Aspects and RAID Array

The security of the Linux server can be enhanced by observing all Linux
security aspects and by using a RAID array.

Firewall
When connected to the Internet, a firewall is needed to prevent unauthorized
access from outside. After installing Linux, the Linux firewall is enabled. The in-
staller of the communication software adjusts the firewall settings so that the
communication software can be operated properly. The ports for the communi-
cation software are opened, and all other ports are closed. All communication
software services, except for CSTA (CSTA interface) and SSH (Secure Shell),
are released.
If an external firewall is used in the network, the Linux firewall must be disabled,
and the addresses and ports required for the communication software must be
opened (see "Ports Used" Used Ports on page 272 in the installation instruc-
tions for OpenScape Business S or OpenScape Business UC Booster Server).

NOTICE: Firewall settings for WAN Adapter in OpenScape

Business S must be handled manually by the administrator of
the Linux PC.

Virus Scanners
A virus scanner is not included in the Linux installation package. It is recom-
mended to install a virus scanner. You can get more information from the Re-
lease Notes of the communication software if required.
In order to prevent potential performance problems resulting from the use of a
virus scanner, the regular disk scans should be scheduled for times when the
communication software is not being used or is only used at a minimum.

Intrusion Detection System (AppsAmor)

The installation routine of the application server does not make any changes to
the Linux Intrusion Detection System (AppsArmor). The default settings of the
Linux installation are used. No further settings are required for the operation of
the communication software.
During the installation of the softswitch, the integrated intrusion detection sys-
tem (AppsArmor) is updated and activated. No further settings are required for
the operation of the communication software.

Redundancy
Recommendations for Improving Reliability (Redundancy):
• Two hard disks in a RAID 1 array.
• Second power supply for the Linux server
• Uninterruptible power supply
When using IP phones, the LAN switches and IP phones should also be con-
nected to an uninterruptible power supply.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
162 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Linux Server
Initial Startup without a Software RAID

RAID1 Array
In a RAID1 array, the contents of the first hard drive are mirrored on the second
hard drive. If one hard drive fails, the system continues to run on the second
hard drive.
A RAID array may be set up as a software RAID or hardware RAID (BIOS RAID
or hardware RAID controller).
For specific details on performing an installation with a software RAID, see Ini-
tial Startup with a Software RAID on page 167.
A hardware RAID frequently requires a separate driver that is not included in
the Linux operating system. This driver is usually provided by the PC manufac-
turer and must be installed according to manufacturer's instructions. If the driver
is not compatible with the Linux version or if no Linux driver is offered, the hard-
ware RAID cannot be used. The description of hardware-based RAID systems
is not part of this documentation. In such cases, please contact the manufactur-
er for the appropriate Linux drivers and configuration details.

8.4 Initial Startup without a Software RAID

The initial startup of the Linux server without a software RAID includes the Linux
installation and configuration, while taking into account that no software RAID is
being used.
The required settings for the communication software are made during the in-
stallation and configuration.

Linux Partitions
The hard drive must be partitioned during the initial start-up as follows:

Partition Type Size File sys- Mount Note

tem

Partition Primary 2 GB Swap swap corresponds to the

1 Partition size of the working
memory

Partition Primary 15 GB Ext3 / for the Linux oper-

2 Partition ating system

Partition Primary Rest

1 Ext3 /home For the communi-
3 Partition cation software

NOTICE: The installation routine of the communication software

checks these partition sizes and may reject the installation.

NOTICE: Some server PCs require an additional boot partition.

If Linux suggests a boot partition, it should be accepted in the
proposed size.

1 Up to 50 users: min. 40 GB - Up to 100 users: min. 80 GB - More than 500 users: min. 180 GB - With
OpenScape Business Contact Center: min. 180 GB - More than 500 users: min. 480 GB

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 163
Installing the Linux Server

8.4.1 How to Install and Configure SLES 12 SP5 without a Software RAID
Prerequisites
The BIOS setup of the Linux server is set so that the server will boot from the
DVD or .ISO file on USB stick.
To register with Novell, Internet access and the activation code are required.

Step by Step
1) Insert the SLES 12 DVD into the DVD drive or .ISO file on USB stick in a
USB port and boot up the system from the DVD or .ISO file. The Startup
window of the Linux installation appears.
2) Press the F3 key and select an appropriate screen resolution (e.g., 1280 x
1024).
3) Select the menu item Installation and confirm this by pressing the Enter
key.
4) In the Language, Keyboard and License Agreement window, select the
country settings for the Linux operating system:
a) Select English (US) as the user interface language in the Language
drop-down list.
b) Select the keyboard layout for the desired country from the Keyboard
Layout drop-down list.
5) Read through the license agreement and accept the license terms by en-
abling the check box I Agree to the License Terms. Then click Next.
6) On the Network Settings window, configure the network card.
a) Select the desired network card in the Overview window. The MAC ad-
dress of the network card selected here is assigned later in the licensing
process to the individual licenses. Click on Edit.
b) Enable the radio button Statically assigned IP Address.
c) Under IP Address, enter the assigned IP address of the Linux server
(for example, 192.168.5.10).
The IP address must conform to the IP address scheme of your internal
network and must not have been assigned to any network client, since
this would otherwise result in an IP address conflict.
d) Under Subnet Mask, enter the assigned subnet mask of the Linux serv-
er (for example, 255.255.255.0).
The subnet mask must match the IP address scheme of your internal
network.
e) Then click Next.
7) Specify the DNS server and the default gateway.
a) In the Network Settings window, click on the Host name/DNS tab.
b) Enter the IP address of the DNS server under Name Server 1.
If no DNS server is available in the internal network, enter the IP ad-
dress of the Internet router (for example, 192.168.5.1).
c) In the Network Settings window, click on the Routing tab.
d) Under Default Gateway, enter the IP address of the Internet router (for
example, 192.168.5.1).
8) Click on Next.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
164 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Linux Server

9) In the Registration window, select Register System via scc.suse.com,

enter you email address and registration code and click Next.

INFO: If you skip registration, you will not be able to have

access to the update repositories. You can register after the
installation or visit customer service.

10) In the Add On Product window, click on Next.

11) In the System Role window, selecte Default System and click on Next.
12) In the Suggested Partitioning window, select Expert Partitioner...
13) Delete all preassigned partitions (sda1, sda2, etc.)
Right click on each partition, select Delete and confirm the delete operation
by clicking on Yes.
14) Create a swap partition.
a) Click on device /dev/sda and select Add Partition.
b) Activate the Primary Partition radio button and click Next.
c) Under Custom Size, enter the size of the swap partition and click Next.
As a rule, the swap partition corresponds to the size of the working
memory. For example, with 4GB RAM, the swap partition should be set
to 4 GB with the entry 4GB.
d) In Add Partition on /dev/sda window, select the Swap role and click
Finish
15) Create the partition for the Linux operating system.
a) Click on device /dev/sda and select Add Partition.
b) Activate the Primary Partition radio button and click Next.
c) Under Custom Size, enter the partition size (for example, if 15 GB are
sufficient enter 15GB) and click Next
d) In Add Partition on /dev/sda window, select the Operating System
role and click Next.
e) Select Ext4 under Format partition, select / in Mount Partition and
click Finish.
16) Create the partition for the communication software.
a) Click on device /dev/sda and select Add Partition.
b) Activate the Primary Partition radio button.
c) Under Custom Size, select maximum size and click Next.
d) In Add Partition on /dev/sda window, select the Data and ISV Appli-
cations role and click Next.
e) Select Ext3 in Format partition, select /home in Mount partition, click
Finish and Accept.
17) In the Suggested Partitioning window, click Next.
18) In the Clock and Time Zone window, select the correct region and time
zone.
Adjust the date and time, if needed, by clicking the Other Settings button,
and click Next when finished.
19) In the Local Users window, add a user and password and click Next.
20) In the Password for the System Administrator "root" window, enter the
password for the system administrator with the "root" profile and click Next.
The password should comply with conventional security policies. It must
have at least 8 character, at least one lowercase letter, at least one upper-
case letter, at least one number and at least one special character.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 165
Installing the Linux Server

21) In the Installation Settings window, click Install, and confirm the installa-
tion by clicking Install again.
The Installation Settings window is an overview of the components that
are going to be installed. Before completing the installation, you can make
any necessary changes here.

After the installation routine has finished, the computer is rebooted into the
installed system. Remove the DVD from the DVD drive.

Next steps
Configure an NTP server (for a uniform time base).

8.4.2 How to upgrade from SLES 11 to SLES 12 SP5

Prerequisites
OpenScape Business on SLES 11 SP4

NOTICE: In case an older version is used, an upgrade to SLES

11 SP4 is needed first.

This chapter describes the upgrade of a full operational OpenScape Business

system installed on SLES 11 SP 4 to SLES 12 SP5, with parallel upgrade of
OpenScape Business version.

IMPORTANT: During migration from SLES 11 SP4 to SLES 12

SP5, it is recommended to make a clean/fresh installation in-
stead of the Upgrade mechanism, although it is given as an op-
tion.
With fresh installation, you will still be able to restore your exist-
ing OpenScape Business Backup from previous version in the
new installed systems based on SLES 12.
It is observed that Upgrade mechanism may cause problems
to some settings of Linux which may be critical for OpenScape
Business functionality.
In case of Virtual Machine usage (e.g. ESXi), it is recommend-
ed to create a new VM and don’t use the VM used as SLES
11 SP4. Otherwise, additional problems may exist when Host
OS (e.g. ESCi) will complain about the installed Linux version
of guest (VM is initially created for SLES 11 and now it will run
SLES 12).
In clean/fresh install option in VM, the ALI (Locking ID) of system
will be changed and a rehost of old license is mandatory.

Step by Step
1) Back up all OpenScape Business Server or UC Booster Server data.
Follow the instructions on How to Perform a Data Backup

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
166 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Linux Server
Initial Startup with a Software RAID

2) Uninstall OpenScape Business Server or UC Booster Server.

Follow the instruction on How to Uninstall the Communication Software
3) Insert the SLES 12 SP5 installation DVD and boot.
4) Select Upgrade.

NOTICE: Installation of package libpango-1_0-0-32bit will

prompt that has failed during the upgrade. You can ignore
this message. Installation will continue successfully.

5) After system upgrade to SLES 12 SP5 is completed, install OpenScape

Business Server DVD version that supports SLES 12 SP5.

NOTICE: Use the same partitioning as in SLES 11 SP4. Also

the file system needs to be the same for SLES 11 and SLES
12, otherwise the backup cannot be imported anymore.

6) Restore all OpenScape Business Server data.

8.4.3 How to upgrade from SLES 12 SP3 to SLES 12 SP5

This chapter describes the upgrade of a full operational OpenScape Business

system installed on SLES 12 SP3 to SLES 12 SP5. This upgrade can be done
without the need to reinstall OpenScape Business sytem.

Step by Step
1) Upgrade SLES 12 SP3 to SLES 12 SP4, following Novell's instructions.
2) Upgrade SLES 12 SP4 to SLES 12 SP5, following Novell's instructions.

Although upgrade to SLES 12 SP5 from SLES 12 SP3 is supported without

reinstallation of OpenScape Business system, the upgrade process must go
through SLES 12 SP4 first. Novell doesn't support upgrade directly from SP3 to
SP5.

8.5 Initial Startup with a Software RAID

The initial startup of the Linux server with a software RAID includes the Linux
installation and configuration, while taking into account that a software RAID is
being used.
Proceed as follows:
1) Disable the BIOS RAID (optional)
If a RAID array is to be set up via a software RAID, any integrated RAID
BIOS that may be present on the motherboard of the server PC must be first
disabled in the BIOS.
2) Install and configure SLES 12 SP5 with a software RAID
The required settings for the communication software are made during the
installation and configuration.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 167
Installing the Linux Server

Linux Partitions
The hard drive must be partitioned during the initial start-up as follows:

Partition Type Size File sys- Mount Note

tem

Partition Primary 2 GB Swap swap corresponds to the

1 Partition size of the working
memory

Partition Primary 15 GB Ext4 No for the Linux oper-

2 Partition mount ating system
point

Partition Primary Rest

2 Ext3 No For the communi-
3 Partition mount cation software
point

The mount points are assigned after the partitioning when setting up the RAID
system.

NOTICE: The installation routine of the communication software

checks these partition sizes and may reject the installation.

NOTICE: Some server PCs require an additional boot partition.

If Linux suggests a boot partition during the installation, it should
be accepted in the proposed size.

8.5.1 How to Deactivate the BIOS RAID

Prerequisites
An integrated RAID controller (BIOS RAID) is available on the motherboard of
the PC.

Step by Step
1) Restart the PC. During the startup, you will see whether the BIOS RAID has
been enabled. If the BIOS RAID is not enabled, skip to step 3.
2) Disable the active BIOS RAID:
a) Press the appropriate key combination at the right time during the startup
to enter BIOS RAID setup. The combination will be shown to you during
the startup (e.g., CTRL M for LSI MegaRAID BIOS).
b) Clear the BIOS RAID configuration. Example for LSI MegaRAID BIOS:
Management Menu > Configure > Configuration Menu > Clear Configura-
tion.
c) Exit the setup of the BIOS RAID and restart the PC.

2 Up to 50 users: min. 40 GB - Up to 100 users: min. 80 GB - More than 500 users: min. 180 GB - With
OpenScape Business Contact Center: min. 180 GB - More than 500 users: min. 480 GB

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
168 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Linux Server

3) Disable the SATA RAID configuration in the BIOS setup of the PC:
a) Press the appropriate key (e.g., F2 or Del) at the right time during the
startup to enter BIOS setup of the PC.
b) Disable the SATA RAID. Example for a Phoenix BIOS: Advanced > Ad-
vanced System Configuration > SATA RAID Disabled.
c) Save your changes and exit the BIOS setup of your PC (with the F10 key,
for example).
4) Restart the PC.

Next steps
Install and configure SLES 12 with a software RAID

8.5.2 How to Install and Configure SLES 12 SP5 with a Software RAID
Prerequisites
Any possibly existing hardware RAID is disabled.
The BIOS setup of the Linux server is set so that the server will boot from the
DVD or .ISO file.
To register with Novell, Internet access and the activation code are required.

Step by Step
1) Insert the SLES 12 DVD into the DVD drive or .ISO file on USB stick in a
USB port and boot up the system from the DVD or .ISO file. The Startup
window of the Linux installation appears.
2) Press the F3 key and select an appropriate screen resolution (for example,
1280 x 1024).
3) Select the menu item Installation and confirm this by pressing the Enter
key.
4) In the Language, Keyboard and License Agreement window, select the
country settings for the Linux operating system:
a) Select English (US) as the user interface language in the Language
drop-down list.
b) Select the keyboard layout for the desired country from the Keyboard
Layout drop-down list.
5) Read through the license agreement and accept the license terms by en-
abling the check box I Agree to the License Terms. Then click Next.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 169
Installing the Linux Server

6) On the Network Settings window, configure the network card.

a) Select the desired network card in the Overview window. The MAC ad-
dress of the network card selected here is assigned later in the licensing
process to the individual licenses. Click on Edit.
b) Enable the radio button Statically assigned IP Address.
c) Under IP Address, enter the assigned IP address of the Linux server
(for example, 192.168.5.10 ).
The IP address must conform to the IP address scheme of your internal
network and must not have been assigned to any network client, since
this would otherwise result in an IP address conflict.
d) Under Subnet Mask, enter the assigned subnet mask of the Linux serv-
er (for example, 255.255.255.0).
The subnet mask must match the IP address scheme of your internal
network.
e) Then click Next.
7) Specify the DNS server and the default gateway.
a) In the Network Settings window, click on the Host name/DNS tab.
b) Enter the IP address of the DNS server under Name Server 1.
If no DNS server is available in the internal network, enter the IP ad-
dress of the Internet router (for example, 192.168.5.1).
c) In the Network Settings window, click on the Routing tab.
d) Under Default Gateway, enter the IP address of the Internet router (for
example, 192.168.5.1).
8) Click on Next.
9) In the Registration window, select Register System via scc.suse.com,
enter you email address and registration code and click Next.

INFO: If you skip registration, you will not be able to have

access to the update repositories. You can register after the
installation or visit customer service.

10) In the Add On Product window, click on Next.

11) In the System Role window, selecte Default System and click on Next.
12) In the Suggested Partitioning window, select Expert Partitioner...

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
170 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Linux Server

13) Partition the two hard disks:

a) Navigate in the System View menu tree to Hard Disks > sda (first hard
disk of the software RAID).
b) Delete all preassigned partitions (sda1, sda2, etc.) by marking the par-
tition, clicking on Delete, and then confirming the Delete operation with
Yes.
c) Partition the first hard disk by using the Add Partition button.
Use the following data for the partitioning:

Partition 1 Primary Partition 2 GB Role: Swap

Format Swap
Mount Point = swap,
fstab Option = Device
name
Partition 2 Primary Partition 0.5 GB Role: Operating System
Format Ext4
Mount Point = /boot

NOTICE:
This parti-
tion must
be created
only in the
first drive.

Partition 3 Primary Partition 15 GB Role: Operating System

Format Ext4
no Mount Point

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 171
Installing the Linux Server

Partition 4 Primary Partition Rest Role: Data and ISV Appli-

cations
Format Ext4
no Mount Point
d) Navigate in the System View menu tree to Hard Disks > sdb (second
hard disk of the software RAID).
e) Complete steps 13.b on page 171 and 13.c on page 171 for the sec-
ond hard disk as well.

NOTICE: No boot partition needs to be created in the

second hard drive.

14) Specify the software RAID settings:

a) Select the menu item RAID and click on Add RAID.
b) Select RAID 1 (Mirroring).
c) Select the two partitions sda3 and sdb2 in the Available Devices area
on the left and transfer them with Add to the Selected Devices area on
the right.
d) Click on Next.
e) Confirm the default value for the Chunk Size with Next.
f) In the next window select Operating System and click Next.
g) In the next window, select Ext4 as format and the mount point "/" for the
first RAID device (/dev/md0) and click Finish.
h) Then click on Add Raid again.
i) Select RAID 1 (Mirroring).
j) Select the two partitions sda4 and sdb3 in the Available Devices area
on the left and transfer them with Add to the Selected Devices area on
the right.
k) Click on Next.
l) Confirm the default value for the Chunk Size with Next.
m) In the next window, select Data and ISV Applications and click Next.
n) In the next window, select Ext4 as format and the mount point "/home"
for the second RAID device (/dev/md1) and click Finish.
15) Click on Accept and Next.
The partitioning data is saved; the actual partitioning of the hard disk oc-
curs later.
16) In the Clock and Time Zone window, select the correct region and time
zone.
Adjust the date and time, if needed, by clicking the Other Settings button,
and click Next when finished.
17) In the Local Users window, add a user and password and click Next.
18) In the Password for the System Administrator "root" window, enter the
password for the system administrator with the "root" profile and click Next.
The password should comply with conventional security policies. It must
have at least 8 character, at least one lowercase letter, at least one upper-
case letter, at least one number and at least one special character.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
172 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Linux Server
Configuring a Uniform Time Base

19) In the Installation Settings window, click Install, and confirm the installa-
tion by clicking Install again.
The Installation Settings window is an overview of the components that
are going to be installed. Before completing the installation, you can make
any necessary changes here.

After the installation routine has finished, the computer is rebooted into the
installed system. Remove the DVD from the DVD drive.

Next steps
Configure an NTP server (for a uniform time base).

8.6 Configuring a Uniform Time Base

The communication system and IP stations (IP phones, client PCs) should have
a uniform time base (date and time). This time base is provided by an SNTP
server.
The following variants are possible as a time base:
• SNTP server on the internal network (recommended)
If possible, an existing SNTP server on the internal network should be used.
If this is the case, the IP address, URL or DNS name of the SNTP server is
required.
• SNTP Server on the Internet
If Internet access is available and set up, an SNTP server from the Internet
can also be used. In this case, the URL or DNS name of the SNTP server is
required.
• OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 as an SNTP server
Alternatively, the OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 communication system
can be used as an SNTP server. This requires the OpenScape Business X3/
X5/X8 to be connected to the Central Office via ISDN lines and the system
time to be obtained from the CO. In this case, OpenScape Business X3/X5/
X8 must be first set up for use as an SNTP server (see the Administrator
Documentation), and the IP address of the OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8
must then be entered in Linux as an SNTP server.
The IP phones receive the date & time automatically from the OpenScape Busi-
ness S softswitch or, in the case of the OpenScape Business UC Booster Serv-
er, from the OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 communication system. The date
and time on the client PCs on which the OpenScape Business communica-
tions clients are installed must be synchronized with the OpenScape Business
S softswitch or the OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 communication system (see
the operating system instructions of the client PCs for details).

8.6.1 How to Configure an SNTP Server

Step by Step
1) Click on Applications in the task bar.
2) In the menu tree, click on Tools > YaST.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 173
Installing the Linux Server
Updates

3) Enter the password for the root user and click Continue. The YaST2 Con-
trol Center is opened.
4) Click System in the menu tree.
5) In the System area, click on Date and Time.
6) Click Change.
7) Activate the Synchronize with NTP Server option.
8) Specify an NTP server:
• SNTP server on the internal network (recommended)
Enter the IP address, URL or DNS name of the SNTP server directly in-
to the list box.
• SNTP Server on the Internet
Select the desired SNTP server from the NTP Server Address list or
enter the URL or DNS name of the SNTP server directly into the list
box.
• OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 as SNTP server (only for OpenS-
cape Business UC Booster Server)
Enter the IP address of the OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 communi-
cation system directly in the list box.
9) Select the Save NTP configuration check box.
10) Click Configure.
11) Activate the Now and On Boot option.
12) Click OK followed by Accept.
13) Close the window with OK.
14) Close the YaST2Control Center.

8.7 Updates
To receive updates, it is necessary to register directly with Novell.
The installation and operation of the commercial SLES 12 SP5 64 Bit version is
possible without registration. However, it is still important to register with Novell
in order to obtain security patches and software updates.
A Novell Activation Code (registration code) can be procured via the order item
"OpenScape Business SLES Upgrade Key". When ordering, you will receive a
LAC (License Activation Key). Using this LAC, you can download the activation
code at the CLS (Central License Server), with which you can then create an
account with Novell. It is recommended that the customer account be set up be-
fore the Linux installation.
The following update variants are possible: Registering with Novell is a prereq-
uisite.
• Updates during the Linux installation (recommended)
During the Linux installation, updates and patches can be downloaded online
from the Novell Download Server.
Exception: Service Packs may not be installed.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
174 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Installing the Linux Server

• Updates after installing Linux and before installing the communication

software
After the Linux installation, updates and patches can be downloaded man-
ually from the Novell Download Server using YaST (Software - Online Up-
dates).
Exception: Service Packs may not be installed.
• Updates after installing the communication software
After the installation of the communication software, updates and patches
can be downloaded automatically from the Novell Download Server. When
performing these updates, any updates and patches that require a reboot
of the Linux server (interactive updates) must be skipped. After every 2 or 3
update processes, it is recommended that a manual be started so that the
skipped, interactive updates are also installed.
The corresponding settings are made using YaST (Software - Online Up-
dates).
Deviations from the previously mentioned variants are possible and are de-
scribed in the Release Notice of the communication software.

8.7.1 How to Enable Automatic Online Updates

Step by Step
1) Click on Computer in the task bar.
2) In the menu tree, click on System > YaST.
3) Enter the password for the root user and click Continue. The YaST2 Control
Center is opened.
4) Click on Software in the menu tree.
5) Click on Online Update Configuration.
6) Enable the Automatic Online Update check box and then select daily,
weekly or monthly as the interval.
7) Select the Skip Interactive Patches check box.
8) Click Finish.
9) Close the YaST2Control Center.

8.7.2 How to Enable Online Updates Manually

Step by Step
1) Click on Computer in the task bar.
2) In the menu tree, click on System > YaST.
3) Enter the password for the root user and click Continue. The YaST2 Control
Center is opened.
4) Click on Software in the menu tree.
5) Click on Online Update You will see a list of the available patches (Need-
ed Patches) that are required. If you already have all the latest patches in-
stalled, this list will be empty.
6) Click on Accept to start the manual online update. The window will close au-
tomatically after the update.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 175
Installing the Linux Server
Server Software Backup and Restore

7) Close the YaST2Control Center.

8.8 Server Software Backup and Restore

It is essential to back up the Linux operating system so it can be restored in an
emergency.
After the initial startup and before each manual update, it is strongly recom-
mended that an appropriate tool be used to create a full backup of the server
PC and the affected partitions. If a fatal error occurs after an update, for exam-
ple, the server PC would to be completely restored.
In a virtual environment, the entire virtual machine is to be copied.
If the entire server PC is backed up, the data of the communication software will
be included in this backup. If only the operating system is backed up, the data
of the communication software will also need to be backed up cyclically.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
176 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X
Prerequisites for the Initial installation

9 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

This chapter describes the initial setup of OpenScape Business X. The
communication system and its components are integrated into an existing
infrastructure consisting of a customer LAN and a TDM telephony network.
Internet access and the trunk connection are set up and the connected stations
are configured.

The initial setup of OpenScape Business X (i.e., the communication system) is

carried out using the OpenScape Business Assistant administration program
(web-based management, also called WBM).
The standard initial setup of commonly used components is described here.
The specific installation steps depend on the communication system and the
components (e.g., the UC Booster Card) involved. During the initial setup, you
may need to choose between multiple options in some places or even skip
some configurations entirely. It is also possible that the installation steps de-
scribed here do not appear in your communication system.
The detailed configurations of features not covered by the standard initial setup
are described in subsequent chapters.
The initial setup requires the creation of an IP address scheme and a dial plan.

The most important installation steps are as follows:

• IP addresses and DHCP settings
• Country and Time Settings
• System Phone Numbers and Networking
• ISDN Configuration
• Internet access
• Internet telephony
• Station configuration
• Licensing
• Data backup

9.1 Prerequisites for the Initial installation

Meeting the prerequisites for the initial installation ensures the proper operation
of the communication system.

General
Depending on the existing hardware (boards, phones, ...) and infrastructure, the
following general conditions apply:
• The infrastructure (LAN, TDM telephony network) is available and usable.
• The hardware is installed and connected properly.
• One LAN port each is required to integrate the mainboard and the UC Boost-
er Card in the customer LAN.
• The communication system has not yet been connected to the LAN.
• If the UC Booster Card is used, it should be inserted prior to the initial instal-
lation. Installation of Booster card is described in the Service Guide.
• Internet access is available through an Internet Service Provider, LAN with
rooter or WAN connection.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 177
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X
Components

• An ISDN S0 or ISDN Primary Rate Interface is required for using ISDN out-
side lines.
• A CAS trunk connection is required for using a CAS outside line.
• An analog trunk connection is required for using an analog outside line.
• An IP address scheme exists and is known (see IP Address Scheme).
• A dial plan (also called a numbering plan) is present and known (see Dial
Plan).

Admin PC
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for the Administration PC (Admin
PC) that is used for initially setting up the system and for the subsequent admin-
istration of the communication system:
• Network interface:
The admin PC requires an available LAN port.
• Operating system:
WBM configuration is browser-based and platform-independent.
• Web browser:
The following web browsers are supported:
– Microsoft Internet Explorer
– Microsoft Edge
– Mozilla Firefox
– Google Chrome
For the supported browser versions, see Software release notes.
If an older version of the Web browser is installed, you will need to install an
up-to-date version before you can start setting up the system.
• Java:
At least Oracle Java 8 or higher or alternatively OpenJDK 8 must be in-
stalled. If an older version is installed, you will need to update it to the latest
version before you can start setting up the system.

9.2 Components
The various components of the installation example are described and outlined
below. The initial Setup is described based on an installation example.
The installation example includes the following components:
OpenScape Business X The communication system is
integrated in the existing customer
LAN via the LAN interface.
Admin PC The admin PC is also connected to
the communication system via a LAN
interface.
IP stations (IP clients) The IP stations (IP system phones,
client PCs, WLAN Access Points, etc.)
are integrated in the LAN via one or
more switches.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
178 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

UP0 stations UP0 stations (e.g., OpenStage

60 T TDM system telephones)
are connected directly to the
communication system.
Analog stations Analog stations (e.g., analog fax
devices) are connected directly to the
communication system.
DECT stations DECT stations are logged on to the
communication system via a base
station.

The IP clients receive their IP addresses dynamically from an internal or exter-

nal DHCP server (e.g., an Internet router).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 179
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X
Dial Plan

9.3 Dial Plan

A dial plan is a list of all phone numbers available in the communication system.
It includes, among other things, the internal call numbers, DID numbers and
group call numbers.

Default Dial Plan

The internal call numbers are preassigned default values. These values can be
adapted to suit individual requirements as needed (e.g., to create individual dial
plans).
Extract from the default dial plan:

Type of call numbers X1 X3/X5/X8

Internal station numbers 11-30 100-742

User direct inward dialing numbers 11-30 100-742

Trunk station number 700-703 from 7801 on-

ward

Seizure codes (external codes):

0 = World / 9 = 0 = World / 9 =
Trk. Grp 1 (trunk: ISDN, analog) USA USA
Rte. 8 (UC Suite) - 851
Trk. Grp 12-15 (trunk: ITSP) not preset 855-858
Rte. 16 (Networking) not preset 859
Call number for remote access not preset not preset

Call number for voicemail

351 351
UC Smart
- not preset
UC Suite

Individual Dial Plan

An individual dial plan can be imported via an XML file during basic configura-
tion.
The XML file contains several tabs. Besides the names and phone numbers of
subscribers, the "Customer" tab also includes additional subscriber data such
as the subscriber types and e-mail addresses of the subscribers.
A sample XML file with the appropriate explanations can be found in the WBM
under Service Center > Documents > CSV Templates. You can also use the
XML file stored there as a template for your data. It can be edited with Microsoft
Excel, for example.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
180 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X
IP Address Scheme

9.4 IP Address Scheme

An IP address scheme is a definition of how the IP addresses are used in the
customer LAN. It includes the IP addresses of PCs, servers, Internet routers, IP
phones, the communication system, etc.

To provide a better overview of the assignment of IP addresses, an IP address

scheme should be created.
Example of an IP address scheme with the IP address range 192.168.1." -
x:

IP address range Clients

192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.19 Clients with a fixed IP address:
192.168.1.1 Internet router (gateway)
192.168.1.2 Communication system
192.168.1.3 Application Board (optional)
192.168.1.10 E-mail server
192.168.1.50 to 192.168.1.254 Client PCs & IP phones, also the IP
address range of the DHCP server; IP
addresses are assigned automatically
to the clients

The following IP address ranges are internally reserved and must not be used:

Connected IP address ranges Description

10.0.0.1; 10.0.0.2 Reserved for the license server
10.186.237.65; 10.186.237.66 Reserved for remote ISDN
192.168.3.2 Internal IP address of the
communication system
192.168.2.1 IP address of the LAN3 port (Admin
port)

This list can also be found in the WBM under Service Center > Diagnostics >
Status > Overview of IP Addresses.

Expanding the netmask when using the default network segment

Both the internal IP address of the communication system and the IP address of
the LAN3 port (Admin port) must not be in the same network segment as the IP
address of the communication system.
Default network segment configuration:
• 192.168.1.2: IP address of the communication system
• 255.255.255.0: Netmask
• 192.168.3.2: Internal IP address of the communication system
• 192.168.2.1: IP address of the LAN3 port (Admin port)
If the netmask when using the default network segment of 255.255.255.0 was
expanded to 255.255.0.0, for example, then the above IP addresses need to be
changed:

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 181
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X
Initial Startup

Example of a modified configuration:

• 192.168.1.2: IP address of the communication system
• 255.255.0.0: Netmask
• 192.169.3.2: Internal IP address of the communication system
The change is made via Expert mode > Telephony > Payload > HW Mod-
ules > Edit DSP Settings
• 192.170.2.1: IP address of the LAN3 port (Admin port)
The change is made via Expert mode > Telephony > Network Interfaces >
Mainboard > LAN 3 (Admin)

9.5 Initial Startup

Initial startup includes starting up the communication system, connecting and
configuring the admin PC and starting the OpenScape Business Assistant
(WBM) administration program for the first time. The Admin PC should be
connected to the ADMIN ports with IP address 192.168.2.1 for the Initial Setup,
to avoid address conflicts.
The initial startup of the communication system must be performed prior to in-
tegrating the communication system into the internal LAN. Problems can occur
if the pre-configured IP address of the communication system already exists in
the internal LAN and/or if a DHCP server is already in use. In such cases, the
IP address of the communication system must first be reconfigured and/or the
DHCP server of the communication system must be deactivated. Only then can
the communication system be integrated into the internal LAN.

NOTICE: Prior to initial startup, please follow the instructions on

data protection and data security.

DANGER: OpenScape Business X8 may only be powered up if all sys-

tem boxes are sealed at the rear with the connection and filler panels
provided.

DANGER: OpenScape Business X3/X5 must not be powered on unless

the housing front is closed. Always use dummy panels (C39165-A7027-
B115) to cover slots that are not equipped with boards.

DANGER: The OpenScape Business X1/X3W/X5W must only be

switched on when the housing is closed.

Connecting the admin PC

To configure the communication system, the admin PC is directly connected to
the "LAN" interface of the communication system. The communication system
is then configured to obtain its IP address from the internal DHCP server of the
communication system. After successful installation, the admin PC can be inte-
grated into the internal LAN without any further configuration changes.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
182 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

9.5.1 How to Start the Communication System

Prerequisites
The hardware was correctly installed (see OpenScape Business Installation
Guide).
The memory card (with the system software) was inserted.
The communication system has not been integrated into the customer LAN yet.

Step by Step
Connect the communication system to the power supply. OpenScape Business
does not provide a power on/off switch.

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Make sure that the communication system (and for OpenScape Busi-
ness X8, each system box) is grounded by a separate ground wire (see
OpenScape Business Installation Guide).

The communication system is now started up, During this process, the system
LEDs light up in different colors and sequences (see the OpenScape Business
Service Guide for details). During startup, the communication system must not
be disconnected from the power supply.
After completion of the startup, the "Run" LED on the mainboard flashes green
at 1Hz (0.5 sec on / 0.5 sec off).

9.5.2 How to Connect the Admin PC to the Communication System

Prerequisites
The communication system is ready for use.
Use the ADMIN port for first integration into LAN.
IP addresses in the LAN are known.
IP address of the communication system in the LAN in known.

Step by Step
1) Start the admin PC.
2) Check whether a dynamic IP address can be assigned to the PC. If not, you
will have to reconfigure the admin PC. To do this you must have Administra-
tor rights.

NOTICE: The IP settings described here apply to Windows

7. For more detailed information on the configuration for other

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 183
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Windows operating systems, please refer to the appropriate

operating system instructions.

a) Select Start > Control Panel, double-click on Network and Internet and
then click Network and Sharing Center.
b) Click on LAN connection for the appropriate active network and then
click Properties.
c) On the Networking tab, use the left mouse button to select the Internet
Protocol Version 4(TCP/IPv4) entry and then click on Properties.
d) Click on the General and ensure that the radio button Obtain an IP ad-
dress automatically is enabled. If it is not, then activate it.
e) Close all open windows with OK.
3) Connect the just configured LAN port of the admin PC to the LAN port "LAN"
of the communication system using a LAN cable. The admin PC is assigned
a dynamic IP address via this interface.

NOTICE: You can also connect the admin PC to the LAN

port "Admin" of the communication system, but you will then
need to assign a fixed IP address in the range 192.168.2.xxx
(e.g., 192.168.2.40) and the network mask 255.255.255.0
to the admin PC. The communication system has the IP ad-
dress 192.168.2.1 via the LAN port "Admin" - important for
WBM access!

9.5.3 How to Start the WBM

Prerequisites
The communication system is ready for use. The "Run" LED on the mainboard
flashes green at 1Hz (0.5 sec on / 0.5 sec off).
The admin PC and the communication system can communicate with one an-
other over the LAN.

Step by Step
1) Start the web browser on the admin PC and open the login page of the
OpenScape Business Assistant (WBM) at the following address:
https://192.168.1.2

NOTICE: If the WBM cannot be started, check the LAN con-

nection and repeat the call. If it still cannot be started, check
whether the IP address has been blocked by your PC's in-
ternal firewall. More detailed information can be found in the
documentation of your firewall

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
184 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

2) If the browser reports a problem with a security certificate, install the certifi-
cate (using the example of Internet Explorer V10).
a) Close the web browser.
b) Open the web browser with administrator rights by clicking the right
mouse button on the web browser icon and selecting the menu item Run
as administrator from the context menu.
c) Allow the User Account Control.
d) Open the login page of the OpenScape Business Assistant (WBM) at the
following address:
https://192.168.1.2
e) Click on Continue to this website.
f) Click on the message Certificate Error in the navigation bar of the web
browser.
g) Click on View Certificates.
h) Click on Install Certificate (only visible with administrator rights).
i) Select the option Local Computer and confirm with Next.
j) Select the option Place all certificates in the following store, click
Browse and specify Trusted Root Certification Authorities.
k) Confirm with OK and then with Next and Finish.
l) Confirm the certificate import with OK and close the certificate window
OK.
m) Close the web browser.
n) Start the web browser again (without administrator rights) and open the
login page of the OpenScape Business Assistant (WBM) at the following
address:
https://192.168.1.2
3) Click on the language code at the top right and select the language in which
the user interface of the WBM is to be displayed from the menu. The Login
page will be displayed in the selected language.
4) In the field under Login, enter the default user name administra-
tor@system for access as an administrator.

NOTICE: If you go to the Password field after entering ad-

ministrator, @system will be added automatically.

5) In the second field under Login, enter the default password administra-
tor for access as an administrator.
6) Click Login.
7) The following steps are only required once when first logging on to the WBM:
a) Reenter the default password administrator in the Password field.
b) Enter a new password in the New Password and Confirm New Pass-
word fields to protect the system against misuse. Note case usage and

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 185
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X
Integration into the Customer LAN

the status of the Num und CapsLock keys. The password is displayed as
a string of asterisks (*).

NOTICE: The password must be at least 8 characters

long and include a digit. Make sure that you remember
your new password.
c) Click Login.
d) Select the current date and enter the correct time.
e) Click OK & Next. You are automatically logged out of the WBM.
f) In the field under Login, enter the default user name administra-
tor@system for access as an administrator.

NOTICE: If you go to the Password field after entering

administrator, @system will be added automatically.
g) In the second field under Login, enter your new password for access as
an administrator.
h) Click Login. The home page of the WBM appears.

Next steps
Start the initial installation.

9.6 Integration into the Customer LAN

The WBM wizard Initial Installation is used for integration into the customer
LAN. This wizard guides you through the basic settings for integrating the
communication system into the existing LAN.

9.6.1 How to Start the Initial Installation Wizard

Prerequisites
The WBM has been started.

Step by Step
1) In the navigation bar, click on Setup.
2) Click on Edit to start the Initial Installation wizard.

NOTICE: If the size of the browser window cannot display

the workspace in its entirety at low screen resolutions, a hor-
izontal or vertical scroll bar appears at the sides and can be
used to scroll to the required section.

Next steps
Perform initial installation as described in the following step-by-step instructions.
Fields that are not described here are preset for the default scenario and should
only be changed if they are not appropriate for your network data. For detailed
information, refer to the descriptions provided in the Administrator documenta-
tion for the individual wizards.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
186 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

9.6.2 System Settings

The System Settings window is used to configure the system settings of the
communication system.
Proceed as follows:
1) Set the display logo and the product name
Specify a display text to be displayed on the display of the system phones.
Additionally, you can also select the product name.
2) Edit IP addresses (if required)
By default, the communication system is assigned an IP address and a sub-
net mask. You may need to adjust the IP address and/or subnet mask to
your own IP address range.
In addition, you can specify the IP address of your default router, e.g., the IP
address of the Internet router.
The Application Board (UC Booster Card) also requires an IP address. You
can assign an IP address from your IP address range regardless of whether
or not the board is installed.
If the netmask is to be expanded, e.g., from 255.255.255.0 to 255.255.0.0, both
the internal IP address of the communication system and the IP address of the
LAN3 port (Admin port) must be changed because they are not allowed to be
in the same network segment as the IP address of the communication system
(see also IP Address Scheme on page 181).

9.6.2.1 How to Set the Display Logo and the Product Name

Prerequisites
You are in the System Settings window.

Step by Step
1) In the Display Logo field, enter a text of your choice (e.g., OpenScape Biz).
The text can contain up to 16 characters. Avoid the use of diacritical charac-
ters such as umlauts and special characters.
2) Select the desired time product name in the Brand drop-down list.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 187
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Next steps
Edit IP addresses (if required) or configure DHCP.

9.6.2.2 How to Specify the IP Addresses (Optional)

Prerequisites
You know the IP address range of your internal network.
You are in the System Settings window.

Step by Step
1) Specify the IP address of the communication system:
a) In the field OpenScape Business - IP address, enter an IP address that
lies within the IP address range of your internal network (e.g., internal
network: 192.168.1.x, OpenScape Business: 192.168.1.2.

NOTICE: The IP address for OpenScape Business must

not be assigned to any other existing network client, since
this would result in an IP address conflict.
b) Enter the subnet mask of your internal network (e.g., 255.255.255.0)
in the OpenScape Business - Subnet Mask field.
2) Specify the IP address of the default router:
a) In the OpenScape Business - Default Routing via field, select the entry
LAN.
b) Enter the IP address of your default router in the OpenScape Busi-
ness - IP Address of Default Router field (e.g., internal network:
192.168.1.x, Internet router as default router: 192.168.1.1).
3) Specify the IP address of the UC Booster Card (required if installed):
4) Click on OK & Next.

Next steps
Configure DHCP.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
188 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

9.6.2.3 How to Specify the Device Name

Prerequisites
You are in the System Settings window.

Step by Step
1) Check the Automatic RSP.servicelink registration checkbox:
Device Name field is editable.
2) Specify the Device Name.
By selecting the Automatic RSP.servicelink registration, system will try auto-
matically every 10 minutes to register and connect to RSP servers using the
provided Device Name.
3) Click on OK & Next.

Next steps
Configure DHCP.

9.6.3 DHCP Settings

In the window DHCP global settings enable and configure or disable the
internal DHCP server of the communication system.
A DHCP server automatically assigns a unique IP address to each IP station
(IP system phones, PCs, etc.) and provides the IP stations with network-specif-
ic data such as the IP address of the default gateway (Internet router), for exam-
ple.
The DHCP server can be an external DHCP server (e.g., the DHCP server of
the Internet router) or the internal DHCP Server of the Linux server integrated
into the communication system.
Either the integrated DLI of the communication system or an external DLS serv-
er can be used for automatically updating the software of the IP system phones
(Administrator Documentation, Deployment Service (DLS and DLI)). The IP ad-
dress of the integrated DLI or the external DLS server must be known to the
DHCP server.
You have the following options:

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 189
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

• Enable and configure the internal DHCP server

If the internal DHCP server of the communication system is used, an exter-
nal DHCP server (e.g., the DHCP server of the Internet router) must be de-
activated. The settings of the internal DHCP server may have to be adapt-
ed to the customer LAN. If the internal DHCP server and the internal DLI are
used, the system phones are updated automatically. If an external DLS serv-
er is used, its IP address must be entered in the internal DHCP server using
Expert mode (Administrator Documentation, Deployment Service (DLS and
DLI)).
• Disable the internal DHCP server
If an external DHCP server is used, the internal DHCP server of the commu-
nication system must be disabled. For IP system phones to be automatical-
ly supplied with the latest phone software, network-specific data (such as the
IP address of the internal DLI or the external DLS server) must be specified
on the external DHCP server.

NOTICE: Not all external DHCP servers support the entry of

network-specific data! In this case, the data must be entered
manually on all IP system phones.

9.6.3.1 How to Disable the Internal DHCP Server

Prerequisites
An external DHCP server (e.g., the DHCP server of the Internet router) is en-
abled in the internal network.
You are in the DHCP Global Settings window.

Step by Step
1) Clear the Enable DHCP Server check box.
2) Click on OK & Next.

Next steps
Configure country and time settings.

9.6.3.2 How to Enable and Configure the Internal DHCP Server

Prerequisites
The external DHCP server (e.g., the DHCP server of the Internet router) has
been disabled in the internal network.
You are in the DHCP Global Settings window.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
190 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) Leave the Enable DHCP Server check box enabled.
2) Go to the Netmask field and adjust the subnet mask to your IP address
range (for example, 255.255.255.0).
3) In the field Preferred Gateway, enter the IP address of the Internet router
(e.g., 192.168.1.1).
4) In the field Preferred Server, enter the IP address of the DNS server (e.g.,
the IP address of the Internet router, 192.168.1.1.
5) Click on OK & Next. The DHCP Address Pool window appears.

6) Specify the values for Subnet address, Netmask and Address range 1 in
order to define the IP address range to be managed by the internal DHCP
server.
If the internal network uses static IP addresses (e.g., for a printer server), the
IP address range (DHCP address pool) must be selected so that the fixed IP
addresses are not included within this range.
Example:
Internet router: 192.168.1.1
OpenScape Business: 192.168.1.2
UC Booster Card: 192.168.1.3
Subnet address: 192.168.1.0
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Printer Server: 192.168.1.10
DHCP address pool: 192.168.1.50 to 192.168.1.254
7) Click on OK & Next.

Next steps
Configure country and time settings.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 191
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

9.6.4 Country and Time Settings

In the Basic Configuration window, select your country and the language
for the event logs and set the date and time. If you are using the integrated
Cordless solution, enter the system-wide DECT system ID here.
Proceed as follows:
1) Select the country code and the language to be used for event logs
For country initialization to work correctly, you must select the country in
which the communication system is operated. In addition, you can select the
language in which the event logs (system event logs, errors logs, etc.) are to
be stored.
2) Enter the DECT system identification (only for integrated Cordless solution)
If you are using the integrated Cordless solution, enter the system-wide
DECT system ID here.
3) Setting Date and Time
• How to Set the Date and Time Manually
The communication system and the stations (IP phones, TDM phones,
client PCs) should have a uniform time base (date and time). If no SNTP
server has been specified for time synchronization, the date and time can
also be entered manually.

NOTICE: The date and time are also updated when a

connection is set up via an ISDN trunk.
• How to Obtain the Date and Time from an SNTP Server
The communication system and IP stations (IP phones, client PCs)
should have a uniform time base (date and time). This time base can be
provided by an SNTP server. The SNTP server can be located on the in-
ternal network or the Internet.
The IP phones receive the date and time automatically from the communication
system. The client PCs on which the UC clients run must be set so that they are
synchronized with the communication system (see the operating system instruc-
tions for the client PCs).

9.6.4.1 How to Select the Country Code and the Language for Event Logs

Prerequisites
You are in the Basic Configuration window.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
192 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) In the System Country Code drop-down list, select the country where the
communication system is operated.
2) In the Language for Customer Event Log field, enter the language in
which the event logs (system event logs, error logs, etc.) are to be output.

Next steps
Enter the DECT system identification (only for integrated Cordless solution)
or
Set the date and time manually or obtain the date and time from an SNTP serv-
er.

9.6.4.2 How to Enter the DECT System ID

Prerequisites
You are in the Basic Configuration window.

Step by Step
In the CMI data area under System ID, enter the 8-digit hexadecimal DECT
system ID that you received on purchasing your integrated Cordless solution.

Next steps
Set the date and time manually or obtain the date and time from an SNTP serv-
er.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 193
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

9.6.4.3 How to Set the Date and Time Manually

Prerequisites
You are in the Basic Configuration window.

Step by Step
1) Enter the current values for Date and Time.
2) Select the desired time zone in the Timezone field.
3) Click on OK & Next.

NOTICE: In case the Timezone setting is changed, then at

the last step of Initial Wizard the system will be restarted.
If Timezone setting remain untouched then system will not be
restarted.

Next steps
Specify UC solution.

9.6.4.4 How to Obtain the Date and Time from an SNTP Server

Prerequisites
You are in the Basic Configuration window.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
194 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) Select the Date and Time via an external SNTP Server check box.
2) Enter the IP address or the DNS name of the SNTP server (e.g.,
0.de.pool.ntp.org) in the IP Address / DNS Name of External Time
Server field).
3) From the drop-down list Poll Interval for External Time Server, select af-
ter how many hours the Date and Time should be synchronized by the SNTP
Server (recommended value: 4 h).
4) Click on OK & Next.

Next steps
Specify UC solution.

9.6.5 UC Solution
In the Change application selection window, select the UC solution to be
used.
You have the following options:
• Package with UC Smart
The UC solution UC Smart is integrated on the OpenScape Business X
mainboard.
• Package with UC Suite
The UC solution UC Suite is integrated on the additional internally pluggable
"UC Booster Card".
• Package with UC Suite on OSBiz UC Booster Server
The UC solution UC Smart is integrated on the external Linux server
"OpenScape Business UC Booster Server".
• Package with UC Suite on OSBiz UC Booster Server
The UC solution UC Suite is integrated on the external Linux server "OpenS-
cape Business UC Booster Server".

9.6.5.1 How to Define the UC Solution

Prerequisites
You have purchased licenses for either of the UC solutions, UC Smart or UC
Suite.
You are in the Change application selection window.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 195
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) If you are using the UC solution UC Smart without a UC Booster Server, click
Package with UC Smart.
2) If you are using the UC solution UC Smart with the UC Booster Server, click
on Package with UC Smart on OSBiz UC Booster Server. In addition, en-
ter the IP address of the external Linux server "OpenScape Business UC
Booster Server" in the IP address of OSBiz UC Booster Server field.
3) If you want to use the UC solution UC Suite with the UC Booster Card, click
on Package with UC Suite.
4) If you are using the UC solution UC Suite with the UC Booster Server, click
on Package with UC Suite on OSBiz UC Booster Server. In addition, en-
ter the IP address of the external Linux server "OpenScape Business UC
Booster Server" in the IP address of OSBiz UC Booster Server field.
5) Click on OK & Next.
6) The Initial installation wizard is closed. Click Finish.
7) Exit the WBM by right-clicking the Logout link on the top right of the screen
and then close the window.

NOTICE: If IP addresses or DHCP server settings have

been changed, the communication system performs a restart.
This can take a few minutes.

Next steps
Connect the communication system to the customer LAN.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
196 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X
Basic Configuration

9.6.6 Connecting the Communication System to the Customer LAN

After a successful initial installation, the communication system is connected to
the existing customer LAN.

9.6.6.1 How to Connect the Communication System to the Customer LAN

Prerequisites
The communication system is ready for use.

Step by Step
1) Remove the LAN cable of the admin PC from the central LAN port "LAN" and
integrate the admin PC in the customer's LAN by connecting it to a switch,
for example.
2) Connect a LAN cable to the middle "LAN" port of the communication system.
3) Integrate the communication system via this LAN cable in the customer LAN
by connecting it to a switch, for example.
4) If a UC Booster Card (Application Board) is plugged in, connect another LAN
cable to the "LAN2" port of the UC Booster Card (right/lower of the two LAN
interfaces) and integrate the UC Booster Card via this LAN cable in the cus-
tomer LAN by connecting it to a switch, for example.

Next steps
Start the basic configuration.

9.7 Basic Configuration

The Basic Installation wizard is used for basic configuration. Basic
configuration includes the most important settings for operating the
communication system.
The Basic Installation Wizard includes a progress indicator showing the current
step, as well as the steps that follow.

9.7.1 How to Start the Basic Installation Wizard

Prerequisites
The Initial installation has been completed.
The communication system is integrated in the customer LAN
The communication system is ready for use. The "Run" LED on the mainboard
flashes green at 1Hz (0.5 sec on / 0.5 sec off).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 197
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) Open the WBM login page on the admin PC by entering the following ad-
dress in your web browser:
https://<IP address of OpenScape Business>
The default IP address for OpenScape Business is 192.168.1.2, i.e.,
https://192.168.1.2, for example.
2) In the User Name field, enter the default user name administrator@sys-
tem for access as an administrator.
3) Enter the password you defined at initial startup in the Password field.
4) Click on Login.
5) In the navigation bar, click on Setup.
6) Click on Edit to start the Basic Installation wizard.

Next steps
Perform basic installation as described in the following step-by-step instructions.
Fields that are not described here are preset for the default scenario and should
only be changed if they are not appropriate for your network data. For detailed
information, refer to the descriptions provided in the Administrator documenta-
tion for the individual wizards.

9.7.2 System Phone Numbers and Networking

Enter the system phone numbers (PABX number, country and area code,
international prefix) in the Overview window and specify whether OpenScape
Business is to be networked with other OpenScape Business systems.
Proceed as follows:
1) Enter system phone numbers
• Enter system phone numbers for point-to-point connection
Here you enter the system phone number for your point-to-point connec-
tion and the country code and area code.
The entry of the country code is mandatory for Internet telephony and
conference server functionality.
The international prefix is preset, depending on the previously dialed
country code.
• Enter system phone numbers for point-to-multipoint connection
Here you enter the country code and area code for your point-to-multi-
point connection.
The entry of the country code is mandatory for Internet telephony and
Meet-Me conferences.
The international prefix is preset, depending on the previously dialed
country code.
2) Activate or deactivate networking
If OpenScape Business is to be networked with other OpenScape Business
systems, networking must be enabled, and OpenScape Business must be
assigned a node ID. Every OpenScape Business must have a unique node
ID in the network.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
198 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

9.7.2.1 How to Enter the System Phone Numbers for a Point-to-Point connection

Prerequisites
You have a point-to-point connection.
You are in the Summary window.

Step by Step
1) In the Country Code field, enter the country code prefix, e.g., 49 for Ger-
many or 1 for the U.S.
2) Enter the local area code, e.g., 89 for Munich, in the Local area code field.
3) Enter the system phone number of your trunk connection, e.g., 7007 (your
connection number), in the PABX number field.
4) Change the International Prefix field only if required. The applicable values
for Germany and the United States are 00 and 011, respectively.
For international calls, the phone number is preceded by the internation-
al prefix and the country code, e.g., "00-1-..." for calls from Germany to the
USA and "011-49-..." for calls from the USA to Germany.

Next steps
Activate or deactivate networking

9.7.2.2 How to Enter the System Phone Numbers for a Point-to-Multipoint Connection

Prerequisites
You have a point-to-multipoint connection.
You are in the Summary window.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 199
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) In the Country Code field, enter the country code prefix, e.g., 49 for Ger-
many or 1 for the U.S.
2) Enter the local area code, e.g., 89 for Munich, in the Local area code field.
3) Leave the PABX number field empty.
4) Change the International Prefix field only if required. The applicable values
for Germany and the United States are 00 and 011, respectively.
For international calls, the phone number is preceded by the internation-
al prefix and the country code, e.g., "00-1-..." for calls from Germany to the
USA and "011-49-..." for calls from the USA to Germany.

Next steps
Activate or deactivate networking

9.7.2.3 How to Activate or Deactivate Networking

Prerequisites
You are in the Summary window.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
200 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) If the communication system is to be networked with other communication
systems:
a) Select the Network Integration check box.
b) In the Node ID field for the communication system, enter a node ID that is
unique in the internetwork (digits from 1 through 100 are possible).
2) If the communication system is not to be networked with other communica-
tion systems, leave the Network Integration check box disabled.

Next steps
Configure the upstream of your Internet connection.

9.7.3 Station Data

If necessary, you can configure your own individual dial plan instead of the
predefined default dial plan in the Central Functions for Stations window and
import additional station data. In an internetwork, the default dial plan must be
adapted to the dial plan of the internetwork.
The default dial plan contains predefined numbers for different types of stations
(IP phones, analog phones, ...) and for special functions (Internet telephony,
voicemail box, AutoAttendant, ...).
The station data includes the internal call numbers, DID numbers and names of
the stations. This data and other station data can be imported into the communi-
cation system during the basic configuration via an XML file in UTF-8 format.

NOTICE: An XML template with the appropriate explanations

can be found in the WBM under Service Center > Documents
> CSV Templates. You can enter your data in this template by
using Microsoft Excel, for example.

You have the following options:

• Configure station data without an internetwork
Proceed as follows:
1) Display the station data
You can have all preconfigured station numbers and station data dis-
played.
2) Delete all station numbers (optional)
If you use an individual dial plan, you must delete all preconfigured sta-
tion numbers.
3) Adapt preconfigured station numbers for the individual dial plan (optional)
If you are using an individual dial plan, you can adapt the preconfigured
phone numbers to your own dial plan.

NOTICE: If the user passes through the Change precon-

figured functional call numbers, any existing custom

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 201
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

configuration done in UC Suite must be reviewed or re-

peated (e.g., pilot queues)
4) Import station data from an XML file (optional)
You can easily import your individual station numbers, including any addi-
tional station data, during the basic configuration via an XML file.
• Configure station data with an internetwork
Proceed as follows:
1) Delete all station numbers
If the UC Suite is used in an internetwork, a closed numbering plan is re-
quired, i.e., all station numbers in the internetwork must be unique. For
this reason, any preconfigured station numbers must be deleted and only
stations numbers adapted for the internetwork must be used.
2) Import station data from an XML file
The station numbers adapted for the internetwork and any additional sta-
tion data can be easily imported during the basic configuration via an
XML file. This file can contain all stations in the internetwork. During im-
port, only the station numbers and the station data assigned to the previ-
ously specified node ID of the communication system will be transferred.

9.7.3.1 How to Display the Station Data

Prerequisites
You are in the Central Functions for Stations window.

Step by Step
1) Select the Display stations configuration radio button.
2) Click on Execute function. A list of stations with the preconfigured phone
numbers (default dial plan) is displayed.
3) Click on OK. You are taken back to the Central Functions for Stations win-
dow.
4) If you do not want to change any station data, click OK & Next.

9.7.3.2 How to Delete all Call Numbers

Prerequisites
You are in the Central Functions for Stations window.

Step by Step
1) Enable the radio button Delete all station call numbers.
2) Enable the check box Delete All Call Addresses.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
202 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

3) Click on Execute function. All preset call numbers are deleted. The
Change preconfigured call and functional numbers window then ap-
pears.

4) Adjust the codes and special call numbers to suit your preferences, and then
click OK. You are taken back to the Central Functions for Stations window.
5) If you do not want to change any further station data, click OK & Next.

9.7.3.3 How to Adapt Preconfigured Station Numbers for the Individual Dial Plan

Prerequisites
You are in the Central Functions for Stations window.

Step by Step
1) Enable the radio button Change pre-configured call and functional num-
bers.
2) Click on Execute function. The Change preconfigured call and function-
al numbers window appears.

3) Adjust the preconfigured call numbers to suit your preferences, and then
click OK. You are taken back to the Central Functions for Stations window.
4) If you do not want to change any further station data, click OK & Next.

9.7.3.4 How to Import the Station Data from an XML File

Prerequisites
You are in the Central Functions for Stations window.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 203
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

An XML file with the entered data is available in UTF-8 format. An XML template
can be found under Service Center > Documents > CSV Templates.

Step by Step
1) Enable the radio button Import XML file with station data.
2) Click Execute function.
3) Use Browse to select the created XML file and click Open.
4) Click OK when finished. The station data is imported.
5) Click OK & Next.

9.7.3.5 How to display Mass data

Prerequisites
You are in the Central Functions for Stations window.

Step by Step
1) Enable the Mass Data wizard button.
2) Click on Execute function.
3) In the Mass Data Wizard window you can validate the entries of the sys-
tem, by clicking on Validate. There are two types of validation, the Front End
Consistency Check and the Back End Consistency Check.
The green color in validation field indicates only the actions that have been
recently validated. The validation of data is not saved, so if the values are
changed the user has to validate again the data.
4) During Back End Consistency Check and after the successful validation of
data no editing in Mass Data Wizard window is possible. After the success-
ful validation OK&Next becomes available with Edit restrict mode. If the user
clicks on Back, Edit mode becomes available but OK&Next disappears.
When the validation is unsuccessful Edit mode remains intact and OK&Next
stays hidden.

NOTICE: The user can click on Back to re-edit the data and
the window returns to Edit mode again.The Edit restrict mode
ensures that the user cannot click on OK&Next and submit
changes that are not validated.

5) When Mass Data Wizard is configured successfully click on Finish. In the

finish page is displayed a sum up with all the changes.
Fields that are not editable are already filled in with the relevant values ob-
tained by the Database. As a result Copy/paste function will have no effect in
data.
Type field is a selectable drop down menu with editing functionality. Howev-
er the only options accepted are No Port, System Client, SIP Client, Desk-
share User and potentially a predefined value based on the Baugruppe it be-
longs. If the user tries to enter something else then this will not be accepted
and drop down menu will not be disappear persisting in providing a proper
entry.
Another restriction is that some ports are not changeable (for instance ports
belonging in an Analog card, type is not changeable and should remain Ana-

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
204 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

log Station).All restrictions apply when the user tries to perform copy paste
on top of Type column. If the user tries to paste irrelevant data not compro-
mising with the rules above paste will not be performed at all.
Copy and paste can be applied on the whole table as well as on specific
parts.

NOTICE: When selecting two following cells, with a numeric

value, and you pull down the fields the following columns are
not filled in with ascending numbers but they are filled in with
a copy of the selected cells.

9.7.4 ISDN Configuration

In the ISDN Configuration window, you specify whether ISDN stations are to
be connected and whether ISDN is to be used for the trunk connection. The
ISDN trunk connection can be set up as an ISDN point-to-point connection and/
or an ISDN-point-to-multipoint connection. Depending on the communication
system and board used, different S0 ports are available for this purpose.
You have the following options:
• Enable ISDN configuration:
1) Configure an ISDN point-to-point connection
You can set up an ISDN trunk connection as a point-to-point connection
with DID numbers.
2) Configure an ISDN point-to-multipoint connection
You can set up an ISDN trunk connection as a point-to-multipoint connec-
tion with MSN.
3) Set up a connection for ISDN subscribers (optional)
One or more S0 interfaces can be configured as internal S0 connections
in order to connect ISDN stations (ISDN phones or ISDN fax devices). A
station license is required for each ISDN station.
• Disable ISDN configuration
If you do not have an ISDN trunk connection, you must disable the ISDN
configuration. All S0 interfaces automatically configured as internal S0ports.

Other options for trunk connections

Instead of setting up an ISDN trunk connection, you can also set up an analog
trunk connection or a trunk connection through an Internet Telephony Service
Provider (ITSP, SIP provider). Basic installation must be complete before the
analog trunk connection can be configured.

9.7.4.1 How to Configure the Connection of ISDN Stations

Prerequisites
You are in the ISDN Configuration window.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 205
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) Clear the check box No call via ISDN trunk line (S0).
2) Activate the Internal S0 connection radio button for the desired S0 port.

Next steps
Configure ISDN point-to-point connection and/or configure ISDN point-to-multi-
point connection.

9.7.4.2 How to Configure the ISDN Point-to-Point Connection

Prerequisites
You are in the ISDN Configuration window.

Step by Step
1) To configure the ISDN trunk connection, clear the check box No call via
ISDN trunk line (S0).
2) Enable the radio button Point-to-point connection for the desired S0 port.
3) Click on OK & Next.

9.7.4.3 How to Configure the ISDN Point-to-Multipoint Connection

Prerequisites
You are in the ISDN Configuration window.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
206 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) To configure the ISDN trunk connection, clear the check box No call via
ISDN trunk line (S0).
2) Enable the radio button Point-to-multipoint connection for the desired S0 port.
3) Click on OK & Next.

4) Enter all phone numbers (MSNs) supplied by your provider in the ISDN mul-
tiple subscriber numbers column. You can enter up to 10 MSNs for each
S0 port. The number of the S0 connections depends on the communication
system and possibly the board being used.
5) Click on OK & Next.

9.7.4.4 How to Deactivate the ISDN Configuration

Prerequisites
You are in the ISDN Configuration window.

Step by Step
1) Select the No call via ISDN trunk line (S0) check box.

NOTICE: Calls can also be conducted via an Internet Tele-

phony Service Provider; see Internet Telephony on page
218.

2) Click on OK & Next.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 207
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

9.7.5 Internet Access

The Configure Internet Access window can be used to configure Internet
access.

The configuration of Internet access in the WBM depends on whether the Inter-
net connection has already been set up in an external router or whether it oc-
curs via an Internet modem and thus needs to be set up in the WBM.
Only one of the options listed here may be selected.
• Internet access through an Internet modem (DSL at WAN port directly)
You want to operate the communication system directly at an Internet mo-
dem (DSL, cable, UMTS ...). OpenScape Business has the Internet router in-
tegrated. Enter the access data of the Internet Service Provider (ISP) direct-
ly in the communication system and use the WAN port of the communication
system.

You have the following options:

– Internet access via a preconfigured ISP
– Internet access via the standard ISP PPPoE
– Internet access via the standard ISP PPTP
If your ISP is not listed under the preconfigured ISPs, use the default ISP
PPPoE or PPTP.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
208 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

• Internet access via an external Internet router

You want to operate the communication system at an external Internet
router. The Internet Service Provider is already configured in the Internet
router.
You have the following options:
– Internet access via an external Internet router at the WAN port
(TCP/IP at WAN port via an external router)

To do this, you use the WAN port of the communication system. OpenS-
cape Business either knows the Internet router or works as a DHCP
client. This option can be used if the Internet router is located in another
network segment and has its own DHCP server.
– Internet access via an external Internet router at the LAN port
(TCP/IP at LAN port via an external router)

To do this, you use the LAN port of the communication system. OpenS-
cape Business knows only the default router and not the underlying infra-
structure. To activate the connection to the Internet router, the IP address
of the default router and that of the DNS server must be made known to
the communication system.
• Deactivate Internet access (default setting)
You do not want to use the Internet.

9.7.5.1 How to Configure Internet Access via an External Internet Router over the LAN
Port

Prerequisites
The communication system must be connected to the customer LAN via the
"LAN" interface. The connection must not use the WAN port, since the WAN
port will be disabled.
You are in the Configure Internet Access window.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 209
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) Disable the No Internet Access check box.
2) Activate the radio button TCP/IP at LAN Port via an external router, enter
the upload speed of your Internet connection in the Upstream up to (Kbps)
field and click OK & Next.

3) Enter the IP address of the local DNS server (e.g., the Internet router) or the
Internet DNS server (for Internet telephony, for example) in the IP address
of the preferred DNS server field.
4) Enter the IP address of the external Internet router in the IP Address of De-
fault Router field.
5) Click on OK & Next.

9.7.5.2 How to Configure Internet Access via an External Internet Router over the WAN
Port

Prerequisites
The communication system must be connected to the LAN segment of the cus-
tomer LAN in which the Internet router is located via the LAN interface "WAN".
You are in the Configure Internet Access window.

Step by Step
1) Disable the No Internet Access check box.
2) Activate the radio button TCP/IP at WAN Port via an external router and
click OK & Next.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
210 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

3) If the network-specific data for the WAN interface are to be obtained from an
already active DHCP server:
a) Select the check box Automatic Address Configuration (with DHCP).
b) Select the Accept IP Address of the Default Router check box if you
want this IP address to be used.
c) Select the check box Accept IP Address of the DNS Server if required.
d) Select the check box Accept IP Address of the SNTP Server if re-
quired.
4) If a fixed IP address is to be assigned to the WAN interface:
a) Clear the check box Automatic Address Configuration (with DHCP).
b) Enter the desired IP address and Netmask of the WAN interface.
5) Enable the NAT check box.
6) If you also want to use Internet Telephony, select the item Upload only or
Upload and Download as needed from the Bandwidth Control for Voice
Connections drop-down list. If the download bandwidth is high and the up-
load bandwidth is low, bandwidth control should only be activated for the
upload direction to ensure that the download bandwidth reserved for voice
transmission is not unnecessarily high.
7) In the Bandwidth for Downloads and Bandwidth for Uploads fields, enter
the bandwidth in Kbps for downloads and uploads, respectively, as provided
by your Internet Service Provider.
8) Click on OK & Next.

9.7.5.3 How to Configure Internet Access via a Preconfigured ISP

Prerequisites
You are in the Configure Internet Access window.
Your ISP's Internet access data is available (for example, user account, pass-
word, bandwidth for upload and download, etc.).
Optional: The data for a DynDNS account is available to you (name, password,
host name, domain name of the DynDNS provider)

Step by Step
1) Disable the No Internet Access check box.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 211
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

2) Activate the radio button DSL directly at Mainboard WAN Port and click
OK & Next.

3) Select your ISP from the Internet Service Provider Selection drop-down
list.
4) Enter the access data that you received from your ISP in the Internet Ac-
cess Data for... area. The fields in this area ate provider-specific. When
entering your data, bear in mind that the input is case-sensitive!
5) Depending on your tariff model, select one of the following two options un-
der Full-Time Circuit in the Router Settings area:
• If you have a flat rate tariff model, enable the radio button On. In the
Forced Disconnect at (hour:min) field, enter the time at which the In-
ternet connection is to be interrupted (e.g., 01:30). Make sure that no
data is exchanged with the Internet (e.g., software downloads or Inter-
net telephony) during this time.
• If you have a time-based tariff model, enable the radio button Off. In the
Disconnect automatically after (seconds) field, enter the duration of
inactivity after which the connection is to be dropped (e.g., 60 seconds).
6) Set the following values in the QoS Parameters area:
a) In the Bandwidth for Downloads and Bandwidth for Uploads fields,
enter the bandwidth in Kbps for downloads and uploads, respectively,
as provided by your ISP.
b) If you want to use Internet Telephony as well, open the drop-down list
Bandwidth Control for Voice Connections and select the item Up-
load only or Upload and Download, as required. In the field Band-
width Used for Voice/Fax (%), enter how much bandwidth is to be re-
served for voice and fax connections as a percentage value (default val-
ue: 80%).
7) Click OK & Next. You are taken to the Configure DynDNS-Account win-
dow.
8) If you want to use a VPN or remote access and do not have a public static
IP address, you will need to have already applied for and set up a DynDNS
account (at dyndns.org, for example).
a) If your desired DynDNS provider is included in the Domain name drop-
down list, select it from that list (e.g., dyndns.org).
b) If your desired DynDNS provider is not included in the Domain name
drop-down list, select the User defined Domain check box. Enter the

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
212 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

desired DynDNS provider in the Domain name field and enter the up-
date URL of the DynDNS provider in the Update URL field. The struc-
ture of this URL depends on the DynDNS provider. In addition, cus-
tomer-specific parameters (shown in italics in the example) must be
supplemented.
http://www.anydns.info/update.php?user=<user-
name>&password=<pass>&host=<domain>&ip=<ipaddr>
c) Enter the User name and the Password of your DynDNS account.
d) Enter the host name assigned to you by the DynDNS provider, omitting
the domain name, for instance, myhost, in the Hostname field. Your
complete domain name would then be myhost.dyndns.org, for example.
e) Test the DynDNS account with Connection test.
f) After the test succeeds, click OK.
g) Click OK & Next.
9) If you have a public static IP address or do not want to use a VPN or re-
mote access, click No DynDNS.
10) Click OK & Next.

9.7.5.4 How to Configure Internet Access via the Standard ISP PPPoE

Prerequisites
You are in the Configure Internet Access window.
The following ISP-specific Internet access data is available to you:

Field Description Value from ISP

IP Parameters (only for a fixed IP address)
Remote IP Address of the PPP IP address of your ISP's server.
Connection
Local IP Address of the PPP IP address that was assigned to you
Connection by your ISP for Internet access.
Authentication (via PAP or CHAP). PAP is seldom used, since the authentication is unencrypted.
PPP User Name User name that was assigned to you
by your ISP for the PPP connection.
PAP Authentication Mode Authentication mode for the PPP
connection over PAP: PAP Client,
PAP Host or Not used.
PAP Password Password assigned to you by the ISP
for PAP authentication
CHAP Authentication Mode Authentication mode for PPP
connection via CHAP: CHAP Client,
CHAP Host, CHAP Client and Host
or Not used.
CHAP Password Password assigned to you by the ISP
for CHAP authentication
QoS Parameters of Interface

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 213
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Field Description Value from ISP

Bandwidth for Downloads Value of the full download bandwidth
in Kbps provided by the ISP.
Bandwidth for Uploads Value of the full upload bandwidth in
Kbps provided by the ISP.

Optional: The data for a DynDNS account is available to you (name, password,
host name, domain name of the DynDNS provider)

Step by Step
1) Disable the No Internet Access check box.
2) Activate the radio button DSL at WAN Port directly and click OK & Next.
3) From the Internet Service Provider Selection drop-down list, select the
standard ISP Type Provider PPPoE.
4) The IP parameters check box in the IP Parameters area should only be
enabled if the ISP requires an adjustment of these parameters. In this
case, enter the values that you have received from your ISP in the Remote
IP Address of the PPP Connection, Local IP Address of the PPP Con-
nection and Max. Data Packet Size (bytes) fields. From the IP Address
Negotiation drop-down list, select the item Use configured IP address.
5) Depending on your tariff model, select one of the following two options un-
der Full-Time Circuit in the Router Settings area:
• If you have a flat rate tariff model, enable the radio button On. In the
Forced Disconnect at (hour:min) field, enter the time at which the In-
ternet connection is to be interrupted (e.g., 01:30). Make sure that no
data is exchanged with the Internet (e.g., software downloads or Inter-
net telephony) during this time.
• If you have a time-based tariff model, enable the radio button Off. In the
Disconnect automatically after (seconds) field, enter the duration of
inactivity after which the connection is to be dropped (e.g., 60 seconds).
6) The settings in the Authentication area depend on whether or not the ISP
requires authentication via PPP.
• Authentication required by ISP: Make sure that the check box PPP Au-
thentication is enabled. Enter the Internet access name of the ISP as
the PPP user name. The customary standard is the CHAP Client au-
thentication mode.
• Authentication not required by ISP: Make sure that the check box PPP
Authentication is disabled.
7) If you want to use NAT, enable the NAT check box (enabled by default) in
the Address Translation area.
8) Set the following values in the QoS Parameters of Interface area:
a) In the Bandwidth for Downloads and Bandwidth for Uploads fields,
enter the bandwidth in Kbps for downloads and uploads, respectively,
as provided by your ISP.
b) If you want to use Internet Telephony as well, open the drop-down list
Bandwidth Control for Voice Connections and select the item Up-
load only or Upload and Download, as required. In the field Band-
width Used for Voice/Fax (%), enter how much bandwidth is to be re-
served for voice and fax connections as a percentage value (default val-
ue: 80%).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
214 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

9) Click OK & Next. You are taken to the Configure DynDNS-Account win-
dow.
10) If you want to use a VPN or remote access and do not have a public static
IP address, you will need to have already applied for and set up a DynDNS
account (at dyndns.org, for example).
a) If your desired DynDNS provider is included in the Domain name drop-
down list, select it from that list (e.g., dyndns.org).
b) If your desired DynDNS provider is not included in the Domain name
drop-down list, select the User defined Domain check box. Enter the
desired DynDNS provider in the Domain name field and enter the up-
date URL of the DynDNS provider in the Update URL field. The struc-
ture of this URL depends on the DynDNS provider. In addition, cus-
tomer-specific parameters (shown in italics in the example) must be
supplemented.
http://www.anydns.info/update.php?user=<user-
name>&password=<pass>&host=<domain>&ip=<ipaddr>
c) Enter the User name and the Password of your DynDNS account.
d) Enter the host name assigned to you by the DynDNS provider, omitting
the domain name, for instance, myhost, in the Hostname field. Your
complete domain name would then be myhost.dyndns.org, for example.
e) Test the DynDNS account with Connection test.
f) After the test succeeds, click OK.
g) Click OK & Next.
11) If you have a public static IP address or do not want to use a VPN or re-
mote access, click No DynDNS.
12) Click OK & Next.

9.7.5.5 How to Configure Internet Access via a Standard ISP PPTP

Prerequisites
You are in the Configure Internet Access window.
The following ISP-specific Internet access data is available to you:

Field Description Value from ISP

IP Parameters (only for a fixed IP address)
Remote IP Address of the PPP IP address of your ISP's server.
Connection
Local IP Address of the PPP IP address that was assigned to you
Connection by your ISP for Internet access.
PPTP Parameter
Local IP Address of the IP address that was assigned to you
Control Connection by your ISP for the PPTP connection.
The default value is 10.0.0.140.
Remote IP Address of the IP address of your ISP's server for
Control Connection the PPTP connection. The default
value is 10.0.0.138.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 215
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Field Description Value from ISP

Remote Netmask for the Subnet mask that was assigned
Control Connection to you by your ISP for the PPTP
connection. The default value is
255.255.255.248.
Authentication (via PAP or CHAP). PAP is seldom used, since the authentication is unencrypted.
PPP User Name User name that was assigned to you
by your ISP for the PPP connection.
PAP Authentication Mode Authentication mode for the PPP
connection over PAP: PAP Client,
PAP Host or Not used.
PAP Password Password assigned to you by the ISP
for PAP authentication
CHAP Authentication Mode Authentication mode for PPP
connection via CHAP: CHAP Client,
CHAP Host, CHAP Client and Host
or Not used.
CHAP Password Password assigned to you by the ISP
for CHAP authentication
QoS Parameters of Interface
Bandwidth for Downloads Value of the full download bandwidth
in Kbps provided by the ISP.
Bandwidth for Uploads Value of the full upload bandwidth in
Kbps provided by the ISP.

Optional: The data for a DynDNS account is available to you (name, password,
host name, domain name of the DynDNS provider)

Step by Step
1) Disable the No Internet Access check box.
2) Activate the radio button DSL at WAN Port directly and click OK & Next.
3) From the Internet Service Provider Selection drop-down list, select the
standard ISP Type Provider PPTP.
4) The IP parameters check box in the IP Parameters area should only be
enabled if the ISP requires an adjustment of these parameters. In this
case, enter the values that you have received from your ISP in the Remote
IP Address of the PPP Connection, Local IP Address of the PPP Con-
nection and Max. Data Packet Size (bytes) fields. From the IP Address
Negotiation drop-down list, select the item Use configured IP address.
5) Enter the values that you received from your ISP in the PPTP Parameter
area.
6) If you have a time-based tariff model, select the Short Hold check box. In
the Short Hold Time (sec) field, enter the duration of inactivity after which
the connection is to be dropped (e.g., 60 seconds).
7) The settings in the Authentication area depend on whether or not the ISP
requires authentication via PPP.
• Authentication required by ISP: Make sure that the check box PPP Au-
thentication is enabled. Enter the Internet access name of the ISP as

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
216 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

the PPP user name. Make the PAP and CHAP settings, as assigned to
you by your ISP.
• Authentication not required by ISP: Make sure that the check box PPP
Authentication is disabled.
8) If you want to use NAT, enable the NAT check box (enabled by default) in
the Address Translation area.
9) Set the following values in the QoS Parameters of Interface area:
a) In the Bandwidth for Downloads and Bandwidth for Uploads fields,
enter the bandwidth in Kbps for downloads and uploads, respectively,
as provided by your ISP.
b) If you want to use Internet Telephony as well, open the drop-down list
Bandwidth Control for Voice Connections and select the item Up-
load only or Upload and Download, as required. In the field Band-
width Used for Voice/Fax (%), enter how much bandwidth is to be re-
served for voice and fax connections as a percentage value (default val-
ue: 80%).
10) Click OK & Next. You are taken to the Configure DynDNS-Account win-
dow.
11) If you want to use a VPN or remote access and do not have a public static
IP address, you will need to have already applied for and set up a DynDNS
account (at dyndns.org, for example).
a) If your desired DynDNS provider is included in the Domain name drop-
down list, select it from that list (e.g., dyndns.org).
b) If your desired DynDNS provider is not included in the Domain name
drop-down list, select the User defined Domain check box. Enter the
desired DynDNS provider in the Domain name field and enter the up-
date URL of the DynDNS provider in the Update URL field. The struc-
ture of this URL depends on the DynDNS provider. In addition, cus-
tomer-specific parameters (shown in italics in the example) must be
supplemented.
http://www.anydns.info/update.php?user=<user-
name>&password=<pass>&host=<domain>&ip=<ipaddr>
c) Enter the User name and the Password of your DynDNS account.
d) Enter the host name assigned to you by the DynDNS provider, omitting
the domain name, for instance, myhost, in the Hostname field. Your
complete domain name would then be myhost.dyndns.org, for example.
e) Test the DynDNS account with Connection test.
f) After the test succeeds, click OK.
g) Click OK & Next.
12) If you have a public static IP address or do not want to use a VPN or re-
mote access, click No DynDNS.
13) Click OK & Next.

9.7.5.6 How to Disable Internet Access

Prerequisites
You are in the Configure Internet Access window.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 217
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) Leave the No Internet Access check box enabled.
2) Click on OK & Next.

9.7.6 Internet Telephony

The Provider configuration and activation for Internet telephony window
is used to configure Internet telephony. You can configure predefined or new
Internet Telephony Service Providers (ITSPs). You can configure one or several
accounts for each ITSP. Up to 8 ITSPs may be active simultaneously.
You have the following options:
• Configure a predefined ITSP
You can use predefined ITSP templates. To do this, the own access data and
phone numbers are entered in the template, and this is then activated.
• Configure a new ITSP
You can also add and activate a new ITSP.
Configuring a new ITSP is seldom required and can be very time-consuming.
This option is therefore not described in the initial installation. Detailed infor-
mation can be found in the chapter Administrator Documentation, Configur-
ing an ITSP.
• Disable Internet telephony
You can disable Internet telephony.

NOTICE: Configuration examples can be found on the Internet

at the Unify Experts Wiki under OpenScape Business - SIP /
ITSP Connectivity - PDF "OSBiz V2 Configuration for ITSP".

Assigning the ITSP Phone Numbers

• In the case of an Internet Telephony Station Connection, the ITSP pro-

vides individual numbers such as 70005555, 70005556, etc. These individ-
ual call numbers are then assigned manually as the internal call numbers of
the subscribers.
• In the case of an Internet telephony point-to-point connection, the ITSP
provides a call number range, e.g., (+49) 89 7007-100 to (+49) 89 7007-147.
The call numbers from the range are then assigned manually as the internal
call numbers of the subscribers.
These two connection types can be combined as appropriate.
Alternatively, the ITSP phone numbers can be entered as the DID call numbers
of the subscriber for both connection types during the station configuration.

Internal call number Name DID

100 Andreas Richter 897007100
101 Susanne Mueller 897007101
102 Buddy Miller 897007102
104 Juan Martinez 70005555

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
218 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Internal call number Name DID

105 Emilio Carrara 70005556

The ITSP call numbers thus result from the configured PABX number (e.g.,
country code 49) and the entered DID numbers in long format. This has
advantages for the digit analysis and call management, even in an internetwork.
The ITSP connection is thus DID-enabled for another node, for example.
A further CO trunk connection via ISDN is only possible to a limited extent in
this case (useful for emergency calls, for example).

9.7.6.1 How to Configure a Predefined ITSP

Prerequisites
You are in the Provider configuration and activation for Internet Telephony
window.
The Internet connection is operational.
Your ITSP's Internet telephony access data is available (for example, user ac-
count, password and Internet telephony numbers).

Step by Step
1) Clear the No call via Internet check box. A country-specific list of the pos-
sible ITSPs is displayed. The list contains the predefined ITSPs for the se-
lected country and any already created ITSPs.

2) If you want to change the preset country, select the desired country from
the Country specific view drop-down list to display the ITSPs that are
available for this country.
3) If required, click Display Status to check which ITSPs have already been
activated and which Internet telephony subscribers have already been con-

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 219
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

figured under each ITSP. You can activate a maximum of 8 ITSPs. Click
OK when finished.
4) To configure Internet telephony stations, click Edit in the line associated
with the relevant ITSP.
5) Activate the check box Enable Provider.
6) Click OK & Next.
7) Click Add to configure your ITSP accounts with the corresponding Internet
telephony numbers. The fields that will then be displayed are provider-spe-
cific.

8) Enter the credentials for your account in the Internet Telephony Station
field. You received this data from your ITSP. Depending on the ITSP, differ-
ent designations are used for this, for example: SIP User, SIP ID, etc.
9) Enter the authorization name in the Authorization name field. You re-
ceived this data from your ITSP. If you have not received any authorization
name, enter the same data you entered under Internet Telephony Sta-
tion.
10) Enter the password you received from the ITSP in the New Password and
Confirm Password fields. Depending on the ITSP, different designations
are used for this, for example: Password, SIP Password, etc.
11) Assignment of Internet telephony phone numbers - Option 1:
Use public number (DID): the Internet telephony phone numbers of your
Internet telephony station connection or Internet telephony point-to-point
connection are not entered here during the ITSP configuration, but when

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
220 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

the configuring the stations, i.e. the telephones and subscribers (in the DID
fields).

a) Select the option field Use public number (DID) in the Call number
assignment area.
b) Under Default Number, enter the phone number to be used for outgo-
ing calls to subscribers who do not have their own phone number.
c) If your ITSP supports the "Mobile Extension (MEX)" feature, enter the
MEX number provided by the ITSP (8 positions, digits only) under MEX
Number.
12) Assignment of Internet telephony phone numbers - Option 2:
Use internal number (Callno) / Single entries: You have an Internet tele-
phony station connection and have received individual call numbers as In-

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 221
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

ternet telephony phone numbers (e.g. 70005555, 70005556,...). Then as-

sign these single numbers to the internal call numbers of the subscribers.

a) Select the option field Use internal number (Callno) / Single entries in
the Call number assignment area.
b) In the Internet Telephony Phone Numbers area, enter one of the In-
ternet telephony phone numbers provided by the ITSP in the field next
to the Add button and then click Add.
c) To assign further Internet telephony numbers to the account, repeat
step b).
13) Assignment of Internet telephony phone numbers - Option 3:
Use internal number (Callno) / Range entry: You have an Internet tele-
phony point-to-point connection and have received a call number range
as Internet telephony phone numbers (e.g., +49) 89 7007-100 to (+49) 89

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
222 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

7007-147. You then assign the call numbers from the call number range as
the internal call numbers of the subscribers.

a) Select the option field Use internal number (Callno) / Range entry in
the Call number assignment area.
b) Enter the system phone number under System phone number (pre-
fix).
c) Enter the desired DID number range for the Internet telephony station
in the 'from' and 'to ' fields after Direct inward dialing band. The range
entered by default is 100 - 147.
14) Click on OK & Next.
15) If you want to configure additional accounts and their associated Internet
telephony numbers, repeat steps 7 through 14.
16) Click OK & Next. You will see an overview of which Internet telephony
phone numbers are assigned to accounts.
17) Assign one internal station number each to every Internet telephony phone
number.
This step is not required if you have selected option 1 for the assignment
of the Internet telephony phone numbers. In this case, the assignment

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 223
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

is made when the configuring the stations (i.e., the telephones and sub-
scribers) in the DID field.

a) To do this, select an internal call number in the appropriate line from the
Internal Call Number drop-down list.
b) If subscribers without Internet telephony phone numbers or members of
a call group are to be allowed to make external calls via the Internet, the
radio button Use as PABX number for outgoing calls must be activat-
ed. The radio button can be activated for only one single Internet tele-
phony phone number.
18) Click OK & Next. Here you see again the list of predefined and newly
added ITSPs. The enabled ITSPs are identified with a check mark in the
Enable Provider column. If you are having connection problems with al-
ready activated ITSP, you can register it again with Restart ITSP.
19) Click OK & Next.
20) Enter the upload speed of your Internet connection in the Upstream up to
(Kbps) field. Please do not confuse this with the download speed!

NOTICE: The number of simultaneous Internet calls per-

mitted is displayed in the Number of Simultaneous Inter-
net calls field. If the voice quality deteriorates due to the
network load, you will need to reduce the number.

21) Click OK & Next.

22) If you did not activate the full-time circuit when setting up your Internet ac-
cess, you can now do this here. Without a permanent connection (full-time
circuit), you cannot receive calls over the Internet. If the full-time circuit has
already been set up, the fields described under a) to c) will not appear.
a) Enable the radio button On under Full-Time Circuit.
b) In the Forced Disconnect at (hour:min) field, enter the time at which
the Internet connection is to be deactivated (e.g., 04:59).
c) Click OK & Next.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
224 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

23) Enter the special numbers you want in the Dialed digits column.

The following station number entries are valid:

• 0 to 9: allowed digits
• -: Field separator
• X: Any digit from 0 to 9
• N: Any digit from 2 to 9
• Z: One or more digits to follow up to the end of dialing
• C: Simulated dial tone (can be entered up to three times)
24) Use the Dial over Provider column to specify whether the special number
should be dialed via ISDN or an ITSP. Only the active ITSP is displayed.

NOTICE: Ensure that emergency numbers can always be

dialed. If you want to dial emergency numbers via an Inter-
net Telephony Service Provider, you must make sure that
the ITSP supports this feature.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 225
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

25) Click OK & Next. The status of your ITSP will be displayed.

The configured ITSPs at which you are already registered are marked in
green.
The configured ITSPs at which you are not yet registered are marked in or-
ange.
26) Click Next followed by Finish.

9.7.6.2 How to Deactivate Internet Telephony

Prerequisites
You are in the Provider configuration and activation for Internet Telephony
window.

Step by Step
1) Leave the No call via Internet check box selected.
2) Click OK & Next twice.

9.7.7 Stations
In the Select a station - ... window, you can configure the stations connected to
the communication system.
Proceed as follows:
1) Configure ISDN stations
ISDN stations include ISDN phones or ISDN fax devices, for example. ISDN
stations can only be configured if an S0 interface has been set up as the in-
ternal S0 port.
2) Configure analog stations
Analog stations include analog phones or analog fax devices, for example.
3) Configure UP0 stations
UP0 stations include system phones such as OpenStage 60 T.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
226 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

4) Configure DECT stations

DECT stations are Cordless/DECT phones. DECT stations can only be con-
figured if one or more Cordless base stations are connected and if the DECT
phones have been registered at the base stations. Manager E is used to per-
form the configuration. For more detailed information on the Cordless config-
uration, see Administrator Documentation, Configuring the Integrated Cord-
less Solution
5) Configure the IP and SIP stations
IP and SIP stations include LAN phones or WLAN phones, for example.

9.7.7.1 How to Configure ISDN Stations

Prerequisites
You are in the Select a station - ISDN Devices window of the Basic Installa-
tion wizard.
The S0 ports to which the ISDN phones are to be connected must be configured
as internal S0ports.

Step by Step
1) If you want a different direct inward dialing number for the station than the
call number, enter a DID number for the station under DID in the row of the
desired station:
• Only for a point-to-point connection:
Click in the desired field and type in the DID number using the keyboard.
The DID number may also be identical to the internal station number.
• Only for a point-to-multipoint connection:
Select an MSN in the desired field via the drop-down list. The station can
be internally reached via the internal station number 101, for example,
and externally via the MSN 654321.
• For point-to-point and point-to-multipoint connections:
Select the entry xxx - modifiable (xxx is the internal station number) via
the drop-down list in the desired field and type in the DID number using
the keyboard or select an MSN from the drop-down list.
2) Enter the internal station number for the subscriber under Call No in the ap-
propriate row of the desired subscriber. You can use the preset phone num-
ber or assign some other free number.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 227
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

3) In the row of the desired station, under Name, enter a name in the format
Last Name, First Name or First Name Last Name.

NOTICE: The name can consist of up to 16 characters, but

must not include any diacritical characters such as umlauts or
special characters.

4) If you want to set up a fax box for the subscriber (which can be used with the
UC clients myPortal for Desktop or myPortal for Outlook, for example),
proceed as follows:
a) In the row of the desired station, in the Fax No. field, enter the desired in-
ternal fax number at which the user can receive internal fax messages.
b) If you want to configure a DID number for the fax box, enter the desired
external fax number under which the subscriber can receive external fax
messages in the Fax Direct Inward Dialing field in the row of the desired
subscriber.
5) Choose the desired Class of Service group in the row of the desired sub-
scriber from the Class of Service drop-down list.
6) To add the subscriber to a call pickup group, select a call pickup group from
the Call pickup group drop-down list in the row of the desired subscriber.
7) Make the settings described under this step only if needed:
a) Click in the row of the desired ISDN station on the pencil icon Edit.

b) In the Clip/Lin field, enter a phone number (DID number or MSN) to be

displayed at the called party's extension instead of the own phone num-
ber in the case of an external call.

NOTICE: This feature must be released by the network

provider.

NOTICE: At least one DID number should be configured.

If not, the system does not take into account caller's CLIP

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
228 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

number and the internal call number is formatted and sent

as the Calling Party Number for the external call.
c) Select the type of ISDN terminal from the Extension Type drop-down list.
d) Select a DID number from the drop-down list in the Direct inward dialing
for Internet Telephony area. A drop-down list is displayed for every ac-
tive ITSP.

NOTICE: The DID for Internet Telephony field is not vis-

ible if Internet telephony is not configured or if no Internet
Telephony Service Provider has been activated.
e) From the Call signaling internal drop-down list, select and assign one
of a total of eight possible acoustic call signals for internal calls. The sta-
tion then will then send the modified ringing tone to other internal stations,
thus enabling its calls to be distinguished from other internal stations (de-
fault: Ring type 1).
f) From the Call signaling external drop-down list, select and assign one
of a total of three possible acoustic call signals for external calls (default:
Ring type 1).
g) Click on OK & Next.
h) Change the station flags as needed. For a description of the station flags,
see Administrator Documentation, Station > Station > Station Parame-
ters.
i) Click on OK & Next.
8) If you want to configure additional ISDN stations, click on Store data and re-
peat steps 1 through 7.
9) Click on OK & Next.

9.7.7.2 How to Configure Analog Stations

Prerequisites
You are in the Select a station - A/B Phones window of the Basic Installation
wizard.
A mainboard or a board with analog interfaces is available.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 229
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) If you want a different direct inward dialing number for the station than the
call number, enter a DID number for the station under DID in the row of the
desired station:
• Only for a point-to-point connection:
Click in the desired field and type in the DID number using the keyboard.
The DID number may also be identical to the internal station number.
• Only for a point-to-multipoint connection:
Select an MSN in the desired field via the drop-down list. The station can
be internally reached via the internal station number 101, for example,
and externally via the MSN 654321.
• For point-to-point and point-to-multipoint connections:
Select the entry xxx - modifiable (xxx is the internal station number) via
the drop-down list in the desired field and type in the DID number using
the keyboard or select an MSN from the drop-down list.
2) Enter the internal station number for the subscriber under Call No in the ap-
propriate row of the desired subscriber. You can use the preset phone num-
ber or assign some other free number.
3) In the row of the desired station, under Name, enter a name in the format
Last Name, First Name or First Name Last Name.

NOTICE: The name can consist of up to 16 characters, but

must not include any diacritical characters such as umlauts or
special characters.

4) If you want to set up a fax box for the subscriber (which can be used with the
UC clients myPortal for Desktop or myPortal for Outlook, for example),
proceed as follows:
a) In the row of the desired station, in the Fax No. field, enter the desired in-
ternal fax number at which the user can receive internal fax messages.
b) If you want to configure a DID number for the fax box, enter the desired
external fax number under which the subscriber can receive external fax
messages in the Fax DID field in the row of the desired subscriber.
5) Choose the desired Class of Service group in the row of the desired sub-
scriber from the Class of Service drop-down list.
6) To add the subscriber to a call pickup group, select a call pickup group from
the Call pickup group drop-down list in the row of the desired subscriber.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
230 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

7) Make the settings described under this step only if needed:

a) Click in the row of the desired analog station on the pencil icon Edit.

b) In the Clip/Lin field, enter a phone number (DID number or MSN) to be

displayed at the called party's extension instead of the own phone num-
ber in the case of an external call.

NOTICE: This feature must be released by the network

provider.

NOTICE: At least one DID number should be configured.

If not, the system does not take into account caller's CLIP
number and the internal call number is formatted and sent
as the Calling Party Number for the external call.
c) Select the analog terminal type (Fax, for instance) from the Extension
Type drop-down list.
d) Select a DID number from the drop-down list in the Direct inward dialing
for Internet Telephony area. A drop-down list is displayed for every ac-
tive ITSP.

NOTICE: The DID for Internet Telephony field is not vis-

ible if Internet telephony is not configured or if no Internet
Telephony Service Provider has been activated.
e) From the Call signaling internal drop-down list, select and assign one
of a total of eight possible acoustic call signals for internal calls. The sta-
tion then will then send the modified ringing tone to other internal stations,

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 231
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

thus enabling its calls to be distinguished from other internal stations (de-
fault: Ring type 1).
f) From the Call signaling external drop-down list, select and assign one
of a total of three possible acoustic call signals for external calls (default:
Ring type 1).
g) Click on OK & Next.
h) Change the station flags as needed. For a description of the station flags,
see Administrator Documentation, Station > Station > Station Parame-
ters.
i) Click on OK & Next.
8) If you want to configure another analog station, click on Store data and re-
peat steps 1 through 7.
9) Click on OK & Next.

9.7.7.3 How to Configure UP0 Stations

Prerequisites
You are in the Select a station - UP0 Stations window of the Basic Installa-
tion wizard.
A mainboard or a board with UP0interfaces is available.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
232 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) If you want a different direct inward dialing number for the station than the
call number, enter a DID number for the station under DID in the row of the
desired station:
• Only for a point-to-point connection:
Click in the desired field and type in the DID number using the keyboard.
The DID number may also be identical to the internal station number.
• Only for a point-to-multipoint connection:
Select an MSN in the desired field via the drop-down list. The station can
be internally reached via the internal station number 101, for example,
and externally via the MSN 654321.
• For point-to-point and point-to-multipoint connections:
Select the entry xxx - modifiable (xxx is the internal station number) via
the drop-down list in the desired field and type in the DID number using
the keyboard or select an MSN from the drop-down list.
2) Enter the internal station number for the subscriber under Call No in the ap-
propriate row of the desired subscriber. You can use the preset phone num-
ber or assign some other free number.
3) In the row of the desired station, under Name, enter a name in the format
Last Name, First Name or First Name Last Name.

NOTICE: The name can consist of up to 16 characters, but

must not include any diacritical characters such as umlauts or
special characters.

4) If you want to set up a fax box for the subscriber (which can be used with the
UC clients myPortal for Desktop or myPortal for Outlook, for example),
proceed as follows:
a) In the row of the desired station, in the Fax No. field, enter the desired in-
ternal fax number at which the user can receive internal fax messages.
b) If you want to configure a DID number for the fax box, enter the desired
external fax number under which the subscriber can receive external fax
messages in the Fax Direct Inward Dialing field in the row of the desired
subscriber.
5) Choose the desired Class of Service group in the row of the desired sub-
scriber from the Class of Service drop-down list.
6) To add the subscriber to a call pickup group, select a call pickup group from
the Call pickup group drop-down list in the row of the desired subscriber.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 233
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

7) Make the settings described under this step only if needed:

a) Click in the row of the desired station on the pencil icon Edit.

b) In the Clip/Lin field, enter a phone number (DID number or MSN) to be

displayed at the called party's extension instead of the own phone num-
ber in the case of an external call.

NOTICE: This feature must be released by the network

provider.

NOTICE: At least one DID number should be configured.

If not, the system does not take into account caller's CLIP
number and the internal call number is formatted and sent
as the Calling Party Number for the external call.
c) Select the type of TDM terminal from the Extension Type drop-down list.
d) Do not change the default selection in the Language drop-down list. This
setting has no relevance for TDM terminals.
e) Select a DID number from the drop-down list in the Direct inward dialing
for Internet Telephony area. A drop-down list is displayed for every ac-
tive ITSP.

NOTICE: The DID for Internet Telephony field is not vis-

ible if Internet telephony is not configured or if no Internet
Telephony Service Provider has been activated.
f) From the Call signaling internal drop-down list, select and assign one
of a total of eight possible acoustic call signals for internal calls. The sta-
tion then will then send the modified ringing tone to other internal stations,

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
234 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

thus enabling its calls to be distinguished from other internal stations (de-
fault: Ring type 1).
g) From the Call signaling external drop-down list, select and assign one
of a total of three possible acoustic call signals for external calls (default:
Ring type 1).
h) Click on OK & Next.
i) Change the station flags as needed. For a description of the station flags,
see Administrator Documentation, Station > Station > Station Parame-
ters.
j) Click on OK & Next.
8) If you want to configure another UP0 station, click on Store data and repeat
steps 1 through 7.
9) Click on OK & Next.

9.7.7.4 How to Configure DECT Stations

Prerequisites
You are in the Select a station - DECT Stations window of the Basic Installa-
tion wizard.
To configure DECT stations, a base station must be connected, and the DECT
phones must be logged in there. If this is not the case, skip this window. You
can also configure the DECT stations later (see Administrator Documentation,
Configuring Stations).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 235
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) If you want a different direct inward dialing number for the station than the
call number, enter a DID number for the station under DID in the row of the
desired station:
• Only for a point-to-point connection:
Click in the desired field and type in the DID number using the key-
board. The DID number may also be identical to the internal station
number.
• Only for a point-to-multipoint connection:
Select an MSN in the desired field via the drop-down list. The station
can be internally reached via the internal station number 101, for exam-
ple, and externally via the MSN 654321.
• For point-to-point and point-to-multipoint connections:
Select the entry xxx - modifiable (xxx is the internal station number) via
the drop-down list in the desired field and type in the DID number using
the keyboard or select an MSN from the drop-down list.
2) Enter the internal station number for the subscriber under Call No in the
appropriate row of the desired subscriber. You can use the preset phone
number or assign some other free number.
3) If you want to set up a fax box for the subscriber (which can be used with
the UC clients myPortal for Desktop or myPortal for Outlook, for exam-
ple), proceed as follows:
a) In the row of the desired station, in the Fax No. field, enter the desired
internal fax number at which the user can receive internal fax mes-
sages.
b) If you want to configure a DID number for the fax box, enter the desired
external fax number under which the subscriber can receive external fax
messages in the Fax Direct Inward Dialing field in the row of the de-
sired subscriber.
4) In the row of the desired station, under Name, enter a name in the format
Last Name, First Name or First Name Last Name.

NOTICE: The name can consist of up to 16 characters, but

must not include any diacritical characters such as umlauts
or special characters.

5) Choose the desired Class of Service group in the row of the desired sub-
scriber from the Class of Service drop-down list.
6) To add the subscriber to a call pickup group, select a call pickup group from
the Call pickup group drop-down list in the row of the desired subscriber.
7) If you want to change the DECT phone code (PIN), enter the new code
in the row of the desired subscriber under Mobile code. The DECT sub-
scribers must log on at the base station again with this code.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
236 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

8) Make the settings described under this step only if needed:

a) Click in the row of the desired station on the pencil icon Edit.

b) In the Clip/Lin field, enter a phone number (DID number or MSN) to be

displayed at the called party's extension instead of the own phone num-
ber in the case of an external call.

NOTICE: This feature must be released by the network

provider.

NOTICE: At least one DID number should be con-

figured. If not, the system does not take into account
caller's CLIP number and the internal call number is for-
matted and sent as the Calling Party Number for the ex-
ternal call.
c) Select the type of cordless device from the Extension Type drop-down
list.
d) Do not change the default selection in the Language drop-down list.
This setting has no relevance for cordless devices.
e) Select a DID number from the drop-down list in the Direct inward dial-
ing for Internet Telephony area. A drop-down list is displayed for every
active ITSP.

NOTICE: The DID for Internet Telephony field is not

visible if Internet telephony is not configured or if no In-
ternet Telephony Service Provider has been activated.
f) From the Call signaling internal drop-down list, select and assign one
of a total of eight possible acoustic call signals for internal calls. The
station then will then send the modified ringing tone to other internal sta-

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 237
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

tions, thus enabling its calls to be distinguished from other internal sta-
tions (default: Ring type 1).
g) From the Call signaling external drop-down list, select and assign one
of a total of three possible acoustic call signals for external calls (de-
fault: Ring type 1).
h) Click on OK & Next.
i) Change the station flags as needed. For a description of the station
flags, see Administrator Documentation, Station > Station > Station
Parameters.
j) Click on OK & Next.
9) If you want to configure another station, click on Store Data and repeat
steps 1 through 8.
10) Click on OK & Next.

9.7.7.5 How to Configure IP and SIP Stations

Prerequisites
You are in the Select a station - LAN Phones window.
A functional wireless LAN network is needed to operate WLAN phones.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
238 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) If you want a different direct inward dialing number for the station than the
call number, enter a DID number for the station under DID in the row of the
desired station:
• Only for a point-to-point connection:
Click in the desired field and type in the DID number using the key-
board. The DID number may also be identical to the internal station
number.
• Only for a point-to-multipoint connection:
Select an MSN in the desired field via the drop-down list. The station
can be internally reached via the internal station number 101, for exam-
ple, and externally via the MSN 654321.
• For point-to-point and point-to-multipoint connections:
Select the entry xxx - modifiable (xxx is the internal station number) via
the drop-down list in the desired field and type in the DID number using
the keyboard or select an MSN from the drop-down list.
2) Enter the internal station number for the subscriber under Call No in the
appropriate row of the desired subscriber. You can use the preset phone
number or assign some other free number.
3) In the row of the desired station, under Name, enter a name in the format
Last Name, First Name.

NOTICE: The name can consist of up to 16 characters, but

should not include any diacritical characters such as um-
lauts or special characters. The name specified here will
be entered as the Last Name at the UC clients, but can be
edited there.

4) Select the type of IP station (e.g., "System Client" or "SIP Client") from the
Type drop-down list in the row of the desired station.
5) If you want to set up a fax box for the subscriber (which can be used with
the UC clients myPortal for Desktop or myPortal for Outlook, for exam-
ple), proceed as follows:
a) In the row of the desired station, in the Fax No. field, enter the desired
internal fax number at which the user can receive internal fax mes-
sages.
b) If you want to configure a DID number for the fax box, enter the desired
external fax number under which the subscriber can receive external fax
messages in the Fax Direct Inward Dialing field in the row of the de-
sired subscriber.
6) Choose the desired Class of Service group in the row of the desired sub-
scriber from the Class of Service drop-down list.
7) To add the subscriber to a call pickup group, select a call pickup group from
the Call pickup group drop-down list in the row of the desired subscriber.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 239
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

8) Make the settings described under this step only if needed or for a SIP
phone:
a) Click in the row of the desired station on the pencil icon Edit.

b) For SIP phones: If the SIP phone is to be operated in conjunction with

a dual-mode mobile phone, enter the dialout prefix followed by the tele-
phone number of the mobile phone (e.g., 0016012345678) in the Mo-
bility area under Mobile phone number. In addition, select this SIP
client from the Web Feature ID drop-down list. (see Administrator Docu-
mentation, Dual-Mode Telephony).
c) In the Clip/Lin field, enter a phone number (DID number or MSN) to be
displayed at the called party's extension instead of the own phone num-
ber in the case of an external call.

NOTICE: This feature must be released by the network

provider.

NOTICE: At least one DID number should be con-

figured. If not, the system does not take into account
caller's CLIP number and the internal call number is for-
matted and sent as the Calling Party Number for the ex-
ternal call.
d) Select the language for the menu controls on the phone from the Lan-
guage drop-down list.
e) From the Call signaling internal drop-down list, select and assign one
of a total of eight possible acoustic call signals for internal calls. The
station then will then send the modified ringing tone to other internal sta-
tions, thus enabling its calls to be distinguished from other internal sta-
tions (default: Ring type 1).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
240 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

f) From the Call signaling external drop-down list, select and assign one
of a total of three possible acoustic call signals for external calls (de-
fault: Ring type 1).
g) Only for SIP phones: Enable the Authentication active check box.
h) Only for SIP phones: Enter the authentication password in the Pass-
word and Confirm password fields.
i) Only for SIP phones: Enter the user ID for the authentication in the SIP
User ID / Username field.
j) Only for SIP phones: Enter the associated zone for the authentication in
the Realm field.
k) Click on OK & Next.
l) Change the station flags as needed. For a description of the station
flags, see Administrator Documentation, Station > Station > Station
Parameters.
m) Click on OK & Next.
9) If you want to configure another IP station, click on Store data and repeat
steps 1 through 8.
10) Click on OK & Next. A list of all configured stations appears. This list is ef-
fectively a dial plan.
11) If required, click Print to print out the data of the configured stations.
12) Then click OK & Next.

9.7.8 Configuring UC Suite

You can perform the automatic configuration of the UC solution UC Suite in the
Automatic Configuration of the Application Suite window.

NOTICE: This window appears only if Package with UC Suite

was selected during the application selection in the Initial Instal-
lation wizard.

9.7.8.1 How to Configure the UC Suite

Prerequisites
You are in the Automatic Configuration of Application Suite window.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 241
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) If no UC Booster Card is integrated into the communication system, click on
OK & Next. The configuration will be skipped.
2) If the UC Booster Card is integrated into the communication system, click
on Execute function. The UC Suite is configured automatically. Once the
progress bar shows 100%, click on OK & Next.

9.7.9 Configuring UC Smart Mailboxes

If you are using the UC solution UC Smart, you can perform the automatic
configuration of the UC Smart voicemail boxes (Smart VM, Smart VoiceMail) in
the Automatic Configuration of Smart VM window.

NOTICE: This window appears only if Package with UC Smart

was selected during the application selection in the Initial Instal-
lation wizard.

9.7.9.1 How to Configure UC Smart Voicemail Boxes

Prerequisites
You are in the Automatic Configuration of Smart VM window.

Step by Step
1) If the UC Smart voicemail boxes are not to be used, click on OK & Next. The
configuration of the voicemail boxes will be skipped.
2) If the UC Smart voicemail boxes are to be used, click on Execute func-
tion. Voicemail boxes are then automatically configured for the first 100 sub-
scribers. Once the progress bar shows 100%, click on OK & Next.

NOTICE: Existing UC Smart or UC Smart AutoAttendant

voicemail boxes are irrevocably deleted in the process.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
242 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

9.7.10 Conference Server Settings

The MeetMe Conference settings window can be used to define the call
numbers and the dial-in numbers for conferences.

9.7.10.1 How to Edit the Conference Server Settings

Prerequisites
You are in the Configure MeetMe Conference window.

Step by Step
1) Enter a phone number for the conference in the Phone Number field.
2) Enter the dial-in number for the conference (conference DID) with which sub-
scribers can dial into an existing conference in the Direct inward dialing
field.
3) Click on OK & Next.

9.7.11 E-mail Delivery (Optional)

You can configure the delivery of e-mails in the Configure E-Mail Forwarding
window. These e-mails notify users of voicemail and fax messages and
administrators of system messages.
You have the following options:
• Configuring the Sending of E-mails
You can specify an external E-mail server via which the e-mails are to be
sent by OpenScape Business. Voicemails, fax messages and internal sys-
tem messages can then be sent via this E-mail server to one or several dif-
ferent configurable e-mail addresses.

NOTICE: Entering the e-mail server is important if an e-mail

with a link to the installation file(s) is to be automatically sent
to the users of the UC Suite.

9.7.11.1 How to Configure the Sending of E-mails

Prerequisites
An e-mail account with a password exists with an e-mail provider, and you know
the access data for this account.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 243
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

You are in the Configure E-Mail Forwarding window.

Step by Step
1) Enter the Outgoing mail server (SMTP) for the e-mail server to be used for
sending e-mails, e.g., smtp.web.de. Ask your e-mail provider for the outgo-
ing mail server if required.

NOTICE: Make sure that the name of the outgoing mail serv-
er can be resolved. If not, you must start the e-mail sending
function via Service Center > E-mail Forwarding and then
enter the IP address of the outgoing mail server instead of its
name.

2) If a secure connection is required, enable the corresponding check box. If re-

quired, check with your e-mail provider whether this option needs to be en-
abled.
3) Enter the User Name of the e-mail account, e.g.,: john.doe.
4) Enter the Password for the e-mail account and repeat it in the Confirm
Password field.
5) Enter the E-mail Address, for example: [email protected].
6) If you want to test the entered e-mail settings immediately, proceed as fol-
lows:
a) Click on Test Connection.
b) Under Send to e-mail address, enter the e-mail address of any e-mail
box that you can access. The test e-mail will be sent to that e-mail ad-
dress.
c) Under Subject in the e-mail, enter a descriptive text so that you can
identify the e-mail in your e-mail inbox.
d) Click on Send Test E-mail. The e-mail settings are verified, and the e-
mail is sent to the specified e-mail address.
e) Check whether the e-mail has arrived in your e-mail inbox.
f) If the e-mail was sent correctly, proceed to the next step.
g) If the e-mail delivery failed, click Back and correct your e-mail settings.
7) Enter the E-mail Address 1 to get a notification email when ALI tolerance
has been used. You may also enter a second email address.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
244 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X
Closing Activities

8) Click on OK & Next followed by Finish. The basic installation is finished. Be-
fore you perform the backup mentioned in the wizard, you should activate
the licenses.

9.8 Closing Activities

After the initial installation and the basic installation with the WBM have been
completed, some important settings must still be made for the operation of
OpenScape Business.
Proceed as follows:
1) Activate and assign licenses
The licenses procured with OpenScape Business must be activated within
a period of 30 days. The time period begins the next time you log on to the
WBM. After this time period expires, the communication system will only op-
erate in restricted mode. Once the licenses have been activated successful-
ly, they must be assigned to the stations and lines. In a standalone system,
system-wide features are enabled automatically upon activation.
2) Provision the UC Smart client for installation (only for UC Smart)
3) How to Provision the UC Suite Clients for Installation (for UC Suite only)
The UC Suite clients are part of UC Suite. The installation files for the UC
Client are accessible via the WBM and can be made available to the IP sta-
tions automatically or manually.
In addition, the administrator has the option of performing a silent installa-
tion. The silent installation/uninstallation is a command-line based method
to automatically install, uninstall or modify UC Suite PC clients on a PC with-
out requiring any further user inputs. For more information, see Administrator
Documentation, Silent Installation/Uninstallation for UC Suite PC Clients.
4) Perform a data backup
All previous changes to OpenScape Business must be backed up. The back-
up can be stored as a backup set on a USB storage device or in the internal
network.

9.8.1 How to Activate and Assign the Licenses

Prerequisites
You are logged on to the WBM with the Advanced profile.
You know the LAC (License Authorization Code) for releasing the license and
have a user ID and password for accessing the license server.
You need Internet access to connect to the license server.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 245
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) Activate license online:
a) In the navigation bar, click on Setup.
b) In the navigation tree, click Wizards > Basic Installation.
c) Click on Edit to start the Licensing wizard.

d) Enter the appropriate LAC in the License Authorization Code (LAC)

field.
e) Select the check box I have the user name and password for the Li-
cense Server and want to log on.
f) Enter the User Name and Password for logging into the License Server.
g) Click on OK & Next. The connection to the license server is established,
and the licenses are released.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
246 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

2) Assign licenses to stations:

a) Click on License Management in the navigation bar.
b) In the navigation tree, navigate to the desired type of subscriber under
Local User Licenses > .... You will be shown a list of all subscribers of
the selected subscriber type.
c) In the row of the desired subscriber, select the check box in the User li-
cense column (first column with check boxes).

d) Activate the user-oriented licenses in the row of the desired subscriber by

selecting the appropriate check boxes.

NOTICE: User-oriented licenses can be assigned to a

subscriber only if a station license (user license) was as-
signed to the subscriber earlier (step c).
e) Click on OK & Next. A check is performed to determine whether there
are enough licenses for your assignment.
If sufficient licenses are available, the licensing of the subscriber is com-
pleted.
f) If licenses are missing, the errors are indicated by displaying a check box
shaded in red. Correct these errors and repeat step e.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 247
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

3) Assign licenses to trunks:

a) In the navigation tree, click CO trunks. The number of trunk licenses pur-
chased will be displayed in the CO trunks area.
b) For SIP trunks: In the License demand for number of simultaneous In-
ternet calls in this node area, enter the number of Internet calls that can
be conducted simultaneously via an ITSP.
c) For S2M trunks: In the S2M area, in the row of the desired slot, select the
number of desired B-channels in the drop-down list of the Demands col-
umn.
d) For T1 trunks (only for the U.S.): In the T1 area, in the row of the desired
slot, select the number of desired B-channels in the drop-down list of the
Demands column.
e) Click on OK & Next.

NOTICE: The number of licensed SIP trunks and S2M/T1

trunks must not exceed the number of trunk licenses pur-
chased.

9.8.2 How to Provision the UC Smart Client for Installation

Prerequisites
You are logged on to the WBM with the Advanced profile.
The hardware and software for using UC @work are available.

NOTICE: Licenses are required to use the UC Smart client my-

Portal @work.

Step by Step
1) Click on Service Center in the navigation bar.
2) Click on Software in the navigation tree.
3) Click on the Download icon of myPortal @work and save the installation file
on a shared network drive.
4) Send the two installation files to the users of myPortal @work.
5) Alternatively, you can also send the users of myPortal @work the link with
which they can access the installation file:
https://<IP address of the communication system>/manage-
ment/downloads/myPortalAtWorkSetup.exe

9.8.3 How to Provision the UC Suite Clients for Installation

Prerequisites
You are logged on to the WBM with the Advanced profile.
The hardware and software for using the UC Suite are available.

NOTICE: Licenses are required to use the UC Suite clients.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
248 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Step by Step
1) To enable the installation files to be provided automatically to a station, make
sure that the following steps have been performed:
a) The e-mail addresses of the stations and the associated subscriber data
must have either been already imported via an XML file or entered later
under Setup > UC Suite > User Directory.
b) An e-mail server must have been specified.

NOTICE: You can also enter an E-mail server later under

Service Center > E-mail Forwarding.

All subscribers whose e-mail addresses are known receive an e-mail with a
link to the installation directory of the UC clients and Getting Started Instruc-
tions. The installation folder also includes a Readme file with information on
installing the software on client PCs.
2) If the required steps for automatic notification are not fulfilled, you can also
make the installation files available manually. To do this, proceed as follows:
a) Click on Service Center in the navigation bar.
b) Click on Software in the navigation tree.
c) Click on the desired UC client and save the zipped installation file on a
shared network drive.
d) Click in the navigation tree on Documents and select User Guide from
the drop-down list.
e) Click on the documentation of the desired UC client and save the docu-
mentation file on a shared network drive.
f) Send the zipped installation file and the documentation file to the users of
the UC clients by e-mail or inform the users about the storage location of
these files.
g) The zip file with the installation files also includes a Readme file. Notify
the users that the installation of the UC clients must be performed in ac-
cordance with the installation notes in the Readme file.
3) Alternatively, you can also send the UC users links through which they can
directly access the installation files of the UC clients.
a) Click on Service Center in the navigation bar.
b) Click on Software in the navigation tree.
c) Click on the Show Application Links button. You will be presented with
multiple links, depending on the used operating system and the desired
UC client. For example:
https://<IP address of the communication system>/man-
agement/downloads/install-common.zip

9.8.4 How to Perform a Data Backup

Prerequisites
You are logged on to the WBM with the Advanced profile.
For a backup to a USB storage device (USB stick or USB hard disk), the USB
device must be connected to the USB server port.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 249
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X
Commissioning of IP Phones

NOTICE: For more information on backing up data, see Admin-

istrator Documentation, Immediate Backup.

Step by Step
1) Click on Backup and Restore in the navigation bar.
2) In the navigation tree, click Backup - Immediate.
3) Enter a comment for the backup set in the Comment field in the Name area
so that the backup set can be easily identified if needed later for a restore.
Avoid the use of diacritical characters such as umlauts and special charac-
ters in your input.
4) Activate the target drive on which the backup set is to be saved in the De-
vices area.
5) Click on OK & Next. The progress of the backup process is displayed in a
separate window.
6) The backup was successful if the message Backup completed successful-
ly! appears. Click on Finish.
7) If you are using a USB stick as the backup medium, wait until the LED of the
USB stick stops blinking. This ensures that the backup has been successful-
ly saved on the USB stick. You can then safely remove the USB stick.
8) This completes the initial startup with WBM. Exit the WBM by right-clicking
the Logout link on the top right of the screen and then close the window.

NOTICE: If a new software version for the communication

system is available, you will be notified about this on the
home page of the WBM, provided the Internet connection
was set up correctly. If a new software version is available,
perform an update (see Administrator Documentation, Updat-
ing the Communication System).

9.9 Commissioning of IP Phones

The commissioning of IP phones can be facilitated by the existence of a DHCP
server that supplies an IP phone with important (network-specific) data that is
needed to log into the communication system.

Network-Specific Data
In order to log into the communication system, an IP phone requires some net-
work-specific data. This data can be stored in the DHCP server or be entered
directly at the IP phone. The advantage of a DHCP server is that all connected
IP phones are automatically supplied with the relevant data.
The following data is required by the IP phone:
• IP address of the communication system
• IP address of DLS server
In addition, the IP phone needs its own call number. This must be entered man-
ually when logging in at the phone.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
250 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

Registration of SIP Phones

For security reasons, it is recommended that SIP phones register at the com-
munication system. To do this, the registration information on the IP phone and
the communication system must match.
The following data is required for the login:
• SIP user ID
• SIP password
• SIP realm (optional)
Use a non-trivial SIP password that complies with the following rules:
• At least 8 characters
• At least one uppercase letter (A - Z)
• At least one lowercase letter (a - z)
• At least one digit (0-9)
• At least one special character
Use a SIP user ID that does not include the phone number.

NOTICE: More information on configuring SIP telephones

can be found at http://wiki.unify.com/wiki/SIP_de-
vices_configuration_examples.

Using the Internal DHCP Server

If the internal DHCP server of the communication system is used, the net-
work-specific data will already be stored there. In order to enable an IP phone
to register at the communication system, only the specified call number must be
entered at the IP phone. In the case of SIP phones, the SIP registration data at
the SIP phone and at the communication system must match.

Using an External DHCP Server with Network-specific Data

If an external DHCP server is used, the network-specific data must be stored
there. In order to enable an IP phone to register at the communication system,
only the specified call number must be entered at the IP phone. In the case of
SIP phones, the SIP registration data at the SIP phone and at the communica-
tion system must match.

Using an External DHCP Server without Network-specific Data

If an external DHCP server in which the network-specific data cannot be stored
is used, this must be entered at the IP phone. To enable an IP phone to regis-
ter at the communication system, the defined call number and IP address of the
communication system must be entered at the phone, and the settings for the
Deployment Service may need to be changed. In the case of SIP phones, the
SIP registration data at the SIP phone and at the communication system must
match.

9.9.1 How to Configure an IP Phone

Prerequisites
The IP phone is connected to the internal network and operational.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 251
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

NOTICE: The sample configuration described here uses an

OpenStage 40/60/80 IP system telephone. The same settings
must also be made for any other IP phone. For more informa-
tion, refer to the manual supplied with your IP phone.

Step by Step
1) To reach the administration mode of the IP system telephone, press the ap-
propriate key for the Settings/Applications menu on the phone.
2) Scroll through the Settings options until Admin and confirm this with the
OK key.
3) Enter administrator password (123456 by default) and confirm your selec-
tion with the OK key.
4) If you are using the DHCP server of the communication system in the inter-
nal network, skip the next step.
5) If you are not using the DHCP server of the communication system in the in-
ternal network, you will need to enter the IP addresses of the Deployment
Server (DLS) and the communication system so that the software of the IP
system telephone can be updated automatically. This applies only to IP sys-
tem telephones. Proceed as follows:
a) Scroll to Network and confirm your selection with the OK key.
b) Scroll to Update service (DLS) and confirm your selection with the
OK key.
c) Scroll to DLS address and confirm your selection with the OK key.
d) Specify the IP address of the communication system (192.168.1.2 by
default) as the Deployment Server and confirm your entry with the OK
key.
e) Scroll to Save & Exit and confirm your selection with the OK key.
f) Scroll to IPv4 configuration and confirm your selection with the OK
key.
g) Scroll to Route (default) and confirm your selection with the OK key.
h) Specify the IP address of the communication system ( 192.168.1.2 by
default) and confirm your entry with the OK key.
i) Scroll to Save & Exit and confirm your selection with the OK key.
j) Navigate one menu level back with the Back key.
6) Specify the call number of the phone:
a) Scroll to System and confirm your selection with the OK key.
b) Scroll to Identity and confirm your selection with the OK key.
c) Scroll to Terminal number and confirm your selection with the OK key.
d) Enter the set phone number (e.g., 120) and confirm your selection with
the OK key.
e) Scroll to Save & Exit and confirm your selection with the OK key.
7) Navigate one menu level back with the Back key.
8) If the system telephone needs to be restarted due to the changes made, the
menu item Restart will appear in the Admin menu. Confirm the Restart
with the OK key and then also confirm Yes with the OK key. The system
telephone performs a reboot and logs in to the communication system.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
252 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

9.9.2 How to Configure a SIP Phone

Prerequisites
The SIP phone is connected to the customer LAN and operational.

NOTICE: The configuration described here uses an OpenStage

40/60/80 SIP system telephone as an example. The same set-
tings must also be made for another SIP phone. For more infor-
mation, refer to the manual supplied with your SIP phone.

Step by Step
1) To reach the administration mode of the SIP system telephone, press the
appropriate key for the Settings/Applications menu on the phone.
2) Scroll through the Settings options until Administrator (Admin)
and confirm this with the OK key.
3) Enter administrator password (123456 by default) and confirm your selec-
tion with the OK key.
4) If you are using the DHCP server of the communication system in the inter-
nal network, skip the next step.
5) If you are not using the DHCP server of the communication system in the
internal network, you will need to enter the IP addresses of the Deployment
Server (DLS) and the communication system so that the software of the
SIP system telephone can be updated automatically. This applies only to
SIP system telephones. Proceed as follows:
a) Scroll to Network and confirm your selection with the OK key.
b) Scroll to Update service (DLS) and confirm your selection with the
OK key.
c) Scroll to DLS address and confirm your selection with the OK key.
d) Specify the IP address of the communication system (192.168.1.2 by
default) as the Deployment Server and confirm your entry with the OK
key.
e) Scroll to Save & Exit and confirm your selection with the OK key.
f) Scroll to IPv4 configuration and confirm your selection with the
OK key.
g) Scroll to Route (default) and confirm your selection with the OK
key.
h) Specify the IP address of the communication system ( 192.168.1.2
by default) and confirm your entry with the OK key.
i) Scroll to Save & Exit and confirm your selection with the OK key.
j) Navigate one menu level back with the Back key.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 253
Initial Setup for OpenScape Business X

6) Specify the SNTP time settings:

a) Scroll to Date and time and confirm your selection with the OK key.
b) Scroll to Time source and confirm your selection with the OK key.
c) Scroll to SNTP IP address and confirm your selection with the OK
key.
d) Specify the IP address of the communication system ( 192.168.1.2
by default) and confirm your entry with the OK key.
e) Scroll to Timezone offset and confirm your selection with the OK
key.
f) Enter the deviation between the local time and UTC (Universal Time
Coordinated) in hours (Germany: 1) and confirm this with the OK button.
g) Scroll to Save & Exit and confirm your selection with the OK key.
h) Navigate one menu level back with the Back key.
7) Specify the call number of the phone:
a) Scroll to System and confirm your selection with the OK key.
b) Scroll to Identity and confirm your selection with the OK key.
c) Scroll to Terminal number and confirm your selection with the OK
key.
d) Enter the set phone number (e.g., 120) and confirm your selection with
the OK key.
e) Scroll to Save & Exit and confirm your selection with the OK key.
8) Specify the SIP authentication data:
a) Scroll to Registration and confirm your selection with the OK key.
b) Scroll to SIP Session and confirm your selection with the OK key.
c) Note the Realm, or enter a new realm (e.g., OSBIZ-SIP), if necessary.
d) Note the User ID, or enter a new user ID (e.g., SIP-120), if neces-
sary.
e) Specify a Password for registering at the SIP server.
f) Scroll to Save & Exit and confirm your selection with the OK key.
9) Use the Back key to go back to the Admin menu.
10) If the system telephone needs to be restarted due to the changes made,
the menu item Restart will appear in the Admin menu. Confirm the
Restart with the OK key and then also confirm Yes with the OK key. The
system telephone performs a reboot and logs in to the communication sys-
tem.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
254 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster

10 Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster

This section describes the initial installation and configuration of the OpenScape
Business UC Booster at the OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 communication
system. Note that a distinction is made here, depending on whether the
OpenScape Business UC Booster Card or the OpenScape Business UC
Booster Server is to be used for the UC Booster functionality.

The initial setup of the OpenScape Business UC Booster is carried out using
the OpenScape Business Assistant administration program (web-based man-
agement, also called WBM in short).
The detailed administration of any features that are not covered by the initial
setup is described in subsequent chapters.

Initial Setup of the OpenScape Business UC Booster Card

The OpenScape Business UC Booster Card is installed in the OpenScape Busi-
ness X3/X5/X8 communication system and configured for operation. This is fol-
lowed by the configuration of the OpenScape Business UC Booster functionali-
ty.
The specific installation steps required for the initial setup differ, depending on
whether the UC Booster Card is being put into operation with the OpenScape
Business X3/X5/X8 communication system for the first time or whether it is be-
ing integrated later in an existing and already configured OpenScape Business
X3/X5/X8 communication system.
Overview of the installation steps for both options:

Integration in a New Communication System Integration in an Existing Communication System

Backing up the Configuration Data of the Communica-

tion System on page 261

Installing the UC Booster Card Installing the UC Booster Card

The UC Booster Card is installed in the OpenScape The UC Booster Card is installed in the OpenScape
Business X3/X5/X8 communication system. Business X3/X5/X8 communication system.
For a description, see the OpenScape Business Ser- For a description, see the OpenScape Business Ser-
vice Documentation, Hardware Installation - Descrip- vice Documentation, Hardware Installation - Descrip-
tion of the Boards. tion of the Boards.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 255
Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster

Integration in a New Communication System Integration in an Existing Communication System

Configuring the UC Booster Card Configuring the UC Booster Card

The configuration of the UC Booster Card is per- The configuration of the UC Booster Card is per-
formed together with the initial installation of the formed later on an already configured OpenScape
OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 communication sys- Business X3/X5/X8 communication system.
tem.
For a description, see Integration into the Customer
For a description, see Integration into the Customer LAN on page 186.
LAN on page 186.
For the specifics of the configuration, see Configuring
the UC Booster Card on page 262

Basic Configuration Basic Configuration

The basic configuration is performed together with the The basic configuration is performed later on an al-
initial installation of the OpenScape Business X3/X5/ ready configured OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8
X8 communication system. communication system.
For a description, see Basic Configuration on page For a description, see Basic Configuration on page
197. 197.
For the special features of the basic configuration, see
Basic Configuration on page 269

Closing Activities Closing Activities

The closing activities (including the licensing of the UC The closing activities (including the licensing of the UC
Clients) are performed together with the initial installa- Clients) are performed together with the initial installa-
tion of the OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 communi- tion of the OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 communi-
cation system. cation system.
For a description, see Closing Activities on page 245. For a description, see Closing Activities on page 245.
For the special features of the closing activities, see
Closing Activities on page 269

Initial Installation of the OpenScape Business UC Booster Server

The OpenScape Business UC Booster Server is integrated together with the
OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 communication system in the customer LAN.
The OpenScape Business communication software for the OpenScape Busi-
ness UC Booster Server, which provides the OpenScape Business UC Booster
functionality, is installed on the Linux operating system SLES 12 SP5 64 bit. The
communication software can be operated directly on a Linux server or in a vir-
tual environment with VMware vSphere. The installation of the Linux operating

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
256 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster

system is described in the installation guide OpenScape Business, Installing the

Linux Server.
The OpenScape Business UC Booster Server has its own WBM. This WBM
is used for software updates, backing up the configuration data and diagnos-
tics of the OpenScape Business UC Booster Server. The initial installation of
the OpenScape Business UC Booster server is performed with the WBM of the
communication system.
The specific installation steps required for the initial installation differ, depending
on whether the UC Booster Server is being put into operation with the OpenS-
cape Business X3/X5/X8 communication system for the first time or whether it
is being connected later to an existing and already configured OpenScape Busi-
ness X3/X5/X8 communication system.
Overview of the installation steps for both options:

Integration in a New Communication System Integration in an Existing Communication System

Backing up the Configuration Data of the Communica-

tion System

Installing the Linux Server Installing the Linux Server

The installation of the Linux server is described in the The installation of the Linux server is described in the
OpenScape Business Linux Server Installation Guide. OpenScape Business Linux Server Installation Guide.

Installing the Communication Software Installing the Communication Software

Configuring the UC Booster Server Configuring the UC Booster Server

The configuration of the UC Booster Server is per- The configuration of the UC Booster Server is per-
formed together with the initial installation of the formed later on an already configured OpenScape
OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 communication sys- Business X3/X5/X8 communication system.
tem.
For a description, see Integration into the Customer
For a description, see Integration into the Customer LAN on page 186.
LAN on page 186.
For the specifics of the configuration, see Configuring
the UC Booster Server on page 266

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 257
Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster
Prerequisites for the Initial Setup

Integration in a New Communication System Integration in an Existing Communication System

Basic Configuration Basic Configuration

The basic configuration is performed together with the The basic configuration is performed later on an al-
initial installation of the OpenScape Business X3/X5/ ready configured OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8
X8 communication system. communication system.
For a description, see Basic Configuration on page For a description, see Basic Configuration on page
197. 197.
For the special features of the basic configuration, see
Basic Configuration on page 269

Closing Activities Closing Activities

The closing activities (including the licensing of the UC The closing activities (including the licensing of the UC
Clients) are performed together with the initial installa- Clients) are performed together with the initial installa-
tion of the OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 communi- tion of the OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 communi-
cation system. cation system.
For a description, see the Closing Activities on page For a description, see Closing Activities on page 245.
245.
For the special features of the closing activities, see
Closing Activities on page 269

10.1 Prerequisites for the Initial Setup

Meeting the requirements for the initial setup ensures the proper operation of
the OpenScape Business UC Booster.

General
Depending on the used hardware (phones, ...) and the existing infrastructure,
the following general conditions apply:
• The OpenScape Business X3/X5/X8 communication system is configured
and ready for use.
• The LAN infrastructure (Internet routers, switches, etc.) is present and us-
able.
• The IP phones are connected to the customer LAN.
• A broadband Internet connection is recommended for software updates and
remote access.
• All licenses required for the OpenScape Business UC Booster are present
(e.g., UC clients, Gate View, Directory Services, etc.). When integrating in an
already licensed communication system, there is no activation period.
• An IP address scheme exists and is known.
• A dial plan (also called a numbering plan) is present and known.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
258 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster

For UC Booster Card

The following requirements must be observed for the operation of the UC
Booster Card.
• OpenScape Business Hardware:
The UC Booster Card is installed.
• Switch:
The switch through which the UC Booster Card is connected with the com-
munication system should be IPv6-enabled for the UC Booster Card to re-
ceive an IP address during the initial setup.
If the switch is not IPv6-enabled, the red LED of the communication system
flashes. In this case, the Admin port of the system must be connected to the
second LAN port of the UC Booster Card using an additional Ethernet ca-
ble. This causes the UC Booster Card to automatically receive an IPv4 IP
address via the IPv6 protocol. As soon as the UC Booster Card is reachable
over IP, the red LED of the communication system goes out. The desired IP
address for the UC Booster Card can then be entered during the initial setup.
Communication between the system and UC Booster Card now takes place
through the IPv4 connection of the switch.

NOTICE: The additional Ethernet cable should be left con-

nected in case a restart or a reload is required.
• Fan kit:
The UC Booster Card requires an additional fan. The fan kit depends on the
communication system.
• Housing cover:
For the OpenScape Business X3W, a new housing cover is required for the
UC Booster Card fan kit.
When migrating from HiPath 3000 systems, new housing covers to accom-
modate the UC Booster Card fan kit are required for OpenScape Business
X3W/X5W and X3R/X5R.
• Communication software:
The software of the communication system must be upgraded to the latest
released software version. Note that the image including the UC Booster
Card software must be used for this purpose.
• Web browsers:
The Admin PC is used for the initial setup of the UC Booster Card with the
OpenScape Business Assistant (WBM). The WBM is browser-based and is

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 259
Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster

thus independent of the operating system. A screen resolution of 1024 x 768

or higher is required.
The following HTML 5-enabled web browsers are supported:
– Microsoft Internet Explorer
– Microsoft Edge
– Mozilla Firefox
– Google Chrome
For the supported browser versions, see Software release notes. If an older
version of the web browser is installed, you will need to install an up-to-date
version before you can start the initial setup of the system.

NOTICE: Unrestricted network access is needed between

Mainboard and UC Booster Card.

For UC server Booster

The following requirements must be observed for the operation of the UC
Booster Server.
• Linux server:
The Linux server required for OpenScape Business S was installed as per
the instructions in the OpenScape Business Linux Server Installation Guide,
was integrated into the customer LAN, and is ready for use.
• OpenScape Business communication software:
The installation DVD with the OpenScape Business communication software
is available. After the software installation, the software of the communica-
tion system and communication software of the UC Booster Server must be
updated separately to the same, latest released software version.
• DVD with Linux operating system SLES 12 SP5 64 bit
The Linux DVD may be needed during the installation of the OpenScape
Business communication software, since some software packages (RPM) re-
quired for the communication software may need to installed later from this
DVD.
• Web browsers:
For the initial setup of the UC Booster Server with the OpenScape Business
Assistant (WBM), either the Linux server or the Admin PC can be used. The
WBM is browser-based and is thus independent of the operating system. A
screen resolution of 1024 x 768 or higher is required.
The following HTML 5-enabled web browsers are supported:
– Microsoft Internet Explorer (Admin PC).
– Microsoft Edge
– Mozilla Firefox (Linux server / Admin PC)
– Google Chrome
For the required browser version, see Software release notes. If an older
version of the web browser is installed, you will need to install an up-to-date
version before you can start the initial setup of the system.
• Firewall:
When connected to the Internet, a firewall is needed for the Linux server to
prevent unauthorized access from outside. After installing Linux, the Linux

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
260 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster
Backing up the Configuration Data of the Communication System

firewall is enabled. The installer of the communication software adjusts the

firewall settings so that the communication software can be operated proper-
ly. The ports for the communication software are opened, and all other ports
are closed.
If an external firewall is used in the network, the Linux firewall must be dis-
abled, and the addresses and ports required for the communication software
must be opened (see Used Ports on page 272).

10.2 Backing up the Configuration Data of the Communication System

Before installing the OpenScape Business UC Booster, the existing
configuration data of the OpenScape Business communication system must
always be saved by creating a backup.
The backup is performed at the WBM of the OpenScape Business communica-
tion system.
It can be stored on different backup media (such as a USB drive or a network
drive).

10.2.1 How to Perform a Data Backup

Prerequisites
You are logged in at the WBM of the communication system with the Advanced
profile.
For a data backup on a USB device, the USB device must be connected to the
USB server interface of the communication system.

Step by Step
1) Click on Backup and Restore in the navigation bar.
2) In the navigation tree, click Backup - Immediate.
3) Enter a comment for the backup set in the Comment field in the Name area
so that the backup set can be easily identified if needed later for a restore.
Avoid the use of diacritical characters such as umlauts and special charac-
ters in your input.
4) Activate the target drive on which the backup set is to be saved in the De-
vices area.
5) Click on OK & Next. The progress of the backup process is displayed in a
separate window.
6) The backup was successful if the message Backup completed successful-
ly! appears. Click on Finish.
7) If you are using a USB stick as the backup medium, wait until the LED of the
USB stick stops blinking. This ensures that the backup has been successful-
ly saved on the USB stick. You can then safely remove the USB stick.
8) This completes the backup with the WBM. Exit the WBM by right-clicking the
Logout link on the top right of the screen and then close the window.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 261
Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster
Commissioning the UC Booster Card

10.3 Commissioning the UC Booster Card

The commissioning of the UC Booster Card includes the installation in the
OpenScape Business communication system and the initial configuration for
proper operation.
After completing the configuration successfully, a software update must be per-
formed.

10.3.1 Installing the UC Booster Card

The UC Booster Card is integrated into the OpenScape Business
communication system. The slot used for the UC Booster Card depends on the
communication system.
The installation of the UC Booster Card is described in detail in the service doc-
umentation Hardware Installation under the section "Description of the Boards".
The UC Booster Card can be integrated into the following OpenScape Business
communication systems:
• OpenScape Business X3R and X5R (with OCCMR mainboard)
UC Booster Card with additional fan kit.
• OpenScape Business X3W and X5W (with OCCM mainboard)
UC Booster Card with additional fan kit.
For the OpenScape Business X3W, a new housing cover for the fan kit is al-
so required.
• OpenScape Business X8 (with OCCL mainboard)
UC Booster Card with additional fan kit.

10.3.2 Configuring the UC Booster Card

During the configuration, the basic settings for the operation of UC Booster
Card are set up.
The configuration of the UC Booster Card is performed with the Initial Instal-
lation wizard in the WBM of the communication system. The description of the
configuration can be found in the section Initial installation of OpenScape Busi-
ness X3/X5/X8.
The Initial Installation wizard of the WBM includes the initial configuration of
the entire communication system. The following configuration components are
important for the operation of the OpenScape Business UC Booster Card:
• IP address of the UC Booster Card
The UC Booster Card requires a separate IP address from the network seg-
ment of the communication system.
• Selection of the UC solution
You can select whether the UC solution UC Smart or UC Suite is to be used.
Changing the IP address of the UC Booster Card or UC solution leads to a
restart of the communication system.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
262 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster
Commissioning the UC Booster Server

10.3.3 Updating the Software for the UC Booster Card

In order to enable the UC Booster Card to operate correctly, the software of the
communication system needs to be updated. All missing software components
for the UC Booster Card will then be installed.
If the software of the communication system is already up-to-date, the system
must be updated again with the latest software to ensure that all components
required for the UC Booster Card functionality are now installed.
The software update can be optionally performed via the Internet or via an im-
age file, which can be obtained from the Software Download Server. When per-
forming the update via the image file, make sure that the image file containing
the UC Booster Card portions (osbiz..._ocab.tar) is used.

10.3.3.1 How to Perform a Software Update

Prerequisites
Access to the Internet is available.
You are logged on to the WBM with the Advanced profile.

Step by Step
1) Click on Service Center in the navigation bar.
2) In the navigation tree, click on Software Update > Update via Internet. The
currently installed software version is displayed to you.
3) Click on OK & Next.
4) Read the license agreement (EULA) fully and then enable the radio button I
accept the license agreement.
5) Click on OK & Next.
6) Select the radio button Start Action - Immediately / Immediately after
transfer.
7) Click on OK & Next. The software update is loaded into the communication
system in the background and automatically activated after the transmission.
After two restarts, the software is up-to-date.

NOTICE: You can close the browser window at any time.

8) You can check the current status of the update with the WBM under Service
Center > Software Update > Status.

10.4 Commissioning the UC Booster Server

The commissioning of the the UC Booster Server includes the installation of
the OpenScape Business communication software on the Linux server and the
initial configuration for proper operation.
After completing the configuration successfully, a software update must be per-
formed.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 263
Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster

10.4.1 Installing the Communication Software

The OpenScape Business communication software is installed on the Linux
server using the OpenScape Business DVD.
Make sure that the IP addresses and network masks to be configured are ap-
propriate for the customer LAN.

DHCP Server
A DHCP server automatically assigns a unique IP address to each IP station (IP
phones, PCs, etc.) and provides the IP stations with network-specific data such
as the IP address of the default gateway, for example.
Either an external DHCP server (e.g., the DHCP server of the Internet router
or of the communication system) or the DHCP server of the Linux server can
be used as a DHCP server. If the DHCP server of the Linux server is used, the
external DHCP server must be disabled. The configuration of the Linux DHCP
server can be performed during the installation of the OpenScape Business
communication software.

Virtual Environment
The communication software can run in a virtual environment. To do this, the
virtualization software (host operating system) must be first installed and con-
figured on the server PC. Linux is then installed as a guest operating system.
Within the Linux operating system, the communication software is installed last
(see the OpenScape Business Linux Server Installation Guide for more details).
Use of snapshots on virtual machines (VM):
Snapshots can be a valuable maintenance mechanism, for example, to perform
a fast rollback to a predefined operating state of the VM after a mass distribu-
tion script has failed.
• Snapshots cannot be created during normal operation. While a snapshot is
being taken, the current operating state of the virtual machine is frozen. Con-
sequently, connected devices and applications such as IP phones or the UC
clients can lose the connection to the server.
• Snapshots can cause internal server processes to lose their synchroniza-
tion, which means that the stable operation of the communication system
can then no longer be guaranteed. A server reboot following the snapshot
should therefore also be planned within the maintenance timeframe.
• Previous snapshots should not remain on the production environment during
normal operation.
• Snapshots can be taken during a planned maintenance window or within the
framework of the installation.
• Snapshots are used internally by backup tools such as VDP or VDR. It must
be ensured that these backup operations are schedules outside of business
hours and that the snapshots generated by these tools are deleted at the
end of the operation.
More information regarding snapshots can be found the VMware knowl-
edge base (KB). A good starting point is the KB article 1025279 – Best Prac-
tices for virtual machine snapshots in the VMware environment (http://
kb.vmware.com/kb/1025279).

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
264 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster

10.4.1.1 How to Install the Communication Software

Prerequisites
• The SLES 12 SP5 operating system has been correctly installed and started
on the Linux server.
• DVD or .ISO file with OpenScape Business communication software.
• DVD or .ISO file with the Linux operating system SLES 12 SP5 64-bit for any
subsequent installation of software packages (RPM) that may be required.
• The root access data (user name and password) for logging into the Linux
server is available.

IMPORTANT: The OpenScape Business communication soft-

ware overwrites any existing configuration files (e.g., for DHCP,
FTP, Postfix, etc.) during the installation.

Step by Step
1) Log into the Linux server with root privileges.
2) Insert the OpenScape Business DVD or .ISO file into the DVD drive.
3) Confirm the message with Run. The "Welcome" window appears.
4) Select the desired setup language (e.g., English) and click Start. The rest
of the installation is described here for the English language.
5) Select the desired product from the list and click on Select. A check is per-
formed to determine whether the hardware meets all the requirements for
the installation. A warning is displayed for minor shortfalls in meeting the
requirements. After confirmation, the installation can then be continued. For
severe shortfalls, the installation is canceled automatically.
6) A check is performed to determine whether additional RPM packages need
to be installed. If yes, confirm this with Confirm. If this occurs, you will
need to switch back to SLES 12 DVD or .ISO file later.
7) A window with the terms of the license (i.e., the End User License Agree-
ment or EULA) appears. Read the terms of the license and accept the li-
cense agreement with Yes.
8) If a DHCP server is already present in the customer LAN (e.g., the DHCP
server of the Internet router), stop the configuration of the Linux DHCP
server here with No and proceed to step 12 to continue.

NOTICE: In order to ensure that the software of system

telephones can be updated automatically even when using
an external DHCP server, you have two options:
a) The IP address of the Linux server must be entered as
the DLS address at each system telephone.
b) The network-specific data must be entered at the exter-
nal DHCP server. The parameters for this can be found un-
der /var/log/OPTI.txt.

9) If you want to use the Linux DHCP server, click on Yes to enable and con-
figure the Linux DHCP server.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 265
Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster

10) Enter the following values (preset with default values):

• Default Route: IP address of the default gateway; as a rule, the IP ad-
dress for the Internet router, e.g., 192.168.5.1.
• Domain (optional): the domain specified during the Linux installation,
e.g., <customer>.com
• DNS-Server (optional): IP address of the DNS server specified dur-
ing the Linux installation. If no DNS server is available in the inter-
nal network, you can enter the IP address of the Internet router (e.g.,
192.168.5.1) here.
• SNTP Server: IP address of the internal or external NTP server.
• DLS/DLI Server: IP address of DLS server, i.e., the IP address of the
Linux server (e.g.: 192.168.5.10).
• Subnet: appropriate subnet for the IP address range, e.g.:
192.168.5.0.
• Netmask: Subnet mask of the Linux server that was specified during
the Linux installation, e.g.: 255.255.255.0.
• IP range begin and IP range end: IP address range from which the
DHCP server may assign IP addresses, e.g.: 192.168.5.100 to
192.168.5.254.
11) Click on Continue.
12) After the installation, the Linux operating system needs to be restarted.
Select the check box PC Reboot and confirm with Continue.
13) If additional RPM packages need to be installed, you will be prompted to
insert the SLES 12 DVD or .ISO file. Insert the DVD or .ISO file and con-
firm with Continue. Following the successful installation of the RPM pack-
ages, reinsert the OpenScape Business DVD or .ISO file and confirm this
with Continue, followed by Run.
14) The OpenScape Business communication software is installed. The operat-
ing system then automatically performs a restart.
15) After the restart, log in with the user account that was set up earlier during
the Linux installation.
16) Right-click on the DVD drive icon on the desktop and select the menu item
Eject. Remove the OpenScape Business DVD from the DVD drive.

NOTICE: It takes a few minutes until all components of the

OpenScape Business communication software are active.

10.4.2 Configuring the UC Booster Server

During the initial configuration, the basic settings for the operation of the UC
Booster Server are defined.
The configuration of the UC Booster Server is performed with the Initial Instal-
lation wizard of the WBM of the communication system. A description of the
configuration can be found in the section "Initial installation of OpenScape Busi-
ness X".
The Initial Installation wizard of the WBM includes the initial configuration of
the entire communication system. The following configuration components are
important for the operation of the OpenScape Business UC Booster Server:

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
266 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster

• Selection of the UC solution

You can select whether the UC solution UC Smart or UC Suite is to be used.
The IP address of the Linux server must be entered for this purpose.
Changing the UC solution leads to a restart of the communication system.
In addition, the IP address of the communication system must be made known
at the WBM of the UC Booster Server.

10.4.2.1 Announcing the IP Address of the Communication System

Prerequisites
The UC Booster Server is integrated in the customer LAN and operational.
The OpenScape Business communication system is operational.

Step by Step
1) Start the web browser on the Linux PC and invoke the WBM of the OpenS-
cape Business server at the following address:
https://<IP address of the Linux server>, e.g.,
https://192.168.1.10, or directly from Linux Server GUI 127.0.0.1
or localhost.
2) If the browser reports a problem with a security certificate, install the certifi-
cate (using the example of Internet Explorer V10).
a) Close the web browser.
b) Open the web browser with administrator rights by clicking the right
mouse button on the web browser icon and selecting the menu item
Run as administrator from the context menu.
c) Allow the User Account Control.
d) Open the WBM of the OpenScape Business server at the following ad-
dress:
https://<IP address of the Linux server>, e.g.,
https://192.168.1.10
e) Click on Continue to this website.
f) Click on the message Certificate Error in the navigation bar of the web
browser.
g) Click on View Certificates.
h) Click on Install Certificate (only visible with administrator rights).
i) Select the option Local Computer and confirm with Next.
j) Select the option Place all certificates in the following store, click
Browse and specify Trusted Root Certification Authorities.
k) Confirm with OK and then with Next and Finish.
l) Confirm the certificate import with OK and close the certificate window
OK.
m) Close the web browser.
n) Start the web browser again (without administrator rights) and invoke
the WBM of the OpenScape Business sever at the following address:
https://<IP address of the Linux server>, e.g.,
https://192.168.1.10

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 267
Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster

3) Click on the language code at the top right and select the language in
which the user interface of the WBM is to be displayed from the menu. The
Login page will be displayed in the selected language.
4) In the field under Login, enter the default user name administra-
tor@system for access as an administrator.

NOTICE: If you go to the Password field after entering

administrator, @system will be added automatically.

5) In the second field under Login, enter the dStart the web browser on the
Linux PC and invoke the WBM of the OpenScapeefault password admin-
istrator for access as an administrator.
6) Click Login.
7) The following steps are only required once when first logging on to the
WBM:
a) Reenter the default password administrator in the Password field.
b) Enter a new password in the New Password and Confirm New Pass-
word fields to protect the system against misuse. Note case usage and
the status of the Num und CapsLock keys. The password is displayed
as a string of asterisks (*).

NOTICE: The password must be at least 8 characters

long and include a digit. Make sure that you remember
your new password.
c) Click Login.
d) Select the current date and enter the correct time.
e) Click OK & Next. You are automatically logged out of the WBM.
f) In the field under Login, enter the default user name administra-
tor@system for access as an administrator.

NOTICE: If you go to the Password field after entering

administrator, @system will be added automatically.
g) In the second field under Login, enter your new password for access as
an administrator.
h) Click Login. The home page of the WBM appears.
i) Click on Administrators in the navigation bar.
j) In the Administrators List, select the check box before the list item Ad-
ministrator.
k) Click Edit.
l) In the User role drop-down list, select the user profile Expert.
m) Click OK & Next.
n) Log out from the WBM via the Log Out link at the top right.
o) Log into the WBM again with the default user name administra-
tor@system and the newly defined password.
8) In the navigation bar, click on Expert Mode.
9) Click Maintenance > Configuration in the navigation tree.
10) On the Change Gateway IP Address tab, under Gateway IP Address,
enter the IP address of the communication system (e.g., 192.168.1.2).
11) Click Apply.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
268 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster
Basic Configuration

10.4.3 Updating the Software for the UC Booster Card

In order to ensure that the UC Booster Server operates correctly, the software of
the communication system and the communication software of the UC Booster
Server must be updated to the same software level.
If the software of the communication system is already up-to-date, only the soft-
ware of the UC Booster Server needs to be updated.
The software update can be optionally performed via the Internet or via an im-
age file, which can be obtained from the Software Download Server. When up-
dating the UC Booster Server via the image file, make sure that the image file
containing the UC Booster Server portions (osbiz..._pcx.tar) is used.

10.5 Basic Configuration

During the basic configuration, the most important settings for the operation of
the OpenScape Business UC Booster are defined.
The basic configuration for both the UC Booster Card and the UC Booster Serv-
er are performed by using the Basic Installation wizard of the WBM of the
communication system. A description of the basic configuration can be found in
the section Initial Installation of OpenScape Business X.
The basic configuration covers the configuration of the entire communication
system. The following configuration items are important for the operation of the
OpenScape Business UC Booster:
• Station data
Special phone numbers required for the operation of the OpenScape Busi-
ness UC Booster can be adapted as required. For example, the call number
of the UC Suite voicemail box must be specified here.
• Configuring the UC Booster Card
If a UC Booster Card is integrated in the communication system, the auto-
matic configuration of the UC Booster Card must be initiated.
• Meet-Me conference settings
The Meet-Me conference feature is available with OpenScape Business UC
Booster. The pre-assigned call number and the pre-assigned dial-in number
for the Meet-Me conference can be changed.

10.6 Closing Activities

After the initial installation and the basic installation with the WBM have been
completed, some important settings must still be made for the operation of the
OpenScape Business UC Booster.
The closing activities for both the UC Booster Card and the UC Booster Server
are performed with the WBM of the communication system. A description of the
closing activities can be found in the online help or in the OpenScape Business
Administrator Documentation under the section "Initial Installation of OpenS-
cape Business X".
The following closing activities are important for the operation of the OpenS-
cape Business UC Booster:

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 269
Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster
Uninstalling the Communication Software (UC Booster Server only)

• Activate and assign licenses

If the OpenScape Business UC Booster is being integrated in an already li-
censed communication system, the licenses must be activated immediate-
ly in order to use its functionality. If the OpenScape Business UC Booster is
being integrated in a communication system that has not yet been licensed,
the licenses must be activated within a period of 30 days. Once the licenses
have been activated successfully, they must be assigned to the stations. In
a standalone system, system-wide features are enabled automatically upon
activation.
• Provision the UC Clients for installation
The UC clients are part of the UC Suite. The installation files for the UC
Client are accessible via the WBM and can be made available to the IP sta-
tions automatically or manually.
• Perform a data backup
All previous changes to OpenScape Business must be backed up. The back-
up can be stored as a backup set on a USB storage device or on the internal
network.
For the UC Booster Card, it is sufficient to perform a backup of the commu-
nication system. For the UC Booster Server, the data of the communication
system and the data of the communication software of the UC Booster Serv-
er must be backed up separately.

10.7 Uninstalling the Communication Software (UC Booster Server only)

The software communication can be uninstalled via a text console.

10.7.1 How to Uninstall the Communication Software

Step by Step
1) Open a terminal (e.g., a GNOME terminal).
2) Enter the command su (for superuser = root) in the shell interface and con-
firm it by pressing the Enter key.
3) Enter the password for the "root" user in the shell interface and confirm it by
pressing the Enter key.
4) Enter the command oso_deinstall.sh in the shell interface and confirm
it by pressing the Enter key. Follow the instructions of the uninstallation pro-
gram.

10.8 Upgrading from the UC Booster Card to the UC Booster Server

In order to upgrade an OpenScape Business communication system with an
integrated UC Booster Card to an OpenScape Business communication system
with a connected UC Booster Server, the following steps must be performed as
described below:

Upgrade Steps
Perform the following steps in sequence:

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
270 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster

1) Back up the configuration data

Perform a backup of the configuration data of the communication system.
For a description of the backup procedure, see Backing up the Configura-
tion Data of the Communication System on page 261.
2) Change the IP address of the UC Booster Card
Using the Initial Installation wizard in the WBM of the communication sys-
tem, change the IP address of the UC Booster Card to an unused IP ad-
dress. The UC clients will be disconnected.
For a description of how to change the IP address, see System Settings on
page 187.
3) Change the application selection
Using the Initial Installation wizard in the WBM of the communication
system, change the application selection from Package with UC Suite to
Package with UC Suite on OSBiz UC Booster Server if you are using
UC Suite (or from Package with UC Smart to Package with UC Smart on
OSBiz UC Booster Server if you are using UC Smart) and enter the for-
mer IP address of the UC Booster Card as the IP address of the UC Boost-
er Server.
For a description of the application selection, see UC Solution on page
195.
4) Installing the Linux Server
The Linux operating system approved for the UC Booster Server must be
installed on the Linux server.
A description of the Linux installation can be found in the OpenScape Busi-
ness Linux Server Installation Guide.
5) Change the IP address of the UC Booster Server.
The former IP address of the UC Booster Card must be specified as the IP
address of the UC Booster Server (= IP address of the Linux server). You
can enter the IP address of the Linux server during the installation of the
Linux operating system or change this later using YaST.
For a description of IP address assignment during the Linux installation,
see the OpenScape Business Linux Server Installation Guide.
6) Install the communication software
The OpenScape Business communication software must be installed on
the Linux server.
For a description of the installation of the communication software, see In-
stalling the Communication Software.
7) Configuring the UC Booster Server
Enter the IP address of the communication system in the WBM of the UC
Booster Server.
For a description of IP address assignment of the communication system,
see Configuring the UC Booster Server on page 266.
8) Restart the communication software
Restart the UC Booster Server communication software via the WBM of the
UC Booster Server.
For a description of the restart, see Administrator Documentation, Restart-
ing the UC Application.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 271
Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster
Used Ports

9) Update the software

The software of the communication system and the UC Booster Server
must be updated to the same software level.
For a description of the software update, see Updates.
10) Restore the configuration data
Restore the backed up configuration data of the communication system in
the WBM of the communication system. The communication system and
the communication software are subsequently restarted, and the connec-
tions to the UC Suite clients are restored.
For a description of how to restore data, see Administrator Documentation,
Restore.

10.9 Used Ports

The OpenScape Business system components use different ports, which may
need to be opened in the firewall as required. For the ports of the web-based
clients (e.g., myPortal to go), port forwarding must be configured in the router.
An actual and complete list of all used ports of OpenScape Business is avail-
able in the "Interface Management Database" (IFMD) which can be accessed
via the Partner Portal of Unify (https://unify.com/en/partners/partner-portal.

NOTICE: The ports identified with "O" in the list below are op-
tional, i.e., are not permanently open in the firewall (e.g., the
TFTP port is open only when Gate View is activated).

Description TCP UDP Port number OpenScape UC OpenScape UC

Business Booster Business Booster
X Card S Server
System components
Admin Portal (https) X 443 X X X X
CAR Update X 12061 X X
Registration
CAR Update Server X 12063 X X
CLA X 61740 O O O
CLA Auto Discovery X 23232 X X X
Communication Client X 8101 X X X X
Installer
Csta Message X 8900 X X X
Dispatcher (CMD)
CSTA Protocol X 7004 X X
Handler (CPH)
Csta Service Provider X 8800 X X X
(CSP)
DHCP X 67 X

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
272 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster

Description TCP UDP Port number OpenScape UC OpenScape UC

Business Booster Business Booster
X Card S Server
DLI X 18443 X X X
DLSC X 8084 X X X
DNS X X 53 X
FTP X 21 O O
FTP Passive X 40000-40040 O O
Gate View X 8000-8010 O O O
HFA X 4060 X X
HFA Secure X 4061 X X
Instant Messaging X 8101 X X X X
(http)
JSFT X 8771 X X X
JSFT X 8772 X X X
LAS Cloud Service X 8602 X
LDAP server X 389 X X X
Manager E X 7000 X
MEB SIP X 15060 X X
NAT traversal (NAT-T) X 4500 X
NTP X 123 X
Openfire Admin (https) X 9091 X X X
OpenScape Business X 8101 X X X X
Auto Update Service
(http)
OpenScape Business X 8778 X X X
Multisite
OpenScape Business X 8101 X X X
myReports (http)
OpenScape Business X 8808 X X X
status server
OpenScape Business X X 8779 X X X
user portal
Postgres X 5432 X X X X
RTP (embedded) X 29100-30530 X X X X
RTP (server) X 29100-30888 X X X X
SIP (server) X X 5060 X X
SIP TLS SIPQ (server) X 5061 X X
SIP TLS Subscriber X 5062 X X
(server)

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 273
Initial Setup of OpenScape Business UC Booster

Description TCP UDP Port number OpenScape UC OpenScape UC

Business Booster Business Booster
X Card S Server
SNMP (Get/Set) X 161 X X
SNMP (traps) X 162 X X
TFTP X 69 O O O
VSL X 8770-8780 X X X
Webadmin for Clients X 8803 X X X X
XMPP Connection X 5262 X X X
Manager
XMPP server X 5269 X X X
Web-based clients
Web-based clients X 8801 X X X X
(http)
Web-based clients X 8802 X X X X
(https)

NOTICE: For security reasons, we recommend that only https

be used for the web-based clients and that port forwarding be
set up from external TCP/443 to internal TCP/8802.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
274 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Discontinued components
Main Distribution Frame MDFU (Optional)

11 Discontinued components
This section contains information that is relevant to discontinued components,
and are included here only for reference.

11.1 Main Distribution Frame MDFU (Optional)

Telephones, CO trunks, etc., can either be connected directly to the boards of
the OpenScape Business X3W and OpenScape Business X5W communication
systems or via an external main distribution frame MDFU.
The main distribution frame MDFU (Main Distribution Frame Universal) provides
nine slots for splitting and jumper strips.
Dimensions:
• Height = 367.0 mm (3.36 in)
• Width = 328.8 mm
• Depth = 125.4 mm

Figure 22: Main Distribution Frame MDFU

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 275
Discontinued components
Connection Cable to External Main Distribution Frame (Optional)

NOTICE: If you use a main distribution frame from a third-par-

ty vendor rather than the MDFU, you must observe the manufac-
turer's instructions for installation and protective grounding.

Figure 23: Splitting and Jumper Strip - Numbering of Connectors

11.1.1 How to Mount the Main Distribution Frame MDFU to a Wall

Prerequisites
A strong wall with enough space for the installation of the main distribution
frame MDFU is available.

Step by Step
1) Attach the enclosed drilling template at the desired location.
2) Drill the holes.
3) Insert the wall anchors into the drill holes and screw in the screws, leaving
approx. 5 mm projecting.
4) Remove the housing cover of the MDFU.
5) Hang the MDFU on the mounting brackets and align it.
6) Tighten the screws.

11.2 Connection Cable to External Main Distribution Frame (Optional)

Telephones, CO trunks, etc., can be connected to OpenScape Business X3W
and OpenScape Business X5W either via the main distribution frame MDFU
or via another external main distribution frame. A number of different options
are available for connecting the communication system with a main distribution
frame.

CABLU S30269-Z41-A30

CABLU (24 DA) with

• six Wieland screw clamps for connecting directly to the edge connectors
on the boards of the OpenScape Business X3W and OpenScape Business
X5W communication systems
• Jumper strip for installation in the MDFU

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
276 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Discontinued components

Figure 24: CABLU S30269-Z41-A30

Open-end cable S30267-Z322-Axxx

Open-end cable (24 DA) with six Wieland screw clamps for connecting direct-
ly to the edge connectors on the boards of the OpenScape Business X3W and
OpenScape Business X5W communication systems. The cable must be con-
nected manually to a splitting/jumper strip in the MDFU or any other external
main distribution frame.

Figure 25: Open-end cable S30267-Z322-Axxx

CABLU S30269-Z100-A11/-A21
CABLU (16 DA) with
• one SIPAC 1 SU jack for connection to the backplane connector X8 of the
OpenScape Business X5W communication system
• Splitting strip for installation in the MDFU

CABLU S30269-Z100-A14/-A24
CABLU (24 DA) with
• two SIPAC 1 SU jacks for connection to the backplane connectors X8 and
X9 of the OpenScape Business X5W communication system
• Jumper strip for installation in the MDFU

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 277
Discontinued components

CABLU S30267-Z346-A30
CABLU with
• one SIPAC 1 SU jack for connection to the backplane connector X8 of the
OpenScape Business X5W communication system
• CHAMP connector for connecting an external main distribution frame

11.2.1 How to Connect a Connection Cable to the External Main

Distribution Frame (Optional)
Prerequisites

WARNING:
Risk of electric shock through contact with live wires
Use separate ground wires to provide protective grounding for your com-
munication system and any main distribution frames used before con-
necting telephones and lines.

The housing cover of the communication system is not mounted.

Step by Step
1) Select the appropriate connection cable based on the communication sys-
tem and the board.

If Then
Communica- Board Connection cable
tion system
OpenS- All periph- Connection to the external MDF: CABLU
cape Busi- eral boards with six Wieland screw clamps (for direct
ness X3W and the OC- connection to the edge connectors of the
CM, OCCMA boards) and jumper strip for 24 DA:
and OCCMB
• S30269-Z41-A30: 3 m length
mainboard
Connection to the MDFU or to another
external main distribution frame: Open-
end cable (24 DA) with six Wieland screw
clamps (for direct connection to the edge
connectors of the boards):
• S30267-Z322-A100: 10 m length

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
278 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Discontinued components

If Then
Communica- Board Connection cable
tion system
OpenScape All periph- Connection to the MDFU: CABLU with six
Business eral boards Wieland screw clamps (for direct connec-
X5W (except for tion to the edge connectors of the boards)
peripheral and jumper strip for 24 DA:
boards in SI-
• S30269-Z41-A30: 3 m length
PAC format)
and the main- Connection to the MDFU or to another
board OCCM, external main distribution frame: Open-
OCCMA and end cable (24 DA) with six Wieland screw
OCCMB clamps (for direct connection to the edge
connectors of the boards):
• S30267-Z322-A100: 10 m length
2) Select one of the following connectivity options for the communication sys-
tem:
• If you are using a CABLU with six Wieland screw clamps, attach the
screw clamps to the desired edge connectors of the desired boards.
• If you are using a CABLU with one SIPAC 1 SU jack, connect the cable to
the backplane connector X8.
3) Attach the connection cable to the communication system using cable ties.
4) Select one of the following options to connect to the MDFU or any other ex-
ternal main distribution frame:
• If you use the MDFU and a CABLU with a splitting strip or a jumper strip,
install the strip in the MDFU.
For information on the main characteristics of the MDFU and on the num-
bering of the splitting and jumper strips see Main Distribution Frame MD-
FU (Optional).
• If you use the MDFU and an open-end cable, connect the cable to the de-
sired splitting/jumper strip in the MDFU.
Procedure:
Strip the cable wires.
Strip the cable shield of the cable over a length of about 3 cm. Cut the
drain wire to about 2.5 cm and fix it on the cable shield by wrapping it with
tape (at least 1.5 times around).
Use a standard wiring tool for laying the cable wires.

Table 8: Color Codes for the Open-End Cable

Color Group Pair A-wire B-wire

1 1 white/blue
blue/white
2 white/orange
orange/white

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 279
Discontinued components

Color Group Pair A-wire B-wire

3 white/green
green/white
4 white/brown
brown/white
5 white/gray
gray/white
2 6 red/blue
blue/red
7 red/orange
orange/red
8 red/green
green/red
9 red/brown
brown/red
10 red/gray
gray/red
3 11 black/blue
blue/black
12 black/orange
orange/black
13 black/green
green/black
14 black/brown
brown/black
15 black/gray
gray/black
4 16 yellow/blue
blue/yellow
17 yellow/orange
orange/yellow
18 yellow/green
green/yellow
19 yellow/brown
brown/yellow
20 yellow/gray
gray/yellow

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
280 OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide
 Discontinued components

Color Group Pair A-wire B-wire

5 21 purple/blue
blue/purple
22 purple/orange
orange/purple
23 purple/green
green/purple
24 purple/brown
brown/purple

For information on the main characteristics of the MDFU and on the num-
bering of the splitting and jumper strips see Main Distribution Frame MD-
FU (Optional).
• If you use an external main distribution frame with CHAMP connectors
and a CHAMP cable, insert the connector into the desired CHAMP jack of
the external main distribution frame.
• If you use another external main distribution frame and an open-end ca-
ble, connect the cable to the desired splitting/jumper strip in the external
main distribution frame.
5) Attach the connection cable to the MDFU or to the external main distribution
frame using cable ties.

A31003-P3030-J102-05-7631, 09/07/2021
OpenScape Business V3, Installation Guide 281
Index
A L
accidents, reporting 21 license server (CLS)
edit the IP address 247
lightning protection requirements 24
B
board initialization 121 M
board installation
OpenScape Business X3R and X5R 86 main distribution frame MDFU 275
OpenScape Business X3W and X5W 49 Main Distribution Frame MDFU-E
OpenScape Business X8 125 protective grounding 110
Main Distribution Frame MDFU:wall mounting 276
MDFU 275
C
protective grounding 39
cabling for LAN and WAN connections 23 MDFU-E
CE Conformity 26 protective grounding 110
CE mark 25 MDFU:wall mounting 276
compliance
US and Canadian standards 26 O
concept 12
conformity OpenScape Business X3R
international standards 27 installation site 30
connector or screening panels 132 wall mounting 75
OpenScape Business X3R
19-inch cabinet installation 71
D board installation 86
data protection 25 installation 71
data security 25 performing a visual inspection 97
dial plan 180 shielding cover for board 87
Display Conventions 12 trunk connection 87
disposal 22 OpenScape Business X3R: board slots 85
OpenScape Business X3R:connecting phones and devices
91
E OpenScape Business X3W
electrical environment board slots 47
OpenScape Business S 23 connection cable to external main distribution frame
OpenScape Business UC Booster Server 23 276
electromagnetic interference 25 installation site 30
emergency, what to do 21, 21 interference emissions 62
LAN port 50
wall mounting 38
F WAN port 50
OpenScape Business X3W
fire safety requirements 24
board installation 49
installation 38
I performing a visual inspection 67
power supply (for U.S. and Canada only) 34
installation 177, 255
tools and resources 29
Internet Telephony Service Provider (ITSP) 218
trunk connection 51
IP address scheme 181
OpenScape Business X3W:connecting phones and devices
56
J OpenScape Business X5R
wall mounting 75
Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 178

|
OpenScape Business X5R P
19-inch cabinet installation 73
board installation 86 patch panel 107
installation 71 installation 109
installation site 30 protective grounding 110
performing a visual inspection 97 PCM highways
shielding cover for board 87 base box 122
trunk connection 87 expansion box 124
OpenScape Business X5R: board slots 86 power supply circuit and connection
OpenScape Business X5R:connecting phones and devices OpenScape Business S 23
91 OpenScape Business UC Booster Server 23
OpenScape Business X5W proper use of communication systems and servers 21
installation 38 protective grounding
installation site 30 main distribution frame MDFU 39
interference emissions 62 X3R 75
tools and resources 29 X3W 39
wall mounting 38 X5R 75
OpenScape Business X5W X5W 39
board installation 49
board slots 48 R
connection cable to external main distribution frame
276 radio frequency interference 25
LAN port 50 recycling 22
performing a visual inspection 67 remote access
power supply (for U.S. and Canada only) 34 enable via Internet access with a fixed IP address 245,
trunk connection 51 248, 248, 249
WAN port 50
OpenScape Business X5W:connecting phones and devices S
56
OpenScape Business X8 safety information 13
backplane 128 safety information for Australia 17
board installation 125 safety information for Brazil 17
connecting cable to the MDFU-E 135 safety information for Canada 20
connecting cable to the patch panel 136 safety information for the U.S. 17
connecting cable to the S0 patch panel 137 shielding cover for board 87, 127
connector or shielding panel 132 slots in the base box 119
PCM highways in the base box 122 slots in the expansion box 120
PCM highways in the expansion box 124
performing a visual inspection 151
T
protective grounding 110
shielding cover for board 127 time-division multiplex channels 125
time-division multiplex channels of the peripheral boards topics, types 12
125
OpenScape Business X8
19-inch cabinet installation 104 U
installation 99 unpacking the components 34
installation site for 19’’ rack-mount installation 31
installation site for standalone installation 29, 31
standalone installation 99 W
trunk connection 139 warnings 13
OpenScape Business X8:closing the system box 152 caution 15
OpenScape Business X8:connecting phones and devices danger 14
143 note 16
operating conditions (environmental, mechanical)
warning 14
OpenScape Business S 28
OpenScape Business UC Booster Server 28
OpenScape Business X3, X5, X8 27
operating instructions 12